Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

modern poet

  • 1 moderne

    c black moderne [mɔdεʀn]
    1. adjective
    2. masculine noun
       a. le moderne ( = style) the modern style ; ( = meubles) modern furniture
    c black   b. ( = peintre) modern painter
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    Le mot anglais s'écrit sans e à la fin.
    * * *
    mɔdɛʀn
    adjectif modern
    * * *
    mɔdɛʀn adj
    * * *
    moderne adj ( tous contextes) modern; je n'aime pas le (mobilier) moderne I don't like modern furniture.
    [mɔdɛrn] adjectif
    1. [actuel, récent - mobilier, bâtiment, technique, théorie] modern
    les temps modernes, l'époque moderne modern times
    le mode de vie moderne modern living, today's way of life
    2. [progressiste - artiste, opinions, théoricien] modern, progressive
    4. ÉDUCATION [maths] modern, new
    [études, histoire] modern, contemporary
    5. LINGUISTIQUE [langue, sens] modern
    ————————
    [mɔdɛrn] nom masculin et féminin
    ————————
    [mɔdɛrn] nom masculin
    a. [genre] modern style
    b. [mobilier] modern furniture

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > moderne

  • 2 शामलदास


    ṡāmala-dāsa
    ṡāmala-bhaṭṭa
    m. N. of a modern poet MW.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > शामलदास

  • 3 शामलभट्ट


    ṡāmala-dāsa
    ṡāmala-bhaṭṭa
    m. N. of a modern poet MW.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > शामलभट्ट

  • 4 Pessoa, Fernando

    (1888-1935)
       Portugal's most celebrated and talented modern poet and one of Europe's greatest 20th-century poets, whose works are now translated into many languages. Pessoa was born in Portugal but was raised and educated in South Africa, and for a period, English became almost his first language. He returned to Portugal at age 12, and wrote poetry from an early age. He wrote poetry and essays both in English and in Portuguese under various names. Beyond that unusual practice, Pessoa created different personalities with names such as Alberto Caeiro, Ricardo Reis, Álvaro de Campos, and Bernardo Soares, his heteronyms. He became one of Europe's greatest modernist poets, although he did not publish much of his poetry in book form during his lifetime. His book Mensagem (Message), published in 1934 in Lisbon and receiving a government prize, appeared only a year before his premature death at age 47. Although he had published poems in scattered, ephemeral periodicals in Portugal, much of his writings remained unpublished, stored in a family trunk.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Pessoa, Fernando

  • 5 ALL-

    may be prefixed to almost every adjective and adverb in an intensive sense, very, extremely.
    * * *
    may in old writers be prefixed to almost every adjective and adverb in an intensive sense, like Engl. very, Lat. per-, Gr. οια-, ζα-. In common talk and modern writings it is rare (except after a negative), and denotes something below the average, viz. tolerably, pretty well, not very well; but in the Sagas, something capital, exceeding. In high style it may perhaps be used in the old sense, e. g. allfagrt ljós oss birtist brátt, a transl. of the Ambrosian hymn, Aurora lucis rutilat. The instances in old writers are nearly endless, e. g. all-annt, n. adj. very eager, Fms. ii. 41; ironically, 150. all-apr, adj. very sore, very harsh, v. apr. all-auðsóttligt, n. adj. very easy, Fs. 40. all-auðveldliga, adv. very easily, Fms. iv. 129. all-auðveldligr, adj. very easy, Fms. v. 331. all-auðveldr, adj. id., Fbr. 158: neut. as adv., Hkr. ii. 76. all-ágætr, adj. very famous, Fms. ii. 76. all-áhyggjusamliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very careful, Fms. vi. 184. all-ákafliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very hot, impetuous, Hkr. i. 234, ii. 32. all-ákaft, adj. very fast, Nj. 196. all-áræðiliga, adv. very likely, Fær. 183. all-áræðislítill, adj. very timid, Fms. vi. 217. all-ástúðligt, n. adj. very hearty, intimate, Fms. ii. 20. all-banvænn, adj. very likely to prove mortal, Orkn. 148. all-beinn, adj. very hospitable, Fms. ii. 84, Eb. 286: neut. as adv., Fær. 259. all-beiskr, adj. very harsh, bitter, Sturl. iii. 167. all-bert, n. adj. very manifest, Lex. Poët. all-bitr, adj. very biting, sharp, Sks. 548. all-bitrligr, adj. of a very sharp appearance, Vígl. 20. all-bjartr, adj. very bright, Fms. viii. 361. all-bjúgr, adj. very much bent, curved, Ölkofr. 39. all-blár, adj. very blue, Glúm. 394. all-blíðliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very blithely, kindly, Fær. 132. all-blíðr, adj. very mild, amiable, Sd. 158, Fms. i. 202. all-bráðgörr, adj. very soon mature, Eb. 16. all-bráðliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very hastily, Orkn. 72. all-bráðr, adj. very hot-headed, Njarð. 370: neut. as adv. very soon, Fms. xi. 51: dat. pl. all-bráðum, as adv. very suddenly, 139. all-bros-ligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very funny, laughable, Fms. iii. 113. all-dasigr, adj. very sluggish, Lex. Poët. all-digr, adj. very big, stout; metaph. puffed up, Nj. 236. all-djarfliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very boldly, Fms. ii. 313, Orkn. 102. all-djúpsettr, adj. very deep, thoughtful, Bret. 158. all-drengiliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very bold, gallant, Lv. 110. all-dræmt, n. adj. very boastfully, from dramb, superbia, (the modern word is dræmt = slowly, sluggishly); þeir létu a. yfir sér, boasted, Sturl. ii. 56. MS. Mus. Brit. 1127; Cod. A. M. has allvænt, prob. wrongly. all-dyggr, adj. very doughty, Lex. Poët. all-dýrr, adj. very dear, Fms. iii. 159. all-eiguligr, adj. very worth having, Sd. 146. all-eina (theol.), á Guð alleina (a hymn), alone: Hkr. iii. 339 (in a spurious chapter). all-einarðliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very sincere, candid, open, Ld. 334. all-eldiligr and -elliligr, adj. of a very aged appearance, Fms. iii. 125. all-fagr, adj. very bright, fair, Orkn. 296 old Ed.: neut. as adv. very fairly, Sturl. i. 72. all-fast, n. adj. very firmly, steadfastly, Eb. 290, Fær. 259. all-fastorðr, adj. very ‘wordfast,’ very true to his word, Fms. vii. 120. all-fálátr, adj. very taciturn, close, Fas. iii. 408. all-fáliga, adv. on very cold terms, Sturl. iii. 298. all-fámáligr, adj. very close, of very few words, Fms. iii. 85, iv. 366. all-fámennr, adj. followed by very few people, Sturl. ii. 122, Magn. 386. all-far, adj. very few, Eg. 512, Ld. 272, Ísl. ii. 356: neut. on very cold terms, Fms. xi. 55. all-fáræðinn, adj. of very few words, Fms. iv. 312. all-feginn, adj. very ‘fain,’ glad, Eg. 240, Ld. 330. all-feginsamliga, adv. very ‘fain,’ gladly, Eg. 27. all-feigligr, adj. having the mark of death very plain on one’s face, v. feigr, Sturl. iii. 234. all-feitr, adj. very fat, Fms. x. 303. all-ferliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very rudely, Fms. iv. 263. all-fémikill, adj. very costly, Ld. 298. all-fjarri, adv. very far, far from, metaph., Hkr. ii. 246; eigi a., not improper, Fbr. 15. all-fjartekit, part. very far-fetched, Skálda 166. all-fjölgan, adj. acc. very numerous (does not exist in nom.), Sks. 138 A. all-fjölkunnigr, adj. very deeply versed in sorcery, Fms. ii. 175, Fas. i. 412. all-fjölmeðr and -mennr, adj. followed, attended by very many people, much frequented, Eg. 724, 188, Hkr. i. 215: n. sing. in very great numbers, Fms. i. 36. all-fjölrætt, n. adj. very heedful, much talked of, Nj. 109. all-forsjáll, adj. very prudent, Hom. 115. all-framr, adj. very famous, Lex. Poët.; very far forward, Grett. 161 A. all-frekliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very daringly, impudently, Fas. i. 24. all-frekr, adj. too eager, too daring, Fms. vii. 164. all-friðliga, adv. in very great peace, Lex. Poët. all-fríðr, adj. very beautiful, Eg. 23, Hkr. i. 225, ii. 354, Fms. i. 2. all-frjáls, adj. very free, independent, v. alfrjáls. all-fróðligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very wise, learned, Sks. 306 B. all-fróðr, adj. very learned, Sks. 30. all-frægr, adj. very famous, Fms. ii. 324, Hkr. i. 232, ii. 187, Ld. 122. all-frækiliga, adv. and -ligr, adj., and all-frækn, adj. and -liga, adv. very bold, boldly, Ísl. ii. 267, Hkr. i. 239, Fms. i. 121. all-fúss, adj. and -liga, adv. very eager, eagerly, Eg. 488, Fms. xi. 89. all-fýsiligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very desirable, Eg. 19, 468. all-fölr, adj. very pale, Lex. Poët. all-gagnsamr, adj. very profitable, gainful, Ísl. ii. 56. all-gamall, adj. very old, Hkr. i. 34. all-gegniliga and -gegnliga, adv. very fittingly, Sturl. ii. 63. all-gemsmikill, adj. very wanton, frolicsome, Sturl. ii. 57. all-gerla and -görviligr, v. -görla, -görviligr. all-gestrisinn, adj. very hospitable, Háv. 40. all-geysilegr, adj. and -liga, adv. very impetuous, Fms. x. 81. all-gildliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. with a very grand air, Grett. 121. all-gildr, adj. very grand, Lex. Poët. all-giptusam-liga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very lucky, Fms. x. 53. all-glaðliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very joyfully, joyful, Fms. iii. 143, Lv. 55. all-glaðr, adj. very joyful, Eg. 163, Ld. 176. all-gleymr, adj. very gleeful, mirthful, in high spirits, [glaumr], verða a. við e-t, Sturl. iii. 152, Eb. 36. all-glæsiliga, adj. and -ligr, adv. very shiny, Eb. 34, Fas. iii. 626, Fms. ix. 430. all-glöggsær, adj. very transparent, dearly visible, metaph., þorf. Karl. 380. all-glöggt, n. adj. very exactly, Hkr. iii. 253, Fas. iii. 13. all-góðmannliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very kindly, kind, Mag. 6. all-góðr, adj. very good, Nj. 222, Eg. 36, 198. all-greiðliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very easy, easily, Eb. 268: neut. as adv., Eb. l. c. all-grimmliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very grimly, fiercely, Fas. iii. 414. all-grimmr, adj. very cruel, fierce, Hkr. iii. 167. all-grun-samliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very suspiciously, Ísl. ii. 364. all-göfugr, adj. very distinguished, Eg. 598, Bs. i. 60. all-görla, adv. very clearly, precisely, Hkr. iii. 133, Fms. xi. 15. all-görviligr, adj. very stout, manly, Fms. ii. 28. all-hagstæðr, adj. with a very fair wind, Sturl. iii. 109. all-harðligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very hard, stern, Fas. i. 382. all-harðr, adj. very hard, stern, Fms. i. 177: n. sing. severely, Nj. 165, Grág. i. 261. all-háskasamligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very hazardous, Fms. v. 135. all-heiðinn, adj. quite heathen, Fs. 89 (in a verse). all-heilagr, adj. very sacred, Lex. Poët. all-heimskliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very foolish, frantic, Hkr. ii. 190, Fas. iii. 293. all-heimskr, adj. very silly, stupid, Eg. 376, Grett. 159. all-heppinn, adj. very lucky, happy, Lex. Poët. all-herðimikill, adj. very broad-shouldered, Eg. 305. all-hermannliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very martial, Fms. xi. 233. all-hjaldrjúgr, adj. very gossipping, chattering, Lv. 57: neut. as adv., Vápn. 10. all-hógliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very gently, Fms. xi. 240, vi. 274. all-hóleitr and -háleitr, adj. very sublime, Hom. 23. all-hór and -hár, adj. very high, tall, v. -hár. all-hratt, n. adj. in all speed, Lex. Poët. all-hraustliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very bravely, Fms. viii. 289, Eb. 34. all-hraustr, adj. very valiant, Fms. viii. 267. all-hreystimannliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very valiantly, Fms. xi. 95. all-hrumliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very infirmly from age, Fas. ii. 91. all-hræddr, adj. very much afraid, Fbr. 94. all-hræðinn, adj. very timid, Fms. vi. 155. all-huml;mgsjúkr, adj. very grieved, heart-sick, Hkr. i. 243, Fms. vi. 133. all-hvass, adj. of the wind, blowing very sharp, Fms. ix. 20, Lex. Poët. all-hyggi-ligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very carefully, Fas. iii. 610. all-hýrliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very blandly, with a very bright face, Fas. iii. 636. all-hæðiligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very ridiculous, Finnb. 312. all-hældreginn, adj. walking very much on one’s heels, dragging the heels very much in walking, of an aged or beggarly person, Band. 9. all-hœgliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very softly, meekly, Fms. xi. 389. all-hœlinn, adj. very bragging, Lex. Poët. all-iðinn, adj. very diligent, laborious, Bs. i. 278. all-illa, adv. and -illr, adj. very badly, bad, wicked, Nj. 242, cp. ilia; ill-willed, Eg. 542: compar., vera allver um, to be worse off, Nj. 221 (Ed. allvant); angry, Lv. 145; disgraceful, Eg. 237; unfortunate, Sturl. ii. 47. all-jafnlyndr, adj. very calm, even-tempered, Fms. vi. 287. all-kaldr, adj. very cold, Vápn. 21. all-kappsamliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. with very much zeal, liberally, Hkr. i. 271; veita a., of hospitality, Ld. 292; mæla a., frankly, peremptorily, 296. all-kappsamr, adj. very eager, vehement, Eg. 187. all-karlmannliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very manfully, Fms. x. 141. all-kaupmannliga, adv. in a very businesslike, tradesmanlike way, Fms. v.255. all-kátligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very funny, Grett. 112. all-kátr, adj. very joyful, Nj. 18, Eg. 44, 332. all-keppinn, adj. very snappish, Lex. Poët. all-kerskiligr and -keskiligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very sarcastic, biting, Sturl. ii. 196. all-klókr, adj. very shrewd, Hkr. iii. 317. all-knáliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very stoutly, vigorously, Rd. 312. all-kostgæflliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very earnestly, in a very painstaking way, Stj. all-kostigr, adj. very excellent, Lex. Poët. all-kviklatr, adj. very quick, lively, Ld. 270. all-kynliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very strangely, strange, Ísl. ii. 58, Fms. ii. 227, Grett. 160. all-kyrrligr, adj. very quiet, tranquil, Háv. 49. all-kærr, adj. very dear, beloved, Eg. 139, Fms. i. 48; very fond of, Hkr. i. 194: neut., Eg. 116, of mutual love. all-langr, adj. very long, Háv. 49. all-laust, n. adj. very loosely, Fms. xi. 103. all-lágr, adj. very low, short of stature, Fbr. 68. all-lengi, adv. very long, K. Þ. K. 158. all-léttbrúnn, adj. of very brightened, cheerful countenance, Ld. 94. all-léttiliga, adv. very lightly, Fas. iii. 612. all-léttmælt, n. adj., vera a. um e-t, to speak in a very lively way, Fms. iv. 261. all-léttr, adj. very light (in weight), Fas. iii. 487. all-líkliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. in very agreeable, courteous terms, Fas. i. 84. all-likligr, adj. very likely, Fas. ii. 247, Sks. 669. all-líkr, adj. very like, Fas. iii. 579, Sd. 160, Korm. 142. all-lítilfjörligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very puny, prop. having little life in one, Háv. 54. all-lítill, adj. very little, Fær. 268: n. sing. all-lítt, as adv. very little, Nj. 108, 130, Korm. 172; poorly, Grett. 116. all-lyginn, adj. very given to lying, Fbr. 157. all-makligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very deserving, fitting, Sturl. iii. 127, Bjarn. 22. all-mann-fátt, n. adj. with very few people, Gísl. 31. all-mannhættr, adj. very dangerous, Fas. iii. 34. all-mannskæðr, adj. very full of manskathe, very murderous, Fms. ii. 512. all-mannæenligr, adj. a very promising man, Fms. iv. 254. all-mannvænn, adj. a man of very great promise, Hkr. ii. 182. all-margliga, adv. very affably, Sturl. iii. 27. all-margmæltr, part. very talkative, Sturl. ii. 179. all-margr, adj. very numerous, pl. very many, Nj. 32, Grág. ii. 176, Sks. 328, Gþl. 329. all-margrætt, n. adj. part. very much spoken of, Fms. viii. 275. all-málugr, adj. very loquacious, Hkr. iii. 152, 655 xi. 2. all-máttfarinn, adj. very much worn out, with very little strength left, Fas. ii. 356. all-máttlítill, adj. very weak, Fms. i. 159. all-meginlauss, adj. very void of strength, Fms. xi. 103. all-mikilfengligr, adj. very high and mighty, very imposing, Fs. all-mikill, adj. very great, Ísl. ii. 269, Nj. 193, Eg. 29, 39: neut. as adv. greatly, Fms. i. 24, vii. 110. all-mikilmannliga, adv. very nobly, Sturl. i. 33. all-misjafn, adj. very variously, unfavourably, in such phrases as, mæla a. um e-t, there were very different stories about the matter, leggja a. til, ganga a. undir, taka a. á, Eg. 242, Hkr. ii. 123, Fms. i. 86, vii. no, Ld. 166. all-mjór, adj. very slim, slender, narrow, Hkr. iii. 117, Gþl. 173. all-mjök, adv. very much, Nj. 134, Ld. 196, Eg. 19; féllu þá a. menn, in very great numbers, Fms. i. 173. all-myrkr, adj. very dark, Fms. ix. 23. all-mæðiliga, adv. with very great effort, heavily, Fms. ix. 16. all-nauðigr, adj. and -liga, adv. very reluctant, unwilling, Grett. 153; a. staddr, dangerously, Fms. v. 212. all-náinn, adj. very near, nearly related, Sks. 330. all-náttförull, adj. very much given to wandering by night, Lex. Poët. all-níðskárr, adj. of a poet, given to mocking, satirical verse, [níð and skáld (?)], Fms. ii. 7. all-nóg, adv. very abundantly, Sd. 182. all-nær, adv. very near, Fms. vii. 289; metaph., lagði a. at, pretty nearly, well-nigh, Fs., Sks. 684 B. all-nærri, adv. very near, Ld. 202, Fas. iii. 339. all-opt, adv. very often, Anecd. 38, Gþl. 169. all-orðfátt, n. adj. in the phrase, göra a. urn, to be very short of words as to, Bjarn. 31. all-ógurligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very frightful, Edda 41. all-ólmliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very furiously, Fas. iii. 546, Bárð. 177. áll-óttalaust, n. adj. with very little to fear, Eg. 371, v. l. all-ramskipaðr, adj. part. very strongly manned, Fms. iii. 13. all-rauðr, adj. very red, Ld. 182. all-ráðligr, adj. very expedient, advisable, Grett. 145. all-reiðiligr, adj. looking very wrathful, Fms. iv. 161. all-reiðr, adj. very wroth, angry, Edda 57, Nj. 135, Eg. 139. all-ríkmarmligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very grand, pompous, magnificent, Fms. i. 213. all-ríkr, adj. very powerful, Fms. i. 115. all-rýrliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very feebly, puny, Fbr. 28. all-röskliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very smart, brisk, Fms. viii. 317. all-sannligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very likely, ‘soothlike,’ Fms. iv. 270. all-sáttgjarnliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very placable, of mild disposition, Sturl. iii. 288. all-seinn, adj. very slow, Bs. i. 192: neut. as adv. slowly, Grett. 151 A. all-sigrsæll, adj. very victorious, having very good luck in war, Hkr. i. 28. all-skammr, adj. very short, very scant, Nj. 264: neut. substantively, a very short way, Finnb. 324; short distance, Fms. iv. 329. all-skapliga, adv. very fittingly, properly, Grett. 120. all-skapværr, adj. of a very gentle, meek disposition, Sturl. all-skapþungt, n. adj., vera a., to be in a very gloomy, depressed state of mind, Fms. iv. 26. all-skarpr, adj. very sharp, Lex. Poët. all-skeinuhættr, adj. very dangerous, vulnerable, Sturl. ii. 139. all-skemtiligr, adj. very amusing, Sturl. ii. 77. all-skillítill, adj. very slow-witted, dull, Sturl. j. 89. all-skjallkænliga, adv. [skjalla, to flatter], very coaxingly, Grett. 131 A. all-skjótt, n. adj. as adv. very soon, Nj. 236. all-skrautligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very smart, splendid, Fas. ii. 366, Mag. 11. all-skygn, adj. very sharp-sighted, Hrafn. 33. all-skyldr, adj. bound to, very obligatory; neut. = bounden duty, Sks. 484; deserved, Gþl. 61:
    β. nearly related, near akin, Fms. xi. 75. all-skyndiliga, adv. very quickly, Blas. 40. all-skynsamliga, adv. very judiciously, Sturl. iii. 161. all-skyrugr, adj. all curd-besprent, Grett. 107 A. all-sköruliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very frankly, boldly, dignified, Sturl. iii. 39, Fms. ix. 5, Ld. 94 C, 226, Bs. i. all-sljáliga, adv. very slowly, sluggishly, Grett. 101 A. all-smár, adj. very small, Fms. v. 55, xi. 61. all-snarpliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very sharply, smartly, Fms. viii. 346. all-snarpr, adj. very sharp, Fms. i. 38, Nj. 246. all-snemma, adv. very early, Fms. ii. 223. all-snjallr, adj. very shrewd, clever, Fms. viii. 367. all-snúðula, adv. very quickly, Lex. Poët. all-snæfr, adj. very brisk, id. all-snöfurmannligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very brisk and energetic looking, of a man, Fms. xi. 79. all-spakliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very mildly, moderately, wisely, Hkr. ii. 41. all-spakr, adj. very gentle, wise, Fms. vi. 298. all-starsýnn, adj. who stares very hard at a thing, looking fixedly upon, Fms. vi. 203. all-sterkliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very briskly, strongly, Ld. 158, Fas. iii. 612. all-sterkr, adj. very strong, Hkr. i. 238, Eg. 285; Ísl. ii. 461 ( very vehement); as a pr. name, Fms. iii. 183. all-stilliliga, adv. very calmly, in a very composed manner, Ld. 318. all-stirðr, adj. very stiff, Háv. 46. all-stórhöggr, adj. dealing very hard blows, Fms. i. 171. all-stórliga, adv. very haughtily, Hkr. ii. 63, Ld. 168. all-stórmannliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very munificently, nobly, Fas. iii. 45; haughtily, Sd. 146. all-stórorðr, adj. using very big words, Eg. 340, Ld. 38 ( very boisterous). all-stórr, adj. very great, metaph. big, puffed up, Ld. 318; dat. all-stórum, as adv. very largely, Edda 32. all-strangr, adj. very rapid, Lex. Poët. all-styggr, adj. very ill-humoured, cross, Grett. 103 A. all-styrkliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very stoutly, Stj. 402. all-styrkr, adj. very strong, Fms. i. 177. all-svangr, adj. very hungry, Lex. Poët. all-svinnliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very wisely, prudently, wise, Fas. i. 95, ii. 266. all-sættfúss, adj. very placable, peace-loving, very willing to accept an atonement, Sturl. iii. 19. all-sœmiliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very seemly, decorous, honourable, Hkr. i. 215, Ísl. ii. 163. all-tiginn, adj. very princely, Lex. Poët. all-tillátsamr, adj. very indulgent, lenient, Þórð. 12. all-tíðrætt, n. adj. very much talked of, much spoken of, Eg. 99, Sturl. i. 199. all-tíðvirkr, adj. very quick at work, Fms. xi. 377. all-torfyndr, adj. very hard to find, Fms. vii. 356. all-torfært, n. adj. very hard to pass, cross, Eg. 546. all-torsótt, n. adj. part. very difficult to reach, Eg. 546. all-tortryggiliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very suspiciously, Sturl. ii. 47. all-torveldligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very difficult, Str. all-trauðr, adj. very slow, unwilling, Fms. xi. 39. all-tregr, adj. very tardy, Fær. 114, Bárð. 178. all-trúr, adj. very true. Fms. vi. 377. all-tryggr, adj. very trusty, Hkr. iii. 167. all-tvítugr, false reading, instead of eigi alls t., not quite twenty, Sturl. i. 181. all-undarligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very odd, wonderful, Fms. ii. 150. all-ungr, adj. very young, Eg. 268, Fms. i. 14, Ld. 274. all-úbeinskeyttr, adj. shooting very badly, Fms. ii. 103. all-úblíðr, adj. very harsh, unkind, Fas. ii. all-úbragðligr, adj. very ill-looking, Sturl. iii. 234. all-údæll, adj. very spiteful, untractable, Sturl. i. 99. all-úfagr, adj. very ugly, metaph., Fms. iii. 154. all-úfimliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very awkwardly, Fas. ii. 543. all-úframliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very backward, shy, timid, Fbr. 38 C. all-úfríðr, adj. very ugly, Fms. xi. 227. all-úfrýnn, adj. very sullen, ‘frowning,’ sour, Eg. 525. all-úfrægr, adj. very inglorious, Fms. iv. 259. all-úglaðr, adj. very gloomy, sad, Hkr. iii. 379. all-úhægr, adj. very difficult, Eg. 227. all-úhöfðingligr, adj. very low-looking, very plebeian, Finnb. 222. all-úkátr, adj. very sorrowful, Edda 35, Eg. 223, Fms. i. 37. all-úknár, adj. very weak of frame, Grett. 119 A, very badly knit; Bs. i. 461 (of boys). all-úkonungligr, adj. very unkingly, Fms. viii. 158. all-úkunnigr, adj. quite unknown, Ísl. ii. 412. all-úlífligr, adj. very unlikely to live, Hkr. ii. 200. all-úlíkliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very unlikely, Gísl. 24, Sd. 123, Finnb. 310. all-úlíkr, adj. very unlike, Glúm. 364. all-úlyginn, adj. not at all given to lie, truthful, Fbr. 157. all-úmáttuliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. weakly, very weak, tender, Fms. iv. 318. all-úráðinn, adj. part. very ‘unready’ (cp. Ethelred the ‘unready’), undecided, Lv. 9. all-úráðliga, adv. very unadvisedly, rashly, Odd. 12 old Ed. all-úsannligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very untruthful, unjust; also, unlikely, Fms. vii. 141. all-úsáttfúss, adj. very implacable, unwilling to come to terms, Sturl. iii. 275. all-úskyldr, adj. very strange to, not at all bound to…, Eg. 10. all-úspakr, adj. very unruly, Sturl. ii. 61. all-úsváss, adj. very uncomfortable, of weather, cold and rainy, Bs. i. 509. all-úsýnn, adj. very uncertain, doubtful, Glúm. 358, Sturl. i. 105. all-úsæligr, adj. of very poor, wretched appearance, Niðrst. 109. all-úvinsæll, adj. very unpopular, Fms. iv. 369, Fas. iii. 520. all-úvísliga, adv. very unwisely, Niðrst. 6. all-úvænliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. of very unfavourable prospect, Fas. ii. 266; n. adj. very unpromising, Grett. 148 A. all-úvænn, adi. very ugly, Fas. i. 234; very unpromising, unfavourable, Ísl. ii. 225: neut. as adv. unfavourably, Fms. xi. 134. all-úþarfr, adj. very unthrifty, very unprofitable, something that had better be prevented, Eg. 576, Hkr. ii. 245. all-vandlátr, adj. very difficult, hard to please, Fms. vi. 387. all-vandliga, adv. with very great pains, exactly, carefully, Sks. 658 B. all-vant, n. adj., vera a. um e-t, to be in a very great strait, Nj. 221. all-varfærr, adj. very careful, solicitous, Eg. 63. all-vaskligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very brisk, smart, gallant, Hkr. i. 104; compar. v. alvaskligr. all-vaskr, adj. very brisk, gallant, Fms. viii. 226. all-vandr, adj. very bad, of clothes, much worn, Pm. 11. all-vápndjarfr, adj. very bold, daring in arms, Hkr. iii. 63. all-veðrlítið, n. adj. very calm, with little wind, Fms. vi. 360. all-vegliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very grand, princely, nobly, Fms. i. 20, Eg. 332, Hkr. i. 15. all-vel, adv. very well, Nj. 12, Eg. 78, 198; compar. albetr, v. alvel. all-vesall, adj. very puny, wretched, Nj. 97. all-vesalliga, adv. very wretchedly, Ölk. 35. all-vesalmannliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. id., Ísl. ii. 416. all-vesæll, adj. very miserable, base, vile, Nj. 97. all-vingjarnliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very friendly, amicable, Sturl. ii. 168. all-vingott, n. adj. on very friendly terms, Fbr. 129. all-vinsæll, adj. very popular, used of a man blessed with many friends, Fms. i. 184, ii. 44, Orkn. 104 old Ed. all-virðuligr, adj. and -liga, adv. very worthy, dignified, Fms. x. 84, Bs. i. 83. all-vitr, adj. very wise, Sks. 29 B (superl.) all-vitrliga, adv. very wisely, Fas. ii. 66. all-víða and all-vítt, n. adj. very widely, Hkr. iii. 141, Lex. Poët. all-vígliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. in a very warlike manner, Fms. ix. 488, Fas. ii. 112. all-vígmannliga, adv. very martially, Fas. iii. 150. all-vígmóðr, adj. quite wearied out with fighting, Introd. to Helgakviða (Sæm.) all-víss, adj. very wise, sure, Sks. 520, Lex. Poët.: neut. to a dead certainty, Lex. Poët. all-vænliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very promising, handsome, Glúm. 349, Fms. v. 260, Fbr. 114. all-vænn, adj. id., Clem. 24, Bs. i. 340: neut., þykja a. um, to be in high spirits, Ísl. ii. 361; make much of, Fms. ii. 76; as adv. favourably, Fms. iv. 192. all-vörpuligr, adj. of a very stout, stately frame, Hkr. ii. 254. all-vöxtuligr, adj. very tall, of large growth, Fas. iii. 627. all-þakkligr, adj. very pretty, = þekkiligr, Lex. Poët. all-þakksamliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very thankfully, Fms. i. 120, Ld. 298. all-þarfliga, adv. very thriftily, very pressingly; biðja a., to beg very hard, Edda 45. all-þarfr, adj. very thrifty, Lex. Poët. all-þéttr, adj. very crowded, cp. Lex. Poët. all-þrekligr, adj. of a very robust frame, Hkr. ii. 2. all-þröngr, adj. as neut. in a very great crowd, Edda 24. all-þungliga, adv. and -ligr, adj. very hard, unwilling, reluctant, Sturl. ii. 120; taka a. á e-m, to be very hard upon, Mag. 1. all-þungr, adj. very unfavourable, Hkr. ii. 358; hostile, badly disposed towards, Eb. 108, Eg. 332; þykja a., to dislike, Fms. viii. 441; a. orð, to blame, Sturl. ii. 62. all-þykkr, adj. very thick, Fas. i. 339: n. sing. as adv. thickly, Fms. vii. 70 (of great numbers slain on the battle-field). all-æfr, adj. very furious, wrath, Ísl. ii. 258, Lv. 60, Fas. i. 404. all-ægiligr, adj. very terrible, Dropl. 18. all-æstr, adj. very incited, vehement, Nj. 231. all-örorðr, adj. very quick-tongued, frank, outspoken, Eg. 340. all-öruggliga, adv. very steadfastly, very firmly, Grett. 153 A. all-öruggr, adj. very unflinching, Bs. i. 624.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > ALL-

  • 6 AT

    I) prep.
    A. with dative.
    I. Of motion;
    1) towards, against;
    Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;
    hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;
    Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;
    þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;
    3) to, at;
    koma at landi, to come to land;
    ganga at dómi, to go into court;
    4) along (= eptir);
    ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;
    dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;
    refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;
    5) denoting hostility;
    renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;
    gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;
    6) around;
    vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;
    bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;
    7) denoting business, engagement;
    ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;
    fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.
    II. Of position, &c.;
    1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;
    at kirkju, at church;
    at dómi, in court;
    at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;
    2) denoting participation in;
    vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;
    3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;
    kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;
    var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;
    4) with proper names of places (farms);
    konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;
    biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;
    at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;
    5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;
    at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;
    at Marðar, at Mara’s home;
    at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;
    at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).
    III. Of time;
    1) at, in;
    at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;
    at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;
    at páskum, at Easter;
    at kveldi, at eventide;
    at fjöru, at the ebb;
    at flœðum, at the floodtide;
    2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;
    at ári komanda, next year;
    at vári, er kemr, next spring;
    generally with ‘komanda’ understood;
    at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;
    3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;
    at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;
    at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;
    at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;
    at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;
    at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;
    at honum önduðum, after his death;
    4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;
    hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;
    skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;
    at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.
    IV. fig. and in various uses;
    1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;
    brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;
    verða at ormi, to become a snake;
    2) for, as;
    gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;
    eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;
    3) by;
    taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;
    draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;
    kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;
    auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;
    vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;
    5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;
    ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;
    6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;
    faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);
    aðili at sök = aðili sakar;
    7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;
    hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;
    mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;
    tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;
    kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;
    8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;
    Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);
    þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;
    hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;
    9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);
    at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;
    at landslögum, by the law of the land;
    at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;
    10) in adverbial phrases;
    gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;
    bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;
    at fullu, fully;
    at vísu, surely;
    at frjálsu, freely;
    at eilífu, for ever and ever;
    at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;
    at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;
    at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.
    B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);
    sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;
    at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;
    connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;
    at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.
    1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;
    at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;
    2) in an objective sense;
    hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;
    gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;
    3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).
    1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;
    hón grét at meir, she wept the more;
    þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;
    þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;
    2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);
    þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;
    sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.
    conj., that;
    1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;
    þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;
    vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;
    2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;
    svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;
    3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);
    4) since, because, as (= því at);
    5) connected with þó, því, svá;
    þó at (with subj.), though, although;
    því at, because, for;
    svá at, so that;
    6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;
    þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;
    þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;
    áðr at (= á. en), before;
    7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;
    Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;
    in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.
    V)
    negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.
    odda at, Yggs at, battle.
    * * *
    1.
    and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is (); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.
    Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.
    WITH DAT.
    A. LOC.
    I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:
    1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.
    2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.
    3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)
    4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.
    5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.
    β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.
    6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.
    β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.
    γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.
    7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.
    β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.
    8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.
    β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.
    II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.
    2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.
    3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:
    α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.
    β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.
    γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.
    4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.
    5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.
    6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.
    β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.
    γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.
    7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.
    B. TEMP.
    I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.
    II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.
    β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.
    III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:
    1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,
    2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.
    IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:
    1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.
    2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.
    3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.
    V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.
    2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.
    C. METAPH. and in various cases:
    I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:
    α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.
    β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.
    II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.
    2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.
    III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.
    IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.
    2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)
    3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.
    4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.
    5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.
    6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.
    β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.
    V. denoting the source of a thing:
    1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.
    2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.
    VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.
    VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.
    VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.
    β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.
    IX. following many words:
    1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.
    β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …
    γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.
    δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.
    2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.
    3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.
    WITH ACC.
    TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.
    ☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.
    2.
    and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.
    I. it is used either,
    1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,
    2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.
    β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).
    3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.
    II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:
    α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.
    β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.
    γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.
    δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.
    ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.
    ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.
    η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.
    θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.
    3.
    and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.
    I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.
    II. it is used,
    1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.
    2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.
    β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.
    γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.
    III. used in connection with conjunctions,
    1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.
    α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yetthough, Lat. attamenetsi, K. Þ. K.
    β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.
    γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.
    2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.
    IV. as a relat. conj.:
    1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.
    2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.
    V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.
    4.
    and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.
    5.
    n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.
    β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.
    6.
    the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT

  • 7 Á

    * * *
    a negative suffix to verbs, not;
    era útmakligt, at it is not unmeet that.
    * * *
    1.
    á, prep., often used elliptically, or even adverbially, [Goth. ana; Engl. on; Germ. an. In the Scandinavian idioms the liquid n is absorbed. In English the same has been supposed to happen in adverbial phrases, e. g. ‘along, away, abroad, afoot, again, agate, ahead, aloft, alone, askew, aside, astray, awry,’ etc. It is indeed true that the Ormulum in its northern dialect freq. uses o, even in common phrases, such as ‘o boke, o land, o life, o slæpe, o strande, o write, o naht, o loft,’ etc., v. the glossary; and we may compare on foot and afoot, on sleep (Engl. Vers. of Bible) and asleep; A. S. a-butan and on-butan (about); agen and ongean (again, against); on bæc, aback; on life, alive; on middan, amid. But it is more than likely that in the expressions quoted above, as well as in numberless others, as well in old as in modern English, the English a- as well as the o- of the Ormulum and the modern Scottish and north of England o- are in reality remains of this very á pronounced au or ow, which was brought by the Scandinavian settlers into the north of England. In the struggle for supremacy between the English dialects after the Conquest, the Scandinavian form á or a won the day in many cases to the exclusion of the Anglo-Saxon on. Some of these adverbs have representatives only in the Scandinavian tongues, not in Anglo-Saxon; see below, with dat. B. II, C. VII; with acc. C. I. and VI. The prep. á denotes the surface or outside; í and ór the inside; at, til, and frá, nearness measured to or from an object: á thus answers to the Gr. επί; the Lat. in includes á and i together.]
    With dat. and acc.: in the first case with the notion of remaining on a place, answering to Lat. in with abl.; in the last with the notion of motion to the place, = Lat. in with acc.
    WITH DAT.
    A. Loc.
    I. generally on, upon; á gólfi, on the floor, Nj. 2; á hendi, on the hand (of a ring), 48, 225; á palli, 50; á steini, 108; á vegg, 115; á sjá ok á landi, on sea and land. In some instances the distinction between d and i is loose and wavering, but in most cases common sense and usage decide; thus ‘á bók’ merely denotes the letters, the penmanship, ‘í’ the contents of a book; mod. usage, however, prefers ‘í,’ lesa í bók, but stafr á bók. Old writers on the other hand; á bókum Enskum, in English books, Landn. 24, but í Aldafars bók, 23 (in the book De Mensurâ Temporum, by Bede), cp. Grág. i. 76, where á is a false reading instead of at; á bréfi, the contents of a letter: of clothing or arms, mítr á höfði, sverð á hlið, mitre on head, sword on side, Fms. i. 266, viii. 404; hafa lykil á sér, on one’s person, 655 xxvii. 22; möttull á tyglum, a mantle hanging on (i. e. fastened by) laces, Fms. vii. 201: á þingi means to be present at a meeting; í þingi, to abide within a jurisdiction; á himni, á jörðu, on (Engl. in) heaven and earth, e. g. in the Lord’s Prayer, but í helviti, in hell; á Gimli, Edda (of a heavenly abode); á báti, á skipi denote crew and cargo, ‘í’ the timber or materials of which a ship is built, Eg. 385; vera í stafni á skipi, 177: á skógi, to be abroad in a wood (of a hunter, robber, deer); but to be situated (a house), at work (to fell timber), í skógi, 573, Fs. 5, Fms. iii. 122, viii. 31, xi. 1, Glúm. 330, Landn. 173; á mörkinni, Fms. i. 8, but í mörk, of a farm; á firðinum means lying in a firth, of ships or islands (on the surface of the water), þær eyjar liggja á Breiðafirði, Ld. 36; but í firði, living in a district named Firth; á landi, Nj. 98, Fms. xi. 386.
    II. á is commonly used in connection with the pr. names or countries terminating in ‘land,’ Engl. in, á Englandi, Írlandi, Skotlandi, Bretlandi, Saxlandi, Vindlandi, Vínlandi, Grænalandi, Íslandi, Hálogalandi, Rogalandi, Jótlandi, Frakklandi, Hjaltlandi, Jamtalandi, Hvítramannalandi, Norðrlöndum, etc., vide Landn. and the index to Fms. xii. In old writers í is here very rare, in modern authors more frequent; taste and the context in many instances decide. An Icelander would now say, speaking of the queen or king, ‘á Englandi,’ ruling over, but to live ‘í Englandi,’ or ‘á Englandi;’ the rule in the last case not being quite fixed.
    2. in connection with other names of countries: á Mæri, Vörs, Ögðum, Fjölum, all districts of Norway, v. Landn.; á Mýrum (in Icel.), á Finnmörk, Landn., á Fjóni (a Danish island); but í Danmörk, Svíþjóð (á Svíþjóðu is poët., Gs. 13).
    3. before Icel. farms denoting open and elevated slopes and spaces (not too high, because then ‘at’ must be used), such as ‘staðr, völlr, ból, hjalli, bakki, heimr, eyri,’ etc.; á Veggjum, Landn. 69; á Hólmlátri, id.: those ending in ‘-staðr,’ á Geirmundarstöðum, Þórisstöðum, Jarðlangsstöðum…, Landn.: ‘-völlr,’ á Möðruvöllum: á Fitjum (the farm) í Storð (the island), í Fenhring (the island) á Aski (the farm), Landn., Eg.: ‘-nes’ sometimes takes á, sometimes í (in mod. usage always ‘í’), á Nesi, Eb. 14, or í Krossnesi, 30; in the last case the notion of island, νησος, prevails: so also, ‘fjörðr,’ as, þeir börðust á Vigrafirði (of a fight o n the ice), Landn. 101, but orusta í Hafrsfirði, 122: with ‘-bær,’ á is used in the sense of a farm or estate, hón sa á e-m bæ mikit hús ok fagrt, Edda 22; ‘í bæ’ means within doors, of the buildings: with ‘Bær’ as pr. name Landn. uses ‘í,’ 71, 160, 257, 309, 332.
    4. denoting on or just above; of the sun, when the time is fixed by regarding the sun in connection with points in the horizon, a standing phrase in Icel.; sól á gjáhamri, when the sun is on the crag of the Rift, Grág. i. 26, cp. Glúm. 387; so, brú á á, a bridge on a river, Fms. viii. 179, Hrafn. 20; taka hús á e-m, to surprise one, to take the house over his head, Fms. i. 11.
    III. á is sometimes used in old writers where we should now expect an acc., esp. in the phrase, leggja sverði (or the like) á e-m, or á e-m miðjum, to stab, Eg. 216, Gísl. 106, Band. 14; þá stakk Starkaðr sprotanum á konungi, then Starkad stabbed the king with the wand, Fas. iii. 34; bíta á kampi (vör), to bite the lips, as a token of pain or emotion, Nj. 209, 68; taka á e-u, to touch a thing, lay hold of it, v. taka; fá á e-u, id. (poët.); leggja hendr á (better at) síðum, in wrestling, Fms. x. 331; koma á úvart á e-m, to come on one unawares, ix. 407 (rare).
    B. TEMP. of a particular point or period of time, at, on, in:
    I. gener. denoting during, in the course of; á nótt, degi, nætrþeli …, Bs. i. 139; or spec. adding a pron. or an adject., á næsta sumri, the next summer; á því ári, þingi, misseri, hausti, vári, sumri …, during, in that year …, Bs. i. 679, etc.; á þrem sumrum, in the course of three summers, Grág. i. 218; á þrem várum, Fms. ii. 114; á hálfs mánaðar fresti, within half a month’s delay, Nj. 99; á tvítugs, sextugs … aldri, á barns, gamals aldri, etc., at the age of …, v. aldr: á dögum e-s, in the days of, in his reign or time, Landn. 24, Hrafn. 3, Fms. ix. 229.
    II. used of a fixed recurrent period or season; á várum, sumrum, haustum, vetrum, á kveldum, every spring, summer …, in the evenings, Eg. 711, Fms. i. 23, 25, vi. 394, Landn. 292: with the numeral adverbs, cp. Lat. ter in anno, um sinn á mánuði, ári, once a month, once a year, where the Engl. a is not the article but the preposition, Grág. i. 89.
    III. of duration; á degi, during a whole day, Fms. v. 48; á sjau nóttum, Bárð. 166; á því meli, during that time, in the meantime, Grág. i. 259.
    IV. connected with the seasons (á vetri, sumri, vári, hausti), ‘á’ denotes the next preceding season, the last winter, summer, autumn, Eb. 40, 238, Ld. 206: in such instances ‘á’ denotes the past, ‘at’ the future, ‘í’ the present; thus í vetri in old writers means this winter; á vetri, last winter; at vetri, next winter, Eb. 68 (in a verse), etc.
    C. In various other relations, more or less metaphorically, on, upon, in, to, with, towards, against:
    I. denoting object, in respect of, against, almost periphrastically; dvelja á náðum e-s, under one’s protection, Fms. i. 74; hafa metnað á e-u, to be proud of, to take pride in a thing, 127.
    2. denoting a personal relation, in; bæta e-t á e-m, to make amends, i. e. to one personally; misgöra e-t á e-m, to inflict wrong on one; hafa elsku (hatr) á e-m, to bear love ( hatred) to one, Fms. ix. 242; hefna sín á e-m, to take revenge on one’s person, on anyone; rjúfa sætt á e-m, to break truce on the person of any one, to offend against his person, Nj. 103; hafa sár á sér, 101; sjá á e-m, to read on or in one’s face; sér hann á hverjum manni hvárt til þín er vel eðr illa, 106; var þat brátt auðséð á hennar högum, at …, it could soon be seen in all her doings, that …, Ld. 22.
    3. also generally to shew signs of a thing; sýna fáleika á sér, to shew marks of displeasure, Nj. 14, Fs. 14; taka vel, illa, lítt, á e-u, to take a thing well, ill, or indifferently, id.; finna á sér, to feel in oneself; fann lítt á honum, hvárt …, it could hardly be seen in his face, whether …, Eb. 42; líkindi eru á, it is likely, Ld. 172; göra kost á e-u, to give a choice, chance of it, 178; eiga vald á e-u, to have power over …, Nj. 10.
    II. denoting encumbrance, duty, liability; er fimtardómsmál á þeim, to be subject to …, Nj. 231; the phrase, hafa e-t á hendi, or vera á hendi e-m, on one’s hands, of work or duty to be done; eindagi á fé, term, pay day, Grág. i. 140; ómagi (skylda, afvinna) á fé, of a burden or encumbrance, D. I. and Grág. in several passages.
    III. with a personal pronoun, sér, mér, honum …, denoting personal appearance, temper, character, look, or the like; vera þungr, léttr … á sér, to be heavy or light, either bodily or mentally; þungr á sér, corpulent, Sturl. i. 112; kátr ok léttr á sér, of a gay and light temper, Fms. x. 152; þat bragð hafði hann á sér, he looked as if, … the expression of his face was as though …, Ld., cp. the mod. phrase, hafa á sér svip, bragð, æði, sið, of one’s manner or personal appearance, to bear oneself as, or the like; skjótr (seinn) á fæti, speedy ( slow) of foot, Nj. 258.
    IV. as a periphrasis of the possessive pronoun connected with the limbs or parts of the body. In common Icel. such phrases as my hands, eyes, head … are hardly ever used, but höfuð, eyru, hár, nef, munnr, hendr, fætr … á mér; so ‘í’ is used of the internal parts, e. g. hjarta, bein … í mér; the eyes are regarded as inside the body, augun í honum: also without the possessive pronoun, or as a periphrasis for a genitive, brjóstið á e-m, one’s breast, Nj. 95, Edda 15; súrnar í augum, it smarts in my eyes, my eyes smart, Nj. 202; kviðinn á sér, its belly, 655 xxx. 5, Fms. vi. 350; hendr á henni, her hands, Gísl. (in a verse); í vörunum á honum, on his lips, Band. 14; ristin á honum, his step, Fms. viii. 141; harðr í tungu, sharp of tongue, Hallfred (Fs. 114); kalt (heitt) á fingrum, höndum, fótum …, cold ( warm) in the fingers, hands, feet …, i. e. with cold fingers, etc.; cp. also the phrase, verða vísa (orð) á munni, of extemporising verses or speeches, freq. in the Sagas; fastr á fótum, fast by the leg, of a bondsman, Nj. 27: of the whole body, díla fundu þeir á honum, 209. The pers. pron. is used only in solemn style (poetry, hymns, the Bible), and perhaps only when influenced by foreign languages, e. g. mitt hjarta hví svo hryggist þú, as a translation of ‘warumb betrübst du dich mein Herz?’ the famous hymn by Hans Sachs; instead of the popular hjartað í mér, Sl. 43, 44: hjartað mitt is only used as a term of endearment, as by a husband to his wife, parents to their child, or the like, in a metaphorical sense; the heart proper is ‘í mér,’ not ‘mitt.’
    2. of other things, and as a periphrasis of a genitive, of a part belonging to the whole, e. g. dyrr á husi = húsdyrr, at the house-doors; turn á kirkju = kirkju turn; stafn, skutr, segl, árar … á skipi, the stem, stern, sail … of a ship, Fms. ix. 135; blöð á lauk, á tré …, leaves of a leek, of a tree …, Fas. i. 469; egg á sverði = sverðs egg; stafr á bók; kjölr á bók, and in endless other instances.
    V. denoting instrumentality, by, on, or a-, by means of; afla fjár á hólmgöngum, to make money a-duelling, by means of duels, Eg. 498; á verkum sínum, to subsist on one’s own work, Njarð. 366: as a law term, sekjast á e-ju, to be convicted upon …, Grág. i. 123; sekst maðr þar á sínu eigini ( a man is guilty in re sua), ef hann tekr af þeim manni er heimild ( possessio) hefir til, ii. 191; falla á verkum sínum, to be killed flagranti delicto, v. above; fella e-n á bragði, by a sleight in wrestling; komast undan á flótta, to escape by flight, Eg. 11; á hlaupi, by one’s feet, by speed, Hkr. ii. 168; lifa á e-u, to feed on; bergja á e-u, to taste of a thing; svala sér á e-u, to quench the thirst on.
    VI. with subst. numerals; á þriðja tigi manna, up to thirty, i. e. from about twenty to thirty, Ld. 194; á öðru hundraði skipa, from one to two hundred sail strong, Fms. x. 126; á níunda tigi, between eighty and ninety years of age, Eg. 764, v. above: used as prep., á hendi, on one’s hand, i. e. bound to do it, v. hönd.
    VII. in more or less adverbial phrases it may often be translated in Engl. by a participle and a- prefixed; á lopti, aloft; á floti, afloat; á lífi, alive; á verðgangi, a-begging; á brautu, away; á baki, a-back, behind, past; á milli, a-tween; á laun, alone, secretly; á launungu, id.; á móti, against; á enda, at an end, gone; á huldu, hidden; fara á hæli, to go a-heel, i. e. backwards, Fms. vii. 70;—but in many cases these phrases are transl. by the Engl. partic. with a, which is then perh. a mere prefix, not a prep., á flugi, a-flying in the air, Nj. 79; vera á gangi, a-going; á ferli, to be about; á leiki, a-playing, Fms. i. 78; á sundi, a-swimming, ii. 27; á verði, a-watching, x. 201; á hrakningi, a-wandering; á reiki, a-wavering; á skjálfi, a-shivering; á-hleri, a-listening; á tali, a-talking, Ísl. ii. 200; á hlaupi, a-running, Hkr. ii. 268; á verki, a-working; á veiðum, a-hunting; á fiski, a-fishing; á beit, grazing: and as a law term it even means in flagranti, N. G. L. i. 348.
    VIII. used absolutely without a case in reference to the air or the weather, where ‘á’ is almost redundant; þoka var á mikil, a thick fog came on, Nj. 267; niðamyrkr var á, pitch darkness came on, Eg. 210; allhvast á norðan, a very strong breeze from the north, Fms. ix. 20; þá var á norðrænt, a north wind came on, 42, Ld. 56; hvaðan sem á er, from whatever point the wind is; var á hríð veðrs, a snow storm came on, Nj. 282; görði á regn, rain came on, Fms. vi. 394, xi. 35, Ld. 156.
    WITH ACC.
    A. Loc.
    I. denoting simple direction towards, esp. connected with verbs of motion, going, or the like; hann gékk á bergsnös, Eg. 389; á hamar, Fas. ii. 517.
    2. in phrases denoting direction; liggja á útborða, lying on the outside of the ship, Eg. 354; á annat borð skipinu, Fms. vii. 260; á bæði borð, on both sides of the ship, Nj. 124, Ld. 56; á tvær hliðar, on both sides, Fms. v. 73. Ísl. ii. 159; á hlið, sidewards; út á hlið, Nj. 262, Edda 44; á aðra hönd henni, Nj. 50, Ld. 46; höggva á tvær hendr, to hew or strike right and left, Ísl. ii. 368, Fas. i. 384, Fms. viii. 363, x. 383.
    3. upp á, upon; hann tók augu Þjaza ok kastaði upp á himin, Edda 47: with verbs denoting to look, see, horfa, sjá, líta, etc.; hann rak skygnur á land, he cast glances towards the land, Ld. 154.
    II. denoting direction with or without the idea of arriving:
    1. with verbs denoting to aim at; of a blow or thrust, stefna á fótinn, Nj. 84; spjótið stefnir á hann miðjan, 205: of the wind, gékk veðrit á vestr, the wind veered to west, Fms. ix. 28; sigla á haf, to stand out to sea, Hkr. i. 146, Fms. i. 39: with ‘út’ added, Eg. 390, Fms. x. 349.
    2. conveying the notion of arriving, or the intervening space being traversed; spjótið kom á miðjan skjöldinn, Eg. 379, Nj. 96, 97; langt upp á land, far up inland, Hkr. i. 146: to reach, taka ofan á belti, of the long locks of a woman, to reach down to the belt, Nj. 2; ofan á bringu, 48; á þa ofan, 91.
    III. without reference to the space traversed, connected with verbs denoting to go, turn, come, ride, sail, throw, or the like, motion of every kind; hann kastar honum á völlinn, he flings him down, Nj. 91; hlaupa á skip sitt, to leap on board his ship, 43; á hest, to mount quickly, Edda 75; á lend hestinum, Nj. 91; hann gengr á sáðland sitt, he walks on to his fields, 82: on, upon, komast á fætr, to get upon one’s legs, 92; ganga á land, to go a-shore, Fms. i. 40; ganga á þing, vii. 242, Grág. (often); á skóg, á merkr ok skóga, into a wood, Fb. i. 134, 257, Fms. xi. 118, Eg. 577, Nj. 130; fara á Finnmörk, to go travelling in Finmark, Fms. i. 8; koma, fara á bæ, to arrive at the farm-house; koma á veginn, Eg. 578; stíga á bát, skip, to go on board, 158; hann gékk upp á borg, he went up to the burg (castle), 717; en er þeir komu á loptriðið, 236; hrinda skipum á vatn, to float the ships down into the water, Fms. i. 58; reka austr á haf, to drift eastwards on the sea, x. 145; ríða ofan á, to ride down or over, Nj. 82.
    IV. in some cases the acc. is used where the dat. would be used, esp. with verbs denoting to see or hear, in such phrases as, þeir sá boða mikinn inn á fjörðinn, they saw great breakers away up in the bight of the firth, the acc. being due perhaps to a motion or direction of the eye or ear towards the object, Nj. 124; sá þeir fólkit á land, they saw the people in the direction of land, Fas. ii. 517: in phrases denoting to be placed, to sit, to be seated, the seat or bench is freq. in the acc. where the dat. would now be used; konungr var þar á land upp, the king was then up the country, the spectator or narrator is conceived as looking from the shore or sea-side, Nj. 46; sitja á miðjan bekk, to be seated on the middle bench, 50; skyldi konungs sæti vera á þann bekk … annat öndvegi var á hinn úæðra pall; hann setti konungs hásæti á miðjan þverpall, Fms. vi. 439, 440, cp. Fagrsk. l. c., Sturl. iii. 182; eru víða fjallbygðir upp á mörkina, in the mark or forest, Eg. 58; var þar mörk mikil á land upp, 229; mannsafnaðr er á land upp (viewed from the sea), Ld. 76; stóll var settr á mótið, Fas. i. 58; beiða fars á skip, to beg a passage, Grág. i. 90.
    V. denoting parts of the body; bíta e-n á barka, to bite one in the throat, Ísl. ii. 447; skera á háls, to cut the throat of any one, Nj. 156; brjóta e-n á háls, to break any one’s neck; brjóta e-n á bak, to break any one’s back, Fms. vii. 119; kalinn á kné, frozen to the knees with cold, Hm. 3.
    VI. denoting round; láta reipi á háls hesti, round his horse’s neck, 623. 33; leggja söðul á hest, Nj. 83; and ellipt., leggja á, to saddle; breiða feld á hofuð sér, to wrap a cloak over his head, 164; reyta á sik mosa, to gather moss to cover oneself with, 267; spenna hring á hönd, á fingr, Eg. 300.
    VII. denoting a burden; stela mat á tvá hesta, hey á fimtán hesta, i. e. a two, a fifteen horse load, Nj. 74: metaph., kjósa feigð á menn, to choose death upon them, i. e. doom them to death, Edda 22.
    B. TEMP.
    I. of a period of time, at, to; á morgun, to-morrow (í morgun now means the past morning, the morning of to-day), Ísl. ii. 333.
    II. if connected with the word day, ‘á’ is now used before a fixed or marked day, a day of the week, a feast day, or the like; á Laugardag, á Sunnudag …, on Saturday, Sunday, the Old Engl. a-Sunday, a-Monday, etc.; á Jóladaginn, Páskadaginn, on Yule and Easter-day; but in old writers more often used ellipt. Sunnudaginn, Jóladaginn …, by dropping the prep. ‘á,’ Fms. viii. 397, Grág. i. 18.
    III. connected with ‘dagr’ with the definite article suffixed, ‘á’ denotes a fixed, recurring period or season, in; á daginn, during the day-time, every day in turn, Grett. 91 A.
    IV. connected with ‘evening, morning, the seasons,’ with the article; á kveldit, every evening, Ld. 14; á sumarit, every summer, Vd. 128, where the new Ed. Fs. 51 reads sumrum; á haust, every autumn, Eg. 741 (perh. a misprint instead of á haustin or á haustum); á vetrinn, in the winter time, 710; á várit, every spring, Gþl. 347; the sing., however, is very rare in such cases, the old as well as mod. usage prefers the plur.; á nætrnar, by night, Nj. 210; á várin, Eg. 710; á sumrin, haustin, á morgnana, in the morning (á morgin, sing., means to-morrow); á kveldin, in the evening, only ‘dagr’ is used in sing., v. above (á daginn, not á dagana); but elliptically and by dropping the article, Icelanders say, kveld og morgna, nótt og dag, vetr sumar vor og haust, in the same sense as those above mentioned.
    V. denoting duration, the article is dropped in the negative phrase, aldri á sinn dag, never during one’s life; aldri á mína daga, never in my life, Bjarn. 8, where a possess. pron. is put between noun and prep., but this phrase is very rare. Such phrases as, á þann dag, that day, and á þenna dag, Stj. 12, 655 xxx. 2. 20, are unclassical.
    VI. á dag without article can only be used in a distributive sense, e. g. tvisvar á dag, twice a-day; this use is at present freq. in Icel., yet instances from old writers are not on record.
    VII. denoting a movement onward in time, such as, liðið á nótt, dag, kveld, morgun, sumar, vetr, vár, haust (or nóttina, daginn …), jól, páska, föstu, or the like, far on in the night, day …, Edda 33; er á leið vetrinn, when the winter was well on, as the winter wore on, Nj. 126; cp. áliðinn: also in the phrase, hniginn á inn efra aldr, well stricken in years, Ld. 68.
    C. Metaph. and in various relations:
    I. somewhat metaphorically, denoting an act only (not the place); fara á fund, á vit e-s, to call for one, Eg. 140; koma á ræðu við e-n, to come to a parley with, to speak, 173; ganga á tal, Nj. 103; skora á hólm, to challenge to a duel on an island; koma á grið, to enter into a service, to be domiciled, Grág. i. 151; fara á veiðar, to go a-hunting, Fms. i. 8.
    β. generally denoting on, upon, in, to; bjóða vöxtu á féit, to offer interest on the money, Grág. i. 198; ganga á berhögg, to come to blows, v. berhögg; fá á e-n, to make an impression upon one, Nj. 79; ganga á vápn e-s, to throw oneself on an enemy’s weapon, meet him face to face, Rd. 310; ganga á lagið, to press on up the spear-shaft after it has passed through one so as to get near one’s foe, i. e. to avail oneself of the last chance; bera fé á e-n, to bribe, Nj. 62; bera öl á e-n, to make drunk, Fas. i. 13; snúinn á e-t, inclined to, Fms. x. 142; sammælast á e-t, to agree upon, Nj. 86; sættast, verða sáttr á e-t, in the same sense, to come to an agreement, settlement, or atonement, 78, Edda 15, Eb. 288, Ld. 50, Fms. i. 279; ganga á mála, to serve for pay as a soldier, Nj. 121; ganga á vald e-s, to put oneself in his power, 267; ganga á sætt, to break an agreement; vega á veittar trygðir, to break truce, Grág. ii. 169.
    II. denoting in regard to, in respect to:
    1. of colour, complexion, the hue of the hair, or the like; hvítr, jarpr, dökkr … á hár, having white, brown, or dark … hair, Ísl. ii. 190, Nj. 39; svartr á brún ok brá, dark of brow and eyebrow; dökkr á hörund, id., etc.
    2. denoting skill, dexterity; hagr á tré, a good carpenter; hagr á járn, málm, smíðar …, an expert worker in iron, metals …, Eg. 4; fimr á boga, good at the bow: also used of mastership in science or arts, meistari á hörpuslátt, a master in striking the harp, Fas. iii. 220; fræðimaðr á kvæði, knowing many poems by heart, Fms. vi. 391; fræðimaðr á landnámssögur ok forna fræði, a learned scholar in histories and antiquities (of Are Frode), Ísl. ii. 189; mikill á íþrótt, skilful in an art, Edda (pref.) 148; but dat. in the phrase, kunna (vel) á skíðum, to be a cunning skater, Fms. i. 9, vii. 120.
    3. denoting dimensions; á hæð, lengd, breidd, dýpt …, in the heighth, length, breadth, depth …, Eg. 277; á hvern veg, on each side, Edda 41 (square miles); á annan veg, on the one side, Grág. i. 89.
    β. the phrase, á sik, in regard to oneself, vel (illa) á sik kominn, of a fine ( ugly) appearance, Ld. 100, Fas. iii. 74.
    III. denoting instrumentality; bjargast á sínar hendr, to live on the work of one’s own hands, (á sínar spýtur is a mod. phrase in the same sense); (vega) á skálir, pundara, to weigh in scales, Grág. ii. 370; at hann hefði tvá pundara, ok hefði á hinn meira keypt en á hinn minna selt, of a man using two scales, a big one for buying and a little one for selling, Sturl. i. 91; á sinn kostnað, at one’s own expense; nefna e-n á nafn, by name, Grág. i. 17, etc. The Icel. also say, spinna á rokk, snældu, to spin on or with a rock or distaff; mala á kvern, to grind in a ‘querne,’ where Edda 73 uses dat.; esp. of musical instruments, syngja, leika á hljóðfæri, hörpu, gígju …; in the old usage, leika hörpu …, Stj. 458.
    IV. denoting the manner or way of doing:
    1. á þessa lund, in this wise, Grág. ii. 22; á marga vega, á alla, ymsa vega, in many, all, respects, Fms. i. 114; á sitt hóf, in its turn, respectively, Ld. 136, where the context shews that the expression answers to the Lat. mutatis mutandis; á Þýðersku, after German fashion, Sks. 288.
    2. esp. of language; mæla, rita á e-a tungu, to speak, write in a tongue; á Írsku, in Irish, Ld. 76; Norrænu, in Norse, Eb. 330, Vm. 35; a Danska tungu, in Danish, i. e. Scandinavian, Norse, or Icelandic, Grág. i. 18; á Vára tungu, i. e. in Icelandic, 181; rita á Norræna tungu, to write in Norse, Hkr. (pref.), Bs. i. 59:—at present, dat. is sometimes used.
    3. in some phrases the acc. is used instead of the dat.; hann sýndi á sik mikit gaman, Fms. x. 329; hann lét ekki á sik finna, he shewed no sign of motion, Nj. 111; skaltú önga fáleika á þik gera (Cod. Kalf.), 14.
    V. used in a distributive sense; skal mörk kaupa gæzlu á kú, eðr oxa fim vetra gamlan, a mark for every cow, Grág. i. 147; alin á hvert hross, 442; á mann, per man (now freq.): cp. also á dag above, lit. B.
    VI. connected with nouns,
    1. prepositional; á hendr (with dat.), against; á hæla, at heel, close behind; á bak, at back, i. e. past, after; á vit (with gen.), towards.
    2. adverbially; á braut, away, abroad; á víxl, in turns; á mis, amiss; á víð ok dreif, a-wide and a-drift, i. e. dispersedly.
    3. used almost redundantly before the following prep.; á eptir, after, behind; á undan, in front of; á meðal, á milli, among; á mót, against; á við, about, alike; á frá (cp. Swed. ifrån), from (rare); á fyrir = fyrir, Haustl. 1; á hjá, beside (rare); á fram, a-head, forwards; á samt, together; ávalt = of allt, always: following a prep., upp á, upon; niðr á, down upon; ofan á, eptir á, post eventum, (temp.) á eptir is loc., id., etc.
    VII. connected with many transitive verbs, answering to the Lat. ad- or in-, in composition, in many cases periphrastically for an objective case. The prep. generally follows after the verb, instead of being prefixed to it as in Lat., and answers to the Engl. on, to; heita kalla, hrópa á, to call on; heyra, hlusta, hlyða á, to hearken to, listen to; hyggja, hugsa á, to think on; minna á, to remind; sjá, líta, horfa, stara, mæna, glápa, koma auga … á, to look on; girnast á, to wish for; trúa á, to believe on; skora á, to call on any one to come out, challenge; kæra á, to accuse; heilsa á, to greet; herja, ganga, ríða, hlaupa, ráða … á, to fall on, attack, cp. ágangr, áreið, áhlaup; ljúga á, to tell lies of, to slander; telja á, to carp at; ausa, tala, hella, kasta, verpa … á, to pour, throw on; ríða, bera, dreifa á, to sprinkle on; vanta, skorta á, to fall short of; ala á, to plead, beg; leggja á, to throw a spell on, lay a saddle on; hætta á, to venture on; gizka á, to guess at; kveða á, to fix on, etc.: in a reciprocal sense, haldast á, of mutual strife; sendast á, to exchange presents; skrifast á, to correspond (mod.); kallast á, to shout mutually; standast á, to coincide, so as to be just opposite one another, etc.
    2.
    f. [Lat. aqua; Goth. ahva; Hel. aha; A. S. eâ; O. H. G. aha, owa; cp. Germ. ach and aue; Fr. eau, eaux; Engl. Ax-, Ex-, etc., in names of places; Swed.-Dan. å; the Scandinavians absorb the hu, so that only a single vowel or diphthong remains of the whole word]:—a river. The old form in nom. dat. acc. sing. is , v. the introduction to A, page 1, Bs. i. 333 sq., where ́n, ́ (acc.), and ́na; so also Greg. 677; the old fragm. of Grág. ii. 222, 223, new Ed. In the Kb. of the Edda the old form occurs twice, viz. page 75, ́na (acc.), (but two lines below, ána), í ́nni (dat.) The old form also repeatedly occurs in the Kb. and Sb. of the Grág., e. g. ii. 266, 267: gen. sing. ár; nom. pl. ár, gen. á contracted, dat. ám, obsolete form ́m; Edda 43, Eg. 80, 99, 133, 185: proverbs, at ósi skal á stemma, answering to the Lat. principiis obsta, Edda 60; hér kemr á til sæfar, here the river runs into the sea, metaph. = this is the very end, seems to have been a favourite ending of old poems; it is recorded in the Húsdrápa and the Norðsetadrápa, v. Edda 96, Skálda 198; cp. the common saying, oil vötn renna til sævar, ‘all waters run into the sea.’ Rivers with glacier water are in Icel. called Hvítá, White river, or Jökulsá: Hitá, Hot river, from a hot spring, opp. to Kaldá, v. Landn.: others take a name from the fish in them, as Laxá, Lax or Salmon river (freq.); Örriða á, etc.: a tributary river is þverá, etc.: ár in the Njála often means the great rivers Ölfusá and Þjórsá in the south of Iceland. Áin helga, a river in Sweden, Hkr. ii: á is also suffixed to the names of foreign rivers, Tempsá = Thames; Dóná, Danube (Germ. Don-au), (mod.), etc. Vide Edda (Gl.) 116, 117, containing the names of over a hundred North-English and Scottish rivers.
    COMPDS: áráll, árbakki, árbrot, ardjúp, árfarvegr, árfors, árgljúfr, árhlutr, ármegin, árminni, ármót, áróss, árreki, árstraumr, árströnd, árvað, árvegr, árvöxtr.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > Á

  • 8 sua

    sŭus, a, um (old form sos, sa, sum; dat. plur. sis, Enn. ap. Fest. p. 301 Mull.; acc. sas. id. ib. p. 325 ib.; cf. Paul. ex Fest. p. 47; Schol. Pers. 1, 108; sing. sam for suam, Fest. p. 47 Mull.;

    so for suo, C. I. L. 5, 2007. In ante-class. verse su- with the following vowel freq. forms one syllable,

    Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 48; id. Ps. 1, 3, 5; Ter. And. 1, 1, 68; Lucr. 1, 1022; v. Neue, Formenl. 2, 189 sqq.), pron. poss., 3 d pers. [root SVA-; Sanscr. sva, own; cf. sui; Gr. seWo-, whence sphe, etc., and he; cf. heos], of or belonging to himself, herself, etc.; his own, her own, etc.; his, her, its, their; one ' s; hers, theirs.
    I.
    Ordinary possessive use his, etc. (cf. the similar use of the pers. pron. sui, q. v.).
    A.
    With antecedent in the same sentence.
    1.
    The antecedent a subject-nominative, expressed or understood.
    (α).
    His:

    Caesar copias suas divisit,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 97:

    ille in sua sententia perseverat,

    id. ib. 1, 72:

    tantam habebat suarum rerum fiduciam,

    id. ib. 2, 37:

    cum sceleris sui socios Romae reliquisset,

    Cic. Cat. 3, 1, 3:

    cur ego non ignoscam si anteposuit suam salutem meae?

    id. Pis. 32, 79; id. Phil. 2, 18, 45; id. Mil. 10, 27; id. Fam. 15, 14, 1:

    Hanno praefecturam ejus (i.e. Muttinis) filio suo (Hannonis) dedit,

    Liv. 26, 40, 7:

    imperat princeps civibus suis,

    Sen. Clem. 1, 16, 2:

    nemo rem suam emit,

    id. Ben. 7, 4, 8.—
    (β).
    Her:

    mea Glycerium suos parentes repperit,

    Ter. And. 5, 6, 5:

    utinam haec ignoraret suum patrem,

    id. Phorm. 5, 6, 34:

    si nunc facere volt era officium suom,

    Plaut. Cas. 2, 8, 72:

    ne eadem mulier cum suo conjuge honestissimum adulescentem oppressisse videatur,

    Cic. Cael. 32, 78:

    si omnibus suis copiis excellentem virum res publica armasset,

    id. Phil. 13, 16, 32.—
    (γ).
    Its:

    omne animal, simul et ortum est, et se ipsum et omnes partes suas diligit,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 11, 33:

    cum mea domus ardore suo deflagrationem Italiae toti minaretur,

    id. Planc. 40, 95.—
    (δ).
    Their: (legiones) si consulem suum reliquerunt, vituperandae sunt Cic. Phil. 5, 2, 4:

    mittent aliquem de suo numero,

    id. ib. 11, 10, 25:

    rationem illi sententiae suae non fere reddebant,

    id. Tusc. 1, 17, 38:

    qui agellos suos redimere a piratis solebant,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 37, § 85:

    edicunt ut ad suum vestitum senatores redirent,

    id. Sest. 14, 32:

    suis finibus eos prohibent,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 1: Allobrogibus sese persuasuros existimabant ut per suos (Allobrogum) fines eos (Helvetios) ire paterentur, id. id. 1, 6;

    and distributively: ac naves onerariae LXIII. in portu expugnatae, quaedam cum suis oneribus, frumento, armis, aere, etc.,

    some with their several cargoes, Liv. 26, 47, 9.—
    2.
    With a subject-clause as antecedent:

    id sua sponte apparebat tuta celeribus consiliis praepositurum,

    was selfevident, Liv. 22, 38, 13:

    ad id quod sua sponte satis collectum animorum erat, indignitate etiam Romani accendebantur,

    id. 3, 62, 1:

    secutum tamen sua sponte est ut vilior ob ea regi Hannibal et suspectior fieret,

    id. 35, 14, 4. —
    3.
    With subject-acc. as antecedent:

    hanc dicam Athenis advenisse cum aliquo amatore suo, Plant. Mil. 2, 2, 86: doceo gratissimum esse in sua tribu Plancium,

    Cic. Planc. 19, 47:

    cupio eum suae causae confidere,

    id. Sest. 64, 135:

    suspicari debuit (Milo), eum (Clodium) ad villam suam (Clodii) deversurum,

    id. Mil. 19, 51: Medeam praedicant in fuga fratris sui membra dissipavisse, id. Imp. Pomp. 9, 22:

    (dixit) Caesarem pro sua dignitate debere et studium et iracundiam suam reipublicae dimittere,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 8.—
    4.
    With object-acc. as antecedent.
    (α).
    Suus being an adjunct of the subject (generally rendered in Engl. by a pass. constr.):

    hunc pater suus de templo deduxit,

    he was taken from the temple by his father, Cic. Inv. 2, 17, 52:

    hunc sui cives e civitate ejecerunt,

    id. Sest. 68, 142:

    Alexandrum uxor sua... occidit,

    id. Inv. 2, 49, 144:

    illum ulciscentur mores sui,

    id. Att. 9, 12, 2:

    quodsi quem natura sua... forte deficiet,

    id. Or. 1, 14:

    utrumque regem sua multitudo consalutaverat,

    Liv. 1, 7, 1:

    quas (urbes) sua virtus ac dii juvent, magnas sibi opes facere,

    id. 1, 9, 3; 1, 7, 15; 6, 33, 5:

    quos nec sua conscientia impulerit, nec, etc.,

    id. 26, 33, 3; 25, 14, 7:

    consulem C. Marium servus suus interemit,

    Val. Max. 6, 8, 2:

    quis non Vedium Pollionem pejus oderat quam servi sui?

    Sen. Clem. 1, 18, 2:

    sera dies sit qua illum gens sua caelo adserat,

    id. Cons. Poll. 12 (31), 5.—With the antecedent understood from the principal sentence:

    ita forma simili pueri ut mater sua internoscere (sc. eos) non posset,

    Plaut. Men. prol. 19; and with suus as adjunct both of the subject and of the antecedent: jubet salvere suos vir uxorem suam, id. merc. 4, 3, 11. —
    (β).
    With impers. verbs:

    sunt homines, quos libidinis infamiaeque suae neque pudeat neque taedeat,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 12, 35:

    video fore ut inimicos tuos poeniteat intemperantiae suae,

    id. Fam. 3, 10, 1:

    si Caesarem beneficii sui poeniteret,

    id. Lig. 10, 29; so id. Agr. 2, 11, 26:

    jam ne nobilitatis quidem suae plebejos poenitere,

    Liv. 10, 7, 8:

    militem jam minus virtutis poenitere suae,

    id. 22, 12, 10.—
    (γ).
    As adjunct of other members of the sentence:

    ad parentes suos ducas Silenium,

    Plaut. Cist. 2, 3, 86. nam is illius filiam conicit in navem clam matrem suam (i.e. filiae), id. Mil. 2, 1, 34:

    eosdem ad quaestoris sui aut imperatoris, aut commilitonum suorum pericula impulistis,

    Cic. Phil. 13, 17, 34:

    totum enim ex sua patria sustulisti,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 49, § 127; id. Or. 3, 32, 126: quem (Hammonium) tibi etiam suo nomine ( on his own account) commendo... itaque peto a te ut ejus procuratorem et ipsum suo nomine diligas, id. Fam. 13, 21, 2:

    Caesar Fabium in sua remittit hiberna,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 33; id. B. C. 3, 24:

    introire ad Ciceronem, et domi suae imparatum confodere,

    Sall. C. 28, 1:

    suis flammis delete Fidenas,

    i. e. the flames kindled by the Fidenates, Liv. 4, 33, 5:

    suo igni involvit hostes,

    Tac. A. 14, 30:

    quid Caesarem in sua fata inmisit?

    Sen. Ep. 94, 65; id. Q. N. 1, praef. 7; cf.

    with antecedent supplied from preceding sentence: non destiti rogare et petere (sc. Brutum) mea causa, suadere et hortari sua,

    Cic. Att. 6, 2, 7.—
    5.
    With dat. as antecedent.
    (α).
    As adjunct of subject (cf. 4. supra):

    suus rex reginae placet,

    a queen likes her own king, Plaut. Stich. 1, 2, 76:

    ei nunc alia ducenda'st domum, sua cognata Lemniensis,

    id. Cist. 1, 1, 101:

    Autronio nonne sodales, non collegae sui... defuerunt?

    Cic. Sull. 2, 7:

    si ceteris facta sua recte prosunt,

    id. Cat. 3, 12, 27:

    cui non magistri sui atque doctores, cui non... locus ipse... in mente versetur?

    id. Planc. 33, 81:

    haec omnia plane... Siculis erepta sunt: primum suae leges, etc.,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 13, § 33:

    Romanis multitudo sua auxit animum,

    Liv. 21, 50, 4:

    sicuti populo Romano sua fortuna labet,

    id. 42, 50, 7:

    Lanuvinis sacra sua reddita,

    id. 8, 14, 2:

    vilitas sua illis detrahit pretium,

    Sen. Ben. 4, 29, 2:

    nemo est cui felicitas sua satisfaciat,

    id. Ep. 115, 17:

    labor illi suus restitutus est,

    id. Brev. Vit. 20, 3:

    magnitudo sua singulis constat,

    id. Q. N. 1, 1, 10:

    tantum sapienti sua, quantum Dec omnis aetas patet,

    id. Ep. 53, 11. —

    With antecedent supplied from principal sentence: mater quod suasit sua Adulescens mulier fecit, i.e. ei,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 38.—
    (β).
    Of other words:

    regique Thebano regnum stabilivit suum,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 40:

    mittam hodie huic suo die natali malam rem magnam,

    id. Ps. 1, 3, 5:

    ego Metello non irascor, neque ei suam vacationem eripio,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 68, § 164:

    desinant insidiari domui suae consuli,

    id. Cat. 1, 13, 32:

    quibus ea res honori fuerit a suis civibus,

    id. Mil. 35, 96: Scipio suas res Syracusanis restituit, Liv. [p. 1824] 29, 1, 17:

    nos non suas (leges Lacedaemoniis arbitror) ademisse, sed nostras leges dedisse,

    id. 39, 37, 6:

    Graccho et Tuditano provinciae Lucani et Galliae cum suis exercitibus prorogatae,

    id. 25, 3, 5.—
    6.
    With gen., abl., or object of a prep. as antecedent:

    nec illius animi aciem praestringit splendor sui nominis,

    Cic. Rab. Post. 16, 43:

    nolite a sacris patriis Junonis Sospitae domesticum et suum consulem avellere,

    id. Mur. 41, 90:

    quamvis tu magna mihi scripseris de Bruti adventu ad suas legiones,

    id. Att. 14, 13, 12:

    suae legis ad scriptum ipsam quoque sententiam adjungere,

    the meaning of their law to which they refer, id. Inv. 2, 49, 147:

    cum ambitio alterius suam primum apud eos majestatem solvisset,

    Liv. 22, 42, 12:

    nunc causam instituendorum ludorum ab origine sua repetam,

    Val. Max. 2, 4, 4:

    Jubam in regno suo non locorum notitia adjuvet, non popularium pro rege suo virtus,

    Sen. Ep. 71, 10; id. Ben. 7, 6, 3; id. Clem. 1, 3, 4.—Esp. with cujusque as antecedent:

    in qua deliberatione ad suam cujusque naturam consilium est omne revocandum,

    Cic. Off. 1, 33, 119 (v. II. D. 2. infra).— Abl.:

    operam dare ut sua lex ipso scripto videatur niti,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 49, 147 (cf. supra):

    (Caesar reperiebat) ad Galbam propter justitiam prudentiamque suam totius belli summam deferri,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 4:

    credere, ad suum concilium a Jove deos advocari,

    Sen. Q. N. 2, 42, 1.—
    7.
    With predic. nom. as antecedent:

    sapientissimi artis suae professores sunt a quibus et propria studia verecunde et aliena callide administrantur,

    Val. Max. 8, 12, 1.—
    8.
    With appositive noun.
    (α).
    With gram. subject as antecedent:

    hoc Anaximandro, populari ac sodali suo, non persuasit,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 37, 118:

    vidit fortissimum virum, inimicissimum suum,

    id. Mil. 9, 25:

    (hic) fuit in Creta contubernalis Saturnini, propinqui sui,

    id. Planc. 11, 27:

    ut non per L. Crassum, adfinem suum... causam illam defenderit,

    id. Balb. 21, 49:

    ne cum hoc T. Broccho, avunculo, ne cum ejus filio, consobrino suo, ne nobiscum vivat,

    id. Lig. 4, 11:

    Caesar mittit ad eum A. Clodium, suum atque illius familiarem,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 57.—
    (β).
    With object as antecedent:

    Dicaearchum cum Aristoxeno, aequali et condiscipulo suo, omittamus,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 18, 41:

    tres fratres optimos, non solum sibi ipsos, neque nobis, necessariis suis, sed etiam rei publicae condonavit,

    id. Lig. 12, 36:

    Varroni, quem, sui generis hominem,... vulgus extrahere ad consulatum nitebatur,

    Liv. 22, 34, 2.—
    (γ).
    With appositive noun as antecedent:

    si P. Scipionem, clarissimum virum, majorumque suorum simillimum res publica tenere potuisset,

    Cic. Phil. 13, 14, 29:

    M. Fabi Ambusti, potentis viri cum inter sui corporis homines, tum ad plebem, etc.,

    Liv. 6, 34, 5:

    C. vero Fabricii, et Q. Aemilii Papi, principum saeculi sui, domibus argentum fuisse confitear oportet,

    Val. Max. 4, 4, 3.—
    9.
    In participial clauses.
    (α).
    The antecedent being the logical subject of the participle, and other than the principal subject:

    credamus igitur Panaetio, a Platone suo dissentienti ( = qui dissentiebat),

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 32, 79:

    ea Sex. Roscium, expulsum ex suis bonis, recepit domum,

    id. Rosc. Am. 10, 27:

    diffidentemque rebus suis confirmavit,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23:

    Dejotarum ad me venientem cum omnibus copiis suis, certiorem feci, etc.,

    id. Fam. 15, 4, 7; id. Cat. 4, 9, 18: si hominis et suis et populi Romani ornamentis amplissimi ( being greatly distinguished) causam repudiassem, id. Mur. 4, 8:

    stupentes tribunos et suam jam vicem magis anxios quam, etc., liberavit consensus populi Romani,

    Liv. 8, 35, 1; 22, 42, 8:

    manet in folio scripta querela suo ( = quam scripsit),

    Ov. F. 5, 224; cf. in abl. absol.:

    et ipsis (hostibus) regressis in castra sua,

    Liv. 22, 60, 9:

    quibus (speculis) si unum ostenderis hominem, populus adparet, unaquaque parte faciem exprimente sua,

    Sen. Q. N. 1, 5, 5.—
    (β).
    The logical subject of the participle, being also the principal subject:

    sic a suis legionibus condemnatus irrupit in Galliam,

    Cic. Phil. 10, 10, 21:

    hunc agrum patres nostri, acceptum a majoribus suis ( = quem acceperant), perdiderunt,

    id. Agr. 2, 31, 84:

    ut in suis ordinibus dispositi dispersos adorirentur,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 92: Appius, odium in se aliorum suo in eos metiens odio, haud ignaro, inquit, imminet fortuna, Liv. 3, 54, 3:

    ipsa capit Condita in pharetra ( = quae condiderat) tela minora sua,

    Ov. F. 2, 326; cf. in abl. absol.:

    Sopater, expositis suis difficultatibus ( = cum exposuisset, etc.): Timarchidem... perducit,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 28, § 69:

    Caesar, primum suo deinde omnium ex conspectu remotis equis, etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 25:

    Campani, audita sua pariter sociorumque clade, legatos ad Hannibalem miserunt,

    Liv. 25, 15, 1:

    (Appius) deposito suo magistratu... domum est reductus,

    id. 4, 24, 7; 3, 35, 9; 9, 10, 13; 9, 41, 9.—
    (γ).
    The antecedent being the principal subject, not the logical subject of the participle:

    M. Papirius dicitur Gallo, barbam suam (i.e. Papirii) permulcenti,... iram movisse,

    Liv. 5, 41, 9: cum Gracchus, verecundia deserendi socios, implorantis fidem suam populique Romani, substitisset. id. 23, 36, 8; cf. in abl. absol.:

    si sine maximo dedecore, tam impeditis suis rebus, potuisset emori,

    Cic. Rab. Post. 10, 29; id. Mil. 14, 38; id. Planc. 21, 51; id. Clu. 14, 42:

    ita (consul) proelio uno accidit Vestinorum res, haudquaquam tamen incruento milite suo (consulis),

    Liv. 8, 29, 12; cf.

    with antecedent to be supplied: Campani, cum, robore juventutis suae acciso, nulla (sc. eis) propinqua spes esset, etc.,

    id. 7, 29, 7.—
    10.
    In gerund. construction. ( a) With subject as antecedent:

    mihi ipsa Roma ad complectendum conservatorem suum progredi visa est,

    Cic. Pis. 22, 52.—
    (β).
    With object, the logical subjects of the gerund as antecedent:

    cur iis persequendi juris sui... adimis potestatem?

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 6, 21:

    si senatui doloris sui de me declarandi potestas esset erepta,

    id. Sest. 23, 51:

    nec tribunis plebis (spatium datur) sui periculi deprecandi,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 5.—
    (γ).
    With antecedent dependent on the gerund:

    eamque rem illi putant a suum cuique tribuendo appellatam,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 19.—
    11.
    As adjunct of a noun dependent on a subjectinf., with its logical subject as antecedent:

    magnum Miloni fuit, conficere illam pestem nulla sua invidia?

    Cic. Mil. 15, 40:

    neque enim fuit Gabinii, remittere tantum de suo nec regis, imponere tantum plus suis,

    his claim, id. Rab. Post. 11, 31:

    Piso, cui fructum pietatis suae neque ex me neque a populo Romano ferre licuit,

    id. Sest. 31, 68:

    ei cujus magis intersit, vel sua, vel rei publicae causa vivere,

    id. Off. 3, 23, 90:

    sapientis est consilium explicare suum de maximis rebus,

    id. Or. 2, 81, 333; id. Mil. 15, 41.—With logical subject understood:

    totam Italiam suis colonis ut complere (sc. eis) liceat, permittitur,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 13, 34:

    maximum (sc. eis) solacium erit, propinquorum eodem monumento declarari, et virtutem suorum, et populi Romani pietatem,

    id. Phil. 14, 13, 35.
    B.
    Without gram. antec., one ' s, one ' s own.
    1.
    Dependent on subject-inff.:

    ejusdem animi est, posteris suis amplitudinem nobis quam non acceperit tradere, et memoriam prope intermortuam generis sui, virtute renovare,

    Cic. Mur. 7, 16:

    siquidem atrocius est, patriae parentem quam suum occidere,

    id. Phil. 2, 13, 31:

    miliens perire est melius quam in sua civitate sine armorum praesidio non posse vivere,

    id. ib. 2, 44, 112: quanto est honestius, alienis injuriis quam suis commoveri, one ' s own, id. Verr. 2, 3, 72, § 169:

    contentum suis rebus esse maximae sunt certissimaeque divitiae,

    id. Par. 6, 51:

    ut non liceat sui commodi causa nocere alteri,

    id. Off. 3, 5, 23:

    detrahere de altero sui commodi causa,

    id. ib. 3, 5, 24:

    suis exemplis melius est uti,

    Auct. Her. 4, 1, 2:

    levius est sua decreta tollere quam aliorum,

    Liv. 3, 21. 5; 39, 5, 2;

    29, 37, 11: satius est vitae suae rationes quam frumenti publici nosse,

    Sen. Brev. Vit. 18, 3:

    quanto satius est sua mala exstinguere quam aliena posteris tradere?

    id. Q. N. 3, praef. 5:

    cum initia beneficiorum suorum spectare, tum etiam exitus decet,

    id. Ben. 2, 14, 2; 3, 1, 5:

    Romani nominis gloriae, non suae, composuisse illa decuit,

    Plin. 1, prooem. § 16.—With 1 st pers. plur., as indef. antecedent: cum possimus ab Ennio sumere... exemplum, videtur esse arrogantia illa relinquere, et ad sua devenire, to one ' s own = to our own, Auct. Her. 4, 1, 2.—
    2.
    Without a subject-inf.:

    omnia torquenda sunt ad commodum suae causae... sua diligenter narrando,

    Cic. Inv. 1, 21, 30: ut in ceteris habenda ratio non sua (al. sui) solum, sed etiam aliorum, id. Off. 1, 39, 139:

    erat Dareo mite ac tractabile ingenium, nisi suam naturam plerumque fortuna corrumperet (suam not referring to Dareo),

    Curt. 3, 2, 17 MSS. (Foss, mansuetam). — With 1 st pers. plur., as indef. antecedent (cf. 1. supra):

    non erit ista amicitia sed mercatura quaedam utilitatum suarum,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 44, 122; cf.: pro suo possidere, II. A. 2. a. g; and Cic. Off. 2, 21, 73, II. A. 2. b. a; cf. also II. B. 1. a; II. B. 5. c.; II. B. 7. b.; II. C. 8. b. b infra.
    C.
    With antec. in a previous sentence. Here ejus, eorum, earum are used for his, her, their, unless the clause is oblique in regard to the antecedent, i. e. the antecedent is conceived as the author of the statement.
    1.
    In clauses dependent on a verbum sentiendi or dicendi, expressed or understood, referring to the grammatical or logical subject of the verb.
    a.
    In infinitive clauses:

    (Clodius) Caesaris potentiam suam potentiam esse dicebat,

    Cic. Mil. 32, 88:

    (Caelius) a sua (causa) putat ejus (i.e. Ascitii) esse sejunctam,

    id. Cael. 10, 24:

    ipsos certo scio non negare ad haec bona Chrysogonum accessisse impulsu suo (referring to ipsos),

    id. Rosc. Am. 37, 107:

    hostes viderunt,... suorum tormentorum usum spatio propinquitatis interire,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 16:

    docent, sui judicii rem non esse,

    id. ib. 1, 13.—The reference of suus may be ambiguous, esp. if an infinitive is dependent on another:

    hoc Verrem dicere ajebant, te... opera sua consulem factum, i.e. Verris, though grammatically it might refer to the subj. of aiebant,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 10, 29:

    (Ariovistus) dixit neminem secum sine sua pernicie contendisse,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 36; cf. the context with, in all, eleven reflexive pronouns referring to four different antecedents (populus Romanus, Ariovistus, Caesar, nemo); cf.

    also: occurrebat ei, mancam praeturam suam futuram consule Milone,

    Cic. Mil. 9, 25; 32, 88; Liv. 3, 42, 2.—
    b.
    Suus in a clause dependent on inf.:

    scio equidem, ut, qui argentum afferret atque expressam imaginem suam (i.e. militis) huc ad nos, cum eo ajebat velle mitti mulierem,

    Plaut. Ps. 2, 2, 55:

    isti bonorum emptores arbitrantur, vos hic sedere qui excipiatis eos qui de suis (i.e. emptorum) manibus effugerint,

    Cic. Rosc. Am. 52, 151:

    Siculi venisse tempus ajebant ut commoda sua defenderem,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 1, 3:

    ut tunc tandem sentiret recuperanda esse quae prius sua culpa amissa forent,

    Liv. 44, 8, 4. —

    Ambiguous: velle Pompejum se Caesari purgatum, ne ea quae reipublicae causa egerit (Pompejus) in suam (i.e. Caesaris) contumeliam vertat (where suam might be referred to Pompejus),

    Caes. B. C. 1, 8.—
    c.
    In oblique clauses introduced by ut or ne, or clauses subordinate to such:

    Cassius constituit ut ludi absente te fierent suo nomine,

    Cic. Att. 15, 11, 2:

    postulat ut ad hanc suam praedam tam nefariam adjutores vos profiteamini,

    id. Rosc. Am. 2, 6:

    Nasidius eos magnopere hortatur ut rursus cum Bruti classe, additis suis (i.e. Nasidii) auxiliis confligant,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 3:

    (regem) denuntiasse sibi ut triduo regni sui decederent finibus,

    Liv. 42, 25, 12:

    Sabinae mulieres, hinc patres, hinc viros orantes, ne parricidio macularent partus suos (i.e. mulierum),

    id. 1, 13, 2:

    Patron praecepit suis ut arma induerent, ad omne imperium suum parati,

    Curt. 5, 11, 1.—With reflex. pron., referring to a different antecedent:

    ad hanc (Laidem) Demosthenes clanculum adit, et ut sibi copiam sui faceret, petit,

    Gell. 1, 8, 5. —
    d.
    In subordinate clauses introduced by quin or quod:

    (Dejotarus) non recusat quin id suum facinus judices,

    Cic. Deiot. 15, 43; so id. ib. 4, 15;

    16, 45: parietes hujus curiae tibi gratias agere gestiunt, quod futura sit illa auctoritas in his majorum suorum et suis sedibus,

    id. Marcell. 3, 10:

    quidni gauderet quod iram suam nemo sentiret?

    Sen. Troad. 3, 13:

    querenti quod uxor sua e fico se suspendisset,

    Quint. 6, 3, 88;

    and with intentional ambiguity: cum Proculejus quereretur de filio quod is mortem suam expectaret,

    id. 9, 3, 68. —
    e.
    In interrogative clauses:

    si, quod officii sui sit, non occurrit animo, nihil umquam omnino aget,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 8, 25:

    ut non auderet iterum dicere quot milia fundus suus abesset ab urbe,

    id. Caecin. 10, [p. 1825] 28:

    donec sciat unisquisque quid sui, quid alieni sit,

    Liv. 6, 27, 8:

    rex ignarus, quae cum Hannibale legatis suis convenisset, quaeque legati ejus ad se allaturi fuissent,

    id. 23, 39, 2:

    postquam animadvertit quantus agminis sui terror esset,

    id. 43, 19, 5. —
    2.
    In a virtually oblique clause.
    a.
    In final clause, introduced by ut, ne, or rel., referring to the subject of the purpose:

    me a portu praemisit domum, ut haec nuntiem uxori suae,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 41:

    quasi Appius ille Caecus viam muniverit, non qua populus uteretur, sed ubi impune sui posteri latrocinarentur, i. e. Appii,

    Cic. Mil. 7, 17:

    quae gens ad Caesarem legatos mise. rat, ut suis omnibus facultatibus uteretur,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 80:

    inde castra movent, ne qua vis sociis suis ab Romano exercitu inferri possit,

    Liv. 43, 23, 5:

    (Romani) Albam a fundamentis proruerunt, ne memoria originum suarum exstaret,

    id. 26, 13, 16:

    oppidani nuntios Romam, qui certiorem de suo casu senatum facerent, misere,

    id. 6, 33, 7; cf.:

    tanto intervallo ab hostibus consedit, ut nec adventus suus propinquitate nimia nosci posset, et, etc.,

    Liv. 10, 20, 7:

    Datames locum delegit talem ut non multum obesse multitudo hostium suae paucitati posset,

    Nep. Dat. 7, 3:

    quid si gubernator a diis procellas petat ut gratior ars sua periculo fiat?

    Sen. Ben. 6, 25, 4. —
    b.
    In other dependent clauses represented as conceived by an antecedent in the principal sentence:

    Sulla, si sibi suus pudor ac dignitas non prodesset, nullum auxilium requisivit ( = negavit se defendi velle, si, etc.),

    Cic. Sull. 5, 15:

    Paetus omnes libros quos frater suus reliquisset mihi donavit ( = dixit se donare libros quos, etc.),

    id. Att. 2, 1, 12:

    non enim a te emit, sed, priusquam tu suum sibi venderes, ipse possedit ( = potitus est, ne, etc.),

    id. Phil. 2, 37, 96:

    Africanus, si sua res ageretur, testimonium non diceret,

    id. Rosc. Am. 36, 3:

    ille ipse (Pompejus) proposuit epistulam illam, in qua est Pro tuis rebus gestis amplissimis. Amplioribusne quam suis, quam Africani?

    id. Att. 8, 9, 2:

    spiritus dabat (Manlio) quod... vinculorum suorum invidiam dictator fugisset,

    Liv. 6, 18, 4:

    (Numa) Camenis eum lucum sacravit, quod earum ibi concilia cum conjuge sua Egeria essent,

    id. 1, 21, 3:

    adulescens deos omnis invocare ad gratiam illi pro se referendam, quoniam sibi nequaquam satis facultatis pro suo animo atque illius erga se esset,

    id. 26, 50, 4 (cf. D. 1. a. infra).
    D.
    In the place of ejus.
    1.
    In clauses virtually oblique, but with indicative, being conceived by the antecedent (hence suus, not ejus), but asserted as fact by the author (hence indicative, not subjunctive):

    Cicero tibi mandat ut Aristodemo idem respondeas, quod de fratre suo (Ciceronis) respondisti,

    Cic. Att. 2, 7, 4:

    oriundi ab Sabinis, ne, quia post Tatii mortem ab sua parte non erat regnatum, imperium amitterent, sui corporis creari regem volebant,

    Liv. 1, 17, 2:

    C. Caesar villam pulcherrimam, quia mater sua aliquando in illa custodita erat, diruit,

    Sen. Ira, 3, 21, 5:

    Philemonem, a manu servum, qui necem suam per venenum inimicis promiserat, non gravius quam simplici morte punivit,

    Suet. Caes. 74; cf.:

    quomodo excandescunt si quid e juba sua decisum est,

    Sen. Brev. Vit. 12, 3.—
    2.
    To avoid ambiguity:

    petunt rationes illius (Catilinae) ut orbetur consilio res publica, ut minuatur contra suum (i.e. Catilinae) furorem imperatorum copia (instead of ejus, which might be referred to res publica),

    Cic. Mur. 39, 83:

    equites a cornibus positos, cum jam pelleretur media peditum suorum acies, incurrisse ab lateribus ferunt,

    Liv. 1, 37, 3.—
    3.
    Colloquially and in epistolary style suus is used emphatically instead of ejus, with the meaning own, peculiar: deinde ille actutum subferret suus servus poenas Sosia, his own slave (opp. Mercury, who personates Sosias), Plaut. Am. 3, 4, 19: mira erant in civitatibus ipsorum furta Graecorum quae magistratus sui fecerant, their own magistrates ( = ipsorum), Cic. Att. 6, 2, 5:

    in quibus (litteris Bruti) unum alienum summa sua prudentia (est), ut spectem ludos suos,

    his peculiar prudence, id. ib. 15, 26, 1; so,

    quod quidem ille (Nero) decernebat, quorumdam dolo ad omina sui exitus vertebatur,

    Tac. A. 16, 24; cf. II. A. 1. b and g; II. A. 2. a. b; II. B. 3.—
    4.
    Without particular emphasis (mostly ante- and post-class. and poet.):

    tum erit tempestiva cum semen suum maturum erit,

    Cato, R. R. 31:

    vitis si macra erit, sarmenta sua concidito minute,

    id. ib. 37:

    qui sic purgatus erit, diuturna valetudine utatur, neque ullus morbus veniet, nisi sua culpa,

    id. ib. 157:

    Cimon in eandem invidiam incidit quam pater suus,

    Nep. Cim. 3, 1:

    id qua ratione consecutus sit (Lysander) latet. Non enim virtute sui exercitus factum est, etc.,

    id. Lys. 1, 2:

    ipse sub Esquiliis, ubi erat regia sua, Concidit,

    Ov. F. 6, 601:

    quodque suus conjux riguo collegerat horto, Truncat olus foliis,

    id. M. 8, 646; so id. ib. 15, 819.
    II.
    In partic.
    A.
    As substt.
    1.
    sui, suorum, m., his, their (etc.) friends, soldiers, fellow-beings, equals, adherents, followers, partisans, posterity, slaves, family, etc., of persons in any near connection with the antecedent.
    (α).
    (Corresp. to the regular usage, I. A. B. C.) Cupio abducere ut reddam (i.e. eam) suis, to her family, friends, Ter. Eun. 1, 2, 77; cf. id. ib. 1, 2, 66:

    cum animus societatem caritatis coierit cum suis, omnesque natura conjunctos suos duxerit,

    fellow-beings, Cic. Leg. 1, 23, 60:

    mulier ingeniosa praecepit suis omnia Caelio pollicerentur,

    her slaves, id. Cael. 25, 62:

    quo facilius et nostras domos obire, et ipse a suis coli possit,

    his friends, id. ib. 7, 18:

    qua gratiam beneficii vestri cum suorum laude conjungant,

    their family, id. Agr. 2, 1, 1:

    vellem hanc contemptionem pecuniae suis reliquisset,

    to his posterity, id. Phil. 3, 6, 16:

    cum divisurum se urbem palam suis polliceretur,

    his partisans, id. ib. 13, 9, 19:

    Caesar, cohortatus suos, proelium commisit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 25; so,

    Curio exercitum reduxit, suis omnibus praeter Fabium incolumibus,

    id. B. C. 2, 35:

    Caesar receptui suorum timens,

    id. ib. 3, 46:

    certior ab suis factus est, praeclusas esse portas,

    id. ib. 2, 20:

    omnium suorum consensu, Curio bellum ducere parabat,

    id. ib. 2, 37: so,

    Pompejus suorum omnium hortatu statuerat proelio decertare,

    id. ib. 3, 86:

    Caesar Brundisium ad suos severius scripsit,

    to his officers, id. ib. 3, 25:

    naviculam conscendit cum paucis suis,

    a few of his followers, id. ib. 3, 104:

    multum cum suis consiliandi causa secreto praeter consuetudinem loqueretur,

    id. ib. 1, 19:

    nupsit Melino, adulescenti inprimis inter suos et honesto et nobili,

    his equals, associates, Cic. Clu. 5, 11:

    rex raptim a suis in equum impositus fugit,

    his suite, Liv. 41, 4, 7:

    subsidio suorum proelium restituere,

    comrades, id. 21, 52, 10:

    feras bestias... ad opem suis ferendam avertas,

    their young, id. 26, 13, 12:

    abstulit sibi in suos potestatem,

    his slaves, Sen. Ira, 3, 12, 6:

    Besso et Nabarzani nuntiaverant sui regem... interemptum esse,

    their fellow - conspirators, Curt. 5, 12, 14. — Very rarely sing.:

    ut bona mens suis omnibus fuerit. Si quem libido abripuit, illorum eum, cum quibus conjuravit, non suum judicet esse,

    Liv. 39, 16, 5.—
    (β).
    Irregular use (acc. to I. D.): sui = ejus amici, etc. (freq.;

    the absolute use of ejus in this sense being inadmissible): quasi vero quisquam dormiat? ne sui quidem hoc velint, non modo ipse (sui = ejus amici, liberi),

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 38, 92:

    is (annus) ejus omnem spem... morte pervertit. Fuit hoc luctuosum suis, acerbum patriae, etc.,

    id. Or. 3, 2, 8:

    quadrigas, quia per suos ( = ipsius milites) agendae erant, in prima acie locaverat rex,

    Liv. 37, 41, 8:

    auctoritatem Pisistrati qui inter suos ( = ejus cives) maxima erat,

    id. 37, 12:

    quo cum multitudine adversariorum sui superarentur, ipse fuit superior, etc.,

    Nep. Hann. 8, 4; v. g.—
    (γ).
    Without antecedent (cf. I. B. supra): quoties necesse est fallere aut falli a suis, by one ' s friends, Sen. Phoen. 493.—
    (δ).
    Sing.: sŭa, suae. f., a sweetheart, mistress (rare): illam suam suas res sibi habere jussit. Cic. Phil. 2, 28. 69:

    cedo quid hic faciet sua?

    Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 92.—
    2.
    sŭum, i, n., and more freq. sŭa, suorum, n. plur., = one ' s property.
    a.
    Sing.
    (α).
    Lit.:

    nec suom adimerem alteri,

    his property, his own, Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 38 (34):

    nunc si ille salvos revenit, reddam suom sibi (v. D. 3. a. infra),

    id. ib. 1, 2, 119:

    illum studeo quam facillime ad suum pervenire,

    Cic. Fam. 13, 26, 4:

    populi Romani hanc esse consuetudinem ut socios sui nihil deperdere velit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 43; cf. Cic. Rab. Post. 11, 3, I. A. 11. supra:

    nec donare illi de suo dicimur,

    Sen. Ben. 7, 4, 2; so esp. with quisque; v. infra — Hence, de suo = per se, or sua sponte;

    (stellae) quae per igneos tractus labentia inde splendorem trahant caloremque, non de suo clara,

    Sen. Q. N. 7, 1, 6. —
    (β).
    Trop.:

    meum mihi placebat, illi suum (of a literary essay),

    Cic. Att. 14, 20, 3: suom quemque decet, his own manners, etc., Plaut. Stich. 5, 4, 11; so, expendere oportet quid quisque habeat sui ( what peculiarities) nec velle experiri quam se aliena deceant;

    id enim maxime quemque decet quod est cujusque maxime suum,

    Cic. Off. 1, 31, 113.—
    (γ).
    Jurid. term: aliquid pro suo possidere, to possess in the belief of one ' s legal right:

    pro suo possessio tale est, cum dominium nobis acquiri putamus. Et ea causa possidemus ex qua acquiritur, et praeterea pro suo,

    Dig. 41, 10, 1;

    so without an antecedent, and referring to a first person: item re donata, pro donato et pro suo possideo,

    ib. 41, 10, 1; v. the whole tit. ib. 42, 10 (Pro suo); cf. ib. 23, 3, 67; cf. C., infra fin.;

    similarly: usucapere pro suo = acquire dominion by a possession pro suo, Fragm. Vat. 111: res pro suo, quod justam causam possidendi habet, usucapit,

    id. ib. 260; Dig. 41, 3, 27. —
    b.
    Plur.
    (α).
    One ' s property:

    Roscius tibi omnia sua praeter animam tradidit,

    Cic. Rosc. Am. 50, 146:

    qui etiam hostibus externis victis sua saepissime reddiderunt,

    id. Agr. 1, 6, 19:

    tu autem vicinis tuis Massiliensibus sua reddis,

    id. Att. 14, 14, 6:

    Remi legatos miserunt qui dicerent se suaque omnia in fidem atque potestatem populi Romani permittere,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 3, 2; 1, 11, 2; 2, 13, 2:

    ipsi milites alveos informes quibus se suaque transveherent, faciebant,

    their baggage, Liv. 21, 26, 9:

    docere eos qui sua permisere fortunae,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, praef. 7; so without an antecedent, one ' s own property (cf. I. B. 2. supra):

    hanc ob causam maxime ut sua tenerentur res publicae constitutae sunt,

    Cic. Off. 2, 21, 73;

    rarely = eorum res: quod vero etiam sua reddiderint (i.e. Gallis),

    Liv. 39, 55, 3. —
    (β).
    One ' s own affairs:

    aliena ut melius videant et dijudicent Quam sua,

    Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 96:

    cognoscunt... immobile agmen et sua quemque molientem,

    Liv. 10, 20, 8:

    omnia ei hostium non secus quam sua nota erant,

    id. 22, 41, 5:

    aliena cum suis perdidit,

    Sen. Ben. 7, 16, 3.— Absol., referring to a noun fem.: sua (finxit) C. Cassius ( = suas persuasiones; cf.

    the context),

    Quint. 6, 3, 90.
    B.
    Predicative uses: suum esse, facere, fieri, putare, etc., like a gen. poss., to be, etc., the property, or under the dominion, control, power of the antecedent.
    1.
    Of property in things.
    (α).
    Corporeal:

    scripsit causam dicere Prius aurum quare sit suum,

    Ter. Eun. prol. 11:

    nihil erat cujusquam quod non hoc anno suum fore putabat (Clodius),

    Cic. Mil. 32, 87:

    quia suum cujusque fit, eorum quae natura fuerant communia quod cuique obtigit, id quisque teneat,

    id. Off. 1, 7, 21:

    Juba suam esse praedicans praedam,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 84:

    gratum sibi populum facturum, si omnes res Neapolitanorum suas duxissent,

    Liv. 22, 32, 8: libros esse dicimus Ciceronis;

    eosdem Dorus librarius suos vocat,

    Sen. Ben. 7, 6, 1:

    cum enim istarum personarum nihil suum esse possit,

    since these persons can own nothing, Gai. Inst. 2, 96; cf. Dig. 1, 7, 15 pr.—Virtually predicative:

    referas ad eos qui suam rem nullam habent ( = rem quae sua sit),

    nothing of their own, Cic. Phil. 2, 6, 15:

    qui in potestate nostra est, nihil suum habere potest,

    Gai. Inst. 2, 84. — ( b) Of literary works:

    quae convenere in Andriam ex Perinthia Fatetur transtulisse, atque usum pro suis ( = quasi sua essent),

    Ter. And. prol. 14:

    potest autem... quae tum audiet... ingenue pro suis dicere,

    his own thoughts, Quint. 12, 3, 3.—
    (γ).
    Of a country or people:

    suum facere = suae dicionis facere: commemorat ut (Caesar) magnam partem Italiae beneficio atque auctoritate eorum suam fecerit,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 32:

    in quam (Asiam) jam ex parte suam fecerit,

    Liv. 44, 24, 4:

    crudelissima ac superbissima gens sua omnia suique arbitrii facit,

    id. 21, 44, 5.—
    (δ).
    Trop.:

    omnia sua putavit quae vos vestra esse velletis,

    Cic. Phil. 11, 12, 27:

    non meminit, illum exercitum senatus populique Romani esse, non suum,

    id. ib. 13, 6, 4: [p. 1826] probavit, non rempublicam suam esse, sed se reipublicae, Sen. Clem. 1, 19, 8;

    so of incorporeal things: hi si velint scire quam brevis eorum vita sit, cogitent ex quota parte sua sit,

    how much of it is their own, id. Brev. Vit. 19, 3; so, suum facere, to appropriate:

    prudentis est, id quod in quoque optimum est, si possit, suum facere,

    Quint. 10, 2, 26:

    quaeremus quomodo animus (hanc virtutem) usu suam faciat,

    Sen. Clem. 1, 3, 1.—
    2.
    Of persons.
    (α).
    Under a master ' s or father ' s control:

    ut lege caverent, ne quis quem civitatis mutandae causa suum faceret, neve alienaret,

    make any one his slave, Liv. 41, 8, 12: quid eam tum? suamne esse ajebat, his daughter, i.e. in his power? Ter. And. 5, 4, 29:

    eduxit mater pro sua ( = quasi sua esset),

    id. Eun. 1, 2, 76.—
    (β).
    Reflexively = sui juris, independent, one ' s own master or mistress, not subject to another ' s control, under one ' s own control (v. sui juris, infra):

    ancilla, quae mea fuit hodie, sua nunc est,

    Plaut. Pers. 4, 3, 3.—
    (γ).
    Of moral power over others: suus = devoted to one:

    hice hoc munere arbitrantur Suam Thaidem esse,

    Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 38:

    eos hic fecit suos Paulo sumptu,

    id. Ad. 5, 4, 21:

    sed istunc exora, ut (mulierem) suam esse adsimulet,

    to be friendly to him, id. Heaut. 2, 3, 117:

    cum Antonio sic agens ut perspiciat, si in eo negotio nobis satisfecerit, totum me futurum suum,

    Cic. Att. 14, 1 a, 2:

    Alpheus... utebatur populo sane suo,

    devoted to him, id. Quint. 7, 29.— Poet.: vota suos habuere deos, the vows (inst. of the persons uttering them) had the gods on their side, Ov. M. 4, 373. —
    (δ).
    Of power over one's self, etc.:

    nam qui sciet ubi quidque positum sit, quaque eo veniat, is poterit eruere, semperque esse in disputando suus,

    self-possessed, Cic. Fin. 4, 4, 10:

    inaestimabile bonum est suum fieri,

    selfcontrol, Sen. Ep. 75, 18:

    (furiosus) qui suus non est,

    Dig. 42, 4, 7, § 9:

    vix sua, vix sanae virgo Niseia compos Mentis erat,

    Ov. M. 8, 35. —
    3.
    Suum est, as impers. predicate: = ejus est, characteristic of, peculiar to one (very rare):

    dixit antea, sed suum illud est, nihil ut affirmet,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 42, 99.
    C.
    Attributive usages, almost always (except in Seneca) with suus before its noun.
    1.
    The property, relations, affairs, etc., of one opposed to those of another, own.
    a.
    Opposition expressed:

    nihil de suo casu, multa de vestro querebatur,

    Cic. Balb. 8, 21:

    sua sibi propiora pericula quam mea loquebantur,

    id. Sest. 18, 40:

    suasque et imperatoris laudes canentes,

    Liv. 45, 38, 12:

    damnatione collegae et sua,

    id. 22, 35, 3:

    Senecae fratris morte pavidum et pro sua incolumitate pavidum,

    Tac. A. 14, 73:

    velut pro Vitellio conquerentes suum dolorem proferebant,

    id. H. 3, 37;

    opp. alienus: ut suo potius tempore mercatorem admitterent, quam celerius alieno,

    at a time convenient to themselves, Varr. R. R. 3, 16, 11. —Without antecedent, opp. externus:

    (Platoni) duo placet esse motus, unum suum, alterum externum, esse autem divinius quod ipsum ex se sua sponte moveatur, etc.,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 12, 32. —
    b.
    Implied:

    voluptatem suis se finibus tenere jubeamus,

    within the limits assigned to it, Cic. Fin. 3, 1, 1:

    cum vobis immortale monumentum suis paene manibus senatus... exstruxerit,

    id. Phil. 14, 12, 33:

    superiores (amnes) in Italia, hic (Rhodanus) trans Alpes, hospitales suas tantum, nec largiores quam intulere aquas vehentes,

    Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 224: colligitur aqua ex imbribus;

    ex suo fonte nativa est,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 3:

    pennas ambo non habuere suas (non suas = alienas),

    Ov. Tr. 3, 4, 24. —
    c.
    In particular phrases. ( a) Sua sponte and suo Marte, of one ' s own accord, by one ' s self, without the suggestion, influence, aid, etc., of others:

    Caesar bellum contra Antonium sua sponte suscepit,

    Cic. Phil. 8, 2, 5:

    sua sponte ad Caesarem in jus adierunt,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 87.—So of things, = per se, by or of itself, for itself, for its own sake:

    jus et omne honestum sua sponte expetendum (cf. in the context: per se igitur jus est expetendum),

    Cic. Leg. 1, 18, 48: justitium sua sponte inceptum priusquam indiceretur, by itself, i. e. without a decree, Liv. 9, 7, 8; so,

    sortes sua sponte attenuatas,

    id. 22, 1, 11 (cf. id. 22, 38, 13; 35, 14, 4, I. A. 2., supra): rex enim ipse, sua sponte, nullis commentariis Caesaris, simul atque audivit ejus interitum suo Marte res suas recuperavit, Cic. Phil. 2, 37, 95.—
    (β).
    Suus locus, in milit. lang., one ' s own ground, position, or lines:

    restitit suo loco Romana acies (opp. to the advance of the enemy),

    Liv. 22, 16, 2.—So figuratively:

    et staturas suo loco leges,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 20, 2:

    aciem instruxit primum suis locis, pauloque a castris Pompeji longius,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 84 (cf.: suo loco, 7. b. g, infra).—
    (γ).
    For suo jure v. 3. infra.—
    (δ).
    Sua Venus = one's own Venus, i. e. good luck (v. Venus): ille non est mihi par virtutibus, nec officiis;

    sed habuit suam Venerem,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 28, 2. —
    2.
    Of private relations (opp. to public):

    ut in suis rebus, ita in re publica luxuriosus nepos,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 18, 48:

    deinde ut communibus pro communibus utatur, privatis ut suis,

    id. Off. 1, 7, 20:

    quod oppidum Labienus sua pecunia exaedificaverat,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 15:

    militibus agros ex suis possessionibus pollicetur,

    i. e. his private property, id. ib. 1, 17; Sen. Ben. 7, 6, 3. —
    3.
    Of just rights or claims:

    imperatori senatuique honos suus redditus,

    due to them, Liv. 3, 10, 3:

    neque inpedimento fuit, quominus religionibus suus tenor suaque observatio redderetur,

    Val. Max. 1, 1, 8:

    quibus omnibus debetur suus decor,

    Quint. 11, 1, 41. —

    So distributively: is mensibus suis dimisit legionem,

    in the month in which each soldier was entitled to his discharge, Liv. 40, 41, 8. — Esp.: suo jure (so, meo, nostro, tuo, etc., jure), by his own right:

    Tullus Hostilius qui suo jure in porta nomen inscripsit,

    Cic. Phil. 13, 12, 26:

    earum rerum hic A. Licinius fructum a me repetere prope suo jure debet,

    id. Arch. 1, 1; id. Marcell. 2, 6; id. Phil. 2, 25, 62; id. Balb. 8, 21:

    numquam illum res publica suo jure esset ulta,

    by its unquestionable right, id. Mil. 33, 88. —
    4.
    Of that to which one is exclusively devoted:

    huic quaestioni suum diem dabimus,

    a day for its exclusive discussion, Sen. Ep. 94, 52:

    homini autem suum bonum ratio est,

    his exclusive good, id. ib. 76, 10:

    in majorem me quaestionem vocas, cui suus locus, suus dies dandus est,

    id. Q. N. 2, 46, 1. —

    With proprius: mentio inlata apud senatum est, rem suo proprio magistratu egere,

    that the business needed a particular officer exclusively for itself, Liv. 4, 8, 4:

    et Hannibalem suo proprio occupandum bello,

    id. 27, 38, 7; cf.:

    dissupasset hostes, ni suo proprio eum proelio equites Volscorum exceptum tenuissent,

    in which they alone fought, id. 3, 70, 4:

    mare habet suas venas quibus impletur,

    by which it alone is fed, Sen. Q. N. 3, 14, 3. —
    5.
    According to one ' s liking, of one ' s own choice.
    a.
    Of persons, devoted to one, friendly, dear:

    Milone occiso (Clodius) habuisset suos consules,

    after his own heart, Cic. Mil. 33, 89:

    collegit ipse se contra suum Clodium,

    his dear Clodius, id. Pis. 12, 27 (cf.: suum facere, habere, II. B. 2. g).—
    b.
    Of things, favorable.
    (α).
    Of place: neque Jugurtham nisi... suo loco pugnam facere, on his own ground, i. e. chosen by him, favorable, Sall. J. 61, 1:

    hic magna auxilia expectabant et suis locis bellum in hiemem ducere cogitabant,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 61; cf.:

    numquam nostris locis laboravimus,

    Liv. 9, 19, 15.—
    (β).
    Of time:

    cum Perseus suo maxime tempore et alieno hostibus incipere bellum posset,

    Liv. 42, 43, 3; v. 7. b, infra. —
    c.
    Of circumstances: sua occasio, a favorable opportunity; sometimes without antecedent:

    neque occasioni tuae desis, neque suam occasionem hosti des,

    Liv. 22, 39, 21:

    tantum abfuit ut ex incommodo alieno sua occasio peteretur,

    id. 4, 58, 2:

    aestuque suo Locros trajecit,

    a favorable tide, id. 23, 41, 11:

    ignoranti quem portum petat nullus suus ventus est,

    Sen. Ep. 71, 3:

    orba suis essent etiamnunc lintea ventis,

    Ov. M. 13, 195:

    aut ille Ventis iturus non suis,

    Hor. Epod. 9, 30. —
    6.
    Of persons or things, peculiar, particular:

    quae est ei (animo) natura? Propria, puto, et sua,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 29, 70:

    omnis enim motus animi suum quendam a natura habet vultum,

    id. de Or. 3, 57, 316:

    geometrae et musici... more quodam loquuntur suo. Ipsae rhetorum artes verbis in docendo quasi privatis utuntur ac suis,

    id. Fin. 3, 1, 4:

    sensus omnis habet suum finem,

    its peculiar limits, Quint. 9, 4, 61: animus cum suum ambitum complevit et finibus se suis cinxit, consummatum est summum bonum, Sen. Vit. Beat. 9, 3: est etiam in nominibus ( nouns) diverso collocatis sua gratia, their peculiar elegance, Quint. 9, 3, 86:

    ibi non bello aperto, sed suis artibus, fraude et insidiis, est paene circumventus,

    Liv. 21, 34, 1:

    nec Hannibalem fefellit, suis se artibus peti,

    id. 22, 16, 5:

    adversus hostem non virtute tantum, sed suis (i. e. hostis) etiam pugnare consiliis oportebat,

    Flor. 2, 6, 26:

    liberam Minucii temeritatem se suo modo expleturum,

    Liv. 22, 28, 2:

    equites ovantes sui moris carmine,

    id. 10, 26, 11:

    exsultans cum sui moris tripudiis,

    id. 21, 42, 3:

    tripudiantes suo more,

    id. 23, 26, 9.—So, suo Marte, referring to the style of fighting peculiar to the different arms:

    equitem suo alienoque Marte pugnare,

    that the cavalry were fighting both in their own style and in that of the other arms, Liv. 3, 62, 9; cf.: suo Marte, 1, c. a, supra.—And distributively ( = suus quisque):

    suos autem haec operum genera ut auctores, sic etiam amatores habent,

    Quint. 12, 10, 2:

    illa vero fatidica fulmina ex alto et ex suis venire sideribus,

    Plin. 2, 43, 43, § 113; cf.:

    quae quidem planiora suis exemplis reddentur,

    Val. Max. 3, 4 prooem.—
    7.
    Proper, right.
    a.
    Referring to one's ordinary or normal condition:

    quod certe non fecisset, si suum numerum naves habuissent,

    their regular complement, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 51, § 133. — So poet.:

    flecte ratem! numerum non habet illa suum,

    its full number, Ov. H. 10, 36:

    novus exercitus consulibus est decretus: binae legiones cum suo equitatu,

    Liv. 40, 36, 6:

    cum suo justo equitatu,

    id. 21, 17, 8:

    totam (disciplinam) in suum statum redegit,

    Val. Max. 2, 7, 2:

    tranquilla mente et vultu suo,

    with the ordinary expression of his face, Sen. Clem. 2, 6, 2:

    media pars aeris ab his (ignibus) submota, in frigore suo manet. Natura enim aeris gelida est,

    id. Q. N. 2, 10, 4:

    cornuaque in patriis non sua vidit aquis,

    not natural to her, Ov. H. 14, 90. —

    So, non suus, of ingrafted branches and their fruit: miraturque (arbos) novas frondis et non sua poma,

    Verg. G. 2, 82. —
    b.
    Of time, proper, regular, etc. (cf. 5. b, supra).
    (α).
    The regular time ( = stato tempore):

    signum quod semper tempore exoritur suo,

    Plaut. Rud. prol. 4:

    cum et recte et suo tempore pepererit,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 16: aestas suo tempore incanduit...;

    tam solstitium quam aequinoctium suos dies retulit,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 16, 3:

    omnes venti vicibus suis spirant majore ex parte,

    Plin. 2, 47, 48, § 128. —
    (β).
    The right or proper time:

    salictum suo tempore caedito,

    Cato, R. R. 33:

    cessit e vita suo magis quam suorum civium tempore,

    the right time for himself, Cic. Brut. 1, 4; so,

    exstingui homini suo tempore optabile est,

    id. Sen. 23, 85:

    Scandilius dicit se suo tempore rediturum,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 60, § 139:

    si Ardeates sua tempora exspectare velint,

    Liv. 4, 7, 6:

    Chrysippus dicit, illum... opperiri debere suum tempus, ad quod velut dato signo prosiliat,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 25, 3:

    quam multi exercitus tempore suo victorem hostem pepulerunt!

    Liv. 44, 39, 4. — Without antecedent: sed suo tempore totius sceleris hujus fons aperietur. Cic. Phil. 14, 6, 15; cf.:

    de ordine laudis, etc., praecipiemus suo tempore,

    Quint. 2, 4, 21. —
    (γ).
    Suo loco = at the proper place:

    quae erant prudentiae propria suo loco dicta sunt,

    Cic. Off. 1, 40, 143:

    quod reddetur suo loco,

    Quint. 11, 1, 16:

    ut suo loco dicetur,

    Plin. 2, 90, 102, § 221:

    inscripta quae suis locis reddam,

    id. 1, prooem. § 27; Sen. Ben. 2, 20, 2; cf. 1, c. b; 4. supra. —
    (δ).
    Suited, appropriate, adapted to one:

    in eodem fundo suum quidquid conseri oportet,

    Cato, R. R. 7:

    siquidem hanc vendidero pretio suo,

    at a suitable price, Plaut. Pers. 4, 4, 30:

    in partes suas digerenda causa,

    Quint. 11, 1, 6:

    confundetur quidquid in suas partes natura digessit,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 29, 8. — Poet.: haec ego dumque queror, lacrimae sua verba sequuntur, Deque meis oculis in tua membra cadunt, appropriate, i. e. tristia, Ov. H. 14, 67.—Without antecedent: suum quidquid genus talearum serito, any fit kind, i. e. suited to the ground, Cato, R. R. 48. —
    8.
    Own, with the notion of independence of, or dependence on others (cf. B. 2. g d).
    a.
    Of political independence: pacem condicionibus his fecerunt ut Capuae suae leges, sui magistratus essent, her own laws, i. e. not subject to Carthage, Liv. 23, 7, 2: liberos [p. 1827] eos ac suis legibus victuros, id. 25, 23, 4. —

    Esp. in the phrases suae potestatis or in sua potestate esse, suo jure uti, sui juris esse: Puteolos, qui nunc in sua potestate sunt, suo jure, libertate aequa utuntur, totos occupabunt,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 31, 86:

    Rhegini potestatis suae ad ultimum remanserunt,

    retained their self-government, Liv. 23, 30, 9:

    urbem ne quam formulae sui juris facerent,

    id. 38, 9, 10. —
    b.
    Of paternal authority.
    (α).
    Free from the power of the paterfamilias; in the phrases sui juris esse, suae potestatis esse, to be independent:

    quaedam personae sui juris sunt, quaedam alieno juri sunt subjectae, Gai,

    Inst. 1, 48:

    sui juris sunt familiarum suarum principes, id est pater familiae, itemque mater familiae,

    Ulp. Fragm. 4, 1:

    liberi parentum potestate liberantur emancipatione. Sed filius quidem ter manumissus sui juris fit, ceteri autem liberi una manumissione sui juris fiunt,

    id. ib. 10, 1:

    morte patris filius et filia sui juris fiunt,

    id. ib. 10, 2:

    patres familiarum sunt qui sunt suae potestatis,

    Dig. 1, 6, 4:

    si modo defunctus testator suae potestatis mortis tempore fuerit,

    Gai. Inst. 2, 147. —

    With indef. reference: si sui juris sumus,

    Dig. 46, 2, 20; cf.:

    pro suo possideo, 2. a. supra.—Attributively: sui juris arrogatio feminae,

    Cod. Just. 8, 47, 8:

    homo sui juris,

    ib. 10, § 5.— Trop.:

    sapiens numquam semiliber erit: integrae semper libertatis et sui juris,

    Sen. Brev. Vit. 5, 3:

    non illarum coitu fieri cometen, sed proprium et sui juris esse,

    id. Q. N. 7, 12, 2: nullique sunt tam feri et sui juris adfectus, ut non disciplina perdomentur, id. Ira, 2, 12, 3. —
    (β).
    Subject to paternal authority, in the phrases suus heres, sui liberi; suus heres, an heir who had been in the paternal power of the deceased:

    CVI SVVS HERES NON SIT, XII. Tab. fr. 5, 4.—In the jurists without antecedent: sui et necessarii heredes sunt velut filius filiave, nepos neptisve ex filia, deinceps ceteri qui modo in potestate morientis fuerunt,

    Gai. Inst. 2, 156:

    (emancipati liberi) non sunt sui heredes,

    ib. 2, 135:

    alia facta est juris interpretatio inter suos heredes,

    ib. 3, 15:

    datur patrono adversus suos heredes bonorum possessio (where patrono is not the antecedent of suos),

    ib. 3, 41:

    sui heredes vel instituendi sunt vel exheredandi,

    Ulp. Fragm. 22, 14:

    accrescunt suis quidem heredibus in partem virilem, extraneis autem in partem dimidiam,

    id. ib. 22, 17. —

    Sui liberi, children in paternal power: de suis et legitimis liberis,

    Cod. Just. 6, 55 inscr.
    D.
    In particular connections.
    1.
    With ipse, his own, etc. (cf. Zumpt, Gram. § 696).
    a.
    Ipse agreeing with the antecedent of suus, the antecedent being,
    (α).
    A subjectnom.:

    (ingenium ejus) valet ipsum suis viribus,

    by its own strength, Cic. Cael. 19, 45:

    legio Martia non ipsa suis decretis hostem judicavit Antonium?

    by its own resolutions, id. Phil. 4, 2, 5:

    ruit ipse suis cladibus,

    id. ib. 14, 3, 8:

    si ex scriptis cognosci ipsi suis potuissent,

    id. de Or. 2, 2, 8:

    qui se ipse sua gravitate et castimonia defenderet,

    id. Cael. 5, 11:

    quod ipse suae civitatis imperium obtenturus esset,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 3:

    suamet ipsae fraude omnes interierunt,

    Liv. 8, 18, 9; 39, 49, 3:

    ut saeviret ipse in suum sanguinem effecerunt,

    id. 40, 5, 1:

    respicerent suum ipsi exercitum,

    id. 42, 52, 10; 21, 31, 12; 22, 38, 3; 6, 19, 6.—
    (β).
    A subject-acc.:

    sunt qui dicant eam sua ipsam peremptam mercede,

    Liv. 1, 11, 9:

    (tribuniciam potestatem) suis ipsam viribus dissolvi,

    id. 2, 44, 2.—
    (γ).
    An object in dat. or acc.:

    sic ut ipsis consistendi in suis munitionibus locus non esset,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 6:

    tribuni (hostem) intra suamet ipsum moenia compulere,

    Liv. 6, 36, 4:

    alios sua ipsos invidia opportunos interemit,

    id. 1, 54, 8; 22, 14, 13.—Suus as adjunct of subject (rare):

    aliquando sua praesidia in ipsos consurrexerunt,

    their own garrisons revolted against them, Sen. Clem. 1, 26, 1.—
    b.
    With gen. of ipse, strengthening the possessive notion (cf. 4.;

    post-Aug. and very rare, but freq. in modern Lat.): aves (foetus suos) libero caelo suaeque ipsorum fiduciae permittunt,

    Quint. 2, 6, 7 (but tuus ipsius occurs in Cic.:

    tuo ipsius studio,

    Cic. Mur. 4, 9:

    tuam ipsius amicitiam,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 4, § 7).—
    c.
    Both suus and ipse agreeing with the governing noun (very rare; not in Cic. or Caes.): quae tamen in ipso cursu suo dissipata est (= ipsa in cursu suo), in its very course, Sen. Q. N. 1, 1, 3 dub.:

    suamet ipsa scelera,

    Sall. C. 23, 2 (Dietsch ex conj. ipse):

    suismet ipsis corporibus,

    Liv. 2, 19, 5 MSS. (Weissenb. ex conj. ipsi):

    a suismet ipsis praesidiis,

    id. 8, 25, 6 MSS. (Weissenb. ipsi).—
    2.
    With quisque, distributively, each ( every one)... his own; in prose quisque is generally preceded by suus.
    a.
    Quisque and suus in different cases.
    (α).
    Quisque as subjectnom.:

    sentit enim vim quisque suam quoad possit abuti,

    Lucr. 5, 1033:

    suo quisque loco cubet,

    Cato, R. R. 5:

    suum quisque noscat ingenium,

    Cic. Off. 1, 31, 114:

    ad suam quisque (me disciplinam) rapiet,

    id. Ac. 2, 36, 114:

    quod suos quisque servos in tali re facere voluisset,

    id. Mil. 10, 29:

    cum suo quisque auxilio uteretur,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 51:

    celeriter ad suos quisque ordines redit,

    id. ib. 3, 37.—In apposition with plur. subj. (freq. in Liv.):

    nunc alii sensus quo pacto quisque suam rem Sentiat,

    Lucr. 4, 522:

    ut omnes cives Romani in suis quisque centuriis prima luce adessent,

    that all the Roman citizens should be present, each in his own centuria, Liv. 1, 44, 1:

    hinc senatus, hinc plebs, suum quisque intuentes ducem constiterant,

    id. 6, 15, 3:

    ut (trigemini) pro sua quisque patria dimicent,

    id. 1, 24, 2:

    stabant compositi suis quisque ordinibus,

    id. 44, 38, 11:

    (consules) in suas quisque provincias proficiscuntur,

    id. 25, 12, 2; 25, 26, 13:

    in suo quaeque (stella) motu naturam suam exercent,

    Plin. 2, 39, 39, § 106.—With abl. absol.:

    omnes, velut dis auctoribus in spem suam quisque acceptis, proelium una voce poscunt,

    Liv. 21, 45, 9 Weissenb. ad loc.:

    relictis suis quisque stationibus... concurrerunt,

    id. 32, 24, 4; 4, 44, 10; 39, 49, 3; 2, 38, 6.—
    (β).
    With acc. of quisque as subj.:

    fabrum esse suae quemque fortunae, App. Claud. ap. Ps.-Sall. Ep. ad Caes. Rep. c. l.: sui quemque juris et retinendi et dimittendi esse dominum,

    Cic. Balb. 13, 31:

    recipere se in domos suas quemque jussit,

    Liv. 25, 10, 9; and (ungrammatically) nom., as apposition to a subj.-acc.:

    se non modo suam quisque patriam, sed totam Siciliam relicturos,

    id. 26, 29, 3 MSS. (Weissenb. ex conj. quosque).—
    (γ).
    As adjunct of the subject-nom., with a case of quisque as object, attribut. gen., etc.:

    sua cujusque animantis natura est,

    Cic. Fin. 5, 9, 25:

    sua quemque fraus, suum facinus, suum scelus, etc., de sanitate ac mente deturbat,

    id. Pis. 20, 46:

    sua quemque fraus et suus terror maxime vexat,

    id. Rosc. Am. 24, 67:

    suum cuique incommodum ferendum est,

    id. Off. 3, 6, 30:

    ut solidum suum cuique solvatur,

    id. Rab. Post. 17, 46:

    ne suus cuique domi hostis esset,

    Liv. 3, 16, 3:

    ut sua cuique respublica in manu esset,

    id. 26, 8, 11:

    animus suus cuique ordinem pugnandi dabat,

    id. 22, 5, 8:

    tentorium suum cuique militi domus ac penates sunt,

    id. 44, 39, 5:

    suus cuique (stellae) color est,

    Plin. 2, 18, 16, § 79:

    trahit sua quemque voluptas,

    Verg. E. 2, 65:

    stat sua cuique dies,

    id. A. 10, 467.—
    (δ).
    As predicate-nom. (v. II. B.):

    opinionem, quae sua cuique conjectanti esse potest,

    Liv. 6, 12, 3.—
    (ε).
    As adjunct of subj.-acc.:

    suum cuique honorem et gradum redditum gaudeo,

    Cic. Rosc. Am. 47, 136:

    scientiam autem suam cujusque artis esse,

    id. Fin. 5, 9, 26.—
    (ζ).
    As adjunct of an object, with a case of quisque as object or attribut. gen.: suam cuique sponsam, mihi meam: suum cuique amorem, mihi meum, Atil. Fragm. inc. 1: suom cuique per me uti atque frui licet, Cato ap. Gell. 13, 24 (23), 1:

    ut suo quemque appellem nomine,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 2, 52:

    placet Stoicis suo quamque rem nomine appellare,

    Cic. Fam. 9, 22, 1:

    ad suam cujusque naturam consilium est omne revocandum,

    id. Off. 1, 33, 119:

    justitia quae suum cuique distribuit,

    id. N. D. 3, 15, 38:

    in tribuendo suum cuique,

    id. Off. 1, 5, 14:

    Turnus sui cuique periculi recens erat documentum,

    Liv. 1, 52, 4:

    in trimatu suo cuique dimidiam esse mensuram futurae certum esse,

    Plin. 7, 15, 16, § 73:

    certa cuique rerum suarum possessio,

    Vell. 2, 89, 4; cf.: qua re suum unicuique studium suaque omnibus delectatio relinquatur, Ps.-Cic. Cons. 26, 93.—With quemque in apposition with acc. plur.:

    Camillus vidit intentos opifices suo quemque operi,

    Liv. 6, 25, 9; so cujusque in appos. with gen. plur.: trium clarissimorum suae cujusque gentis virorum mors, id. 39, 52, 7; and cuique with dat. plur.: sui cuique mores fingunt fortunam hominibus, Poet. ap. Nep. Att. 11, 6 (where Lachm. ad Lucr. 2, 372, reads quique, ex conj.; cf. b. b, infra).—
    b.
    Attraction of suus and quisque as adjuncts of nouns.
    (α).
    Attraction of suus:

    ut nemo sit nostrum quin in sensibus sui cujusque generis judicium requirat acrius (= suum cujusque generis judicium),

    Cic. Ac. 2, 7, 19:

    quas tamen inter omnes (voces) est suo quoque in genere (vox) mediocris ( = inter omnes voces est mediocris vox, sua quoque in genere),

    id. de Or. 3, 57, 216:

    eo concilia suae cujusque regionis indici jussit (= sua cujusque regionis concilia),

    Liv. 45, 29, 10:

    equites suae cuique parti post principia collocat (= equites suos cuique parti),

    id. 3, 22, 6:

    cum motibus armorum et corporum suae cuique genti assuetis,

    id. 25, 17, 5:

    legiones deducebantur cum tribunis et centurionibus et sui cujusque ordinis militibus (= suis cujusque),

    Tac. A. 14, 27:

    quae sui cujusque sunt ingenii,

    Quint. 7, 10, 10 Halm (al. sua):

    sui cujusque ingenii poma vel semina gerunt (= sua cujusque),

    Col. 3, 1;

    and by a double attraction: has (cohortes) subsidiariae ternae et aliae totidem suae cujusque legionis subsequebantur (= has cohortes... totidem cujusque legionis, suam quaeque legionem, subsequebantur),

    Caes. B. C. 1, 83. —
    (β).
    Attraction of quisque:

    tanta ibi copia venustatum in suo quique loco sita,

    Plaut. Poen. 5, 4, 6 (al. quaeque):

    quodvis frumentum non tamen omne Quique suo genere inter se simile esse videbis,

    Lucr. 2, 372 Lachm. and Munro ad loc.:

    cum verba debeant sui cujusque generis copulari,

    Varr. L. L. 10, 48:

    in sensibus sui cujusque generis judicium,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 7, 19:

    haec igitur proclivitas ad suum quodque genus aegrotatio dicatur,

    id. Tusc. 4, 12, 28:

    separatim greges sui cujusque generis nocte remeabant (= greges sui quisque generis),

    Liv. 24, 3, 5:

    ut sui cujusque mensis acciperet (frumentum),

    Suet. Aug. 40;

    and quisque both attracted and in its own case: quia cujusque partis naturae et in corpore et in animo sua quaeque vis sit (where either cujusque or quaeque is redundant),

    Cic. Fin. 5, 17, 46; v. Madv. ad loc.; Cato, R. R. 23 fin.;

    so esp. in the phrases suo quoque tempore, anno, die, loco, etc.: pecunia, quae in stipendium Romanis suo quoque anno penderetur, deerat (= suo quaeque anno),

    each instalment in the year when due, Liv. 33, 46, 9 Weissenb. ad loc.:

    suo quoque loco,

    Varr. R. R. 1, 7, 2; 1, 22, 6:

    opera quae suis quibusque temporibus anni vilicum exsequi oporteret,

    Col. 11, 3:

    suo quoque tempore,

    Vitr. 2, 9, 4:

    nisi sua quaque die usurae exsolverentur (= sua quaeque die),

    Dig. 22, 1, 12 init.; 13, 7, 8, § 3:

    ut opera rustica suo quoque tempore faciat,

    ib. 19, 2, 25, § 3 (al. quaeque)—
    c.
    In the order quisque... suus.
    (α).
    In relative clauses, comparative clauses with ut, and interrogative clauses introduced by quid, etc., where quisque immediately follows the relative, etc.:

    ut quisque suom volt esse, ita est,

    Ter. Ad. 3, 3, 45; cf.

    with sibi,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 18, 49; id. Lael. 9, 30:

    expendere oportere quid quisque habeat sui... nec velle experiri quam se aliena deceant. Id enim maxime quemque decet quod est cujusque maxime suum,

    id. Off. 1, 31, 113:

    neque solum quid in senatu quisque civitatis suae dicerent ignorabant, sed, etc.,

    Liv. 32, 19, 9:

    gratius id fore laetiusque quod quisque sua manu ex hoste captum rettulerit,

    id. 5, 20, 8; 6, 25, 10; cf.:

    in quibus cum multa sint quae sua quisque dicere velit, nihil est quod quisque suum possit dicere,

    Sen. Vit. Beat. 23, 1.—
    (β).
    If the emphasis is not on suus, but (for quisque, when emphatic, unusquisque is used) on some other word:

    in civitates quemque suas... dimisit,

    Liv. 21, 48, 2:

    in patriam quisque suam remissus est,

    Just. 33, 2, 8:

    in vestigio quemque suo vidit,

    Liv. 28, 22, 15; cf.:

    hospitibus quisque suis scribebant,

    id. 33, 45, 6:

    pro facultatibus quisque suis,

    id. 42, 53, 3; cf.:

    respiciendae sunt cuique facultates suae,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 15, 3:

    praecipitat quisque vitam suam et futuri desiderio laborat,

    id. Brev. Vit. 7, 5; id. Ben. 7, 5, 1:

    tunc praeceps quisque se proripit et penates suos deserit,

    id. Q. N. 6, 1, 5; 5, 18, 8:

    summum quisque causae suae judicem facit,

    Plin. 1, prooem. § 10: aestimatione nocturnae [p. 1828] quietis, dimidio quisque spatio vitae suae vivit, id. 7, 50, 51, § 167.—
    (γ).
    Poets adopt the order quisque suus when the metre requires it, Verg. A. 6, 743:

    oscula quisque suae matri tulerunt,

    Ov. F. 2, 715. —
    (δ).
    When suus and quisque belong to different clauses:

    atque earum quaeque, suum tenens munus... manet in lege naturae,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 13, 38. —
    d.
    Suus uterque, or uterque suus, distributively of two subjects:

    suas uterque legiones reducit in castra,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 40; 2, 28:

    ideo quod uterque suam legem confirmare debebit,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 49, 142:

    cum sui utrosque adhortarentur,

    Liv. 1, 25, 1:

    ad utrumque ducem sui redierunt,

    id. 21, 29, 5:

    utraque (lex) sua via it,

    Sen. Ben. 6, 6, 1; cf.

    uterque, in apposit.: nec ipsi tam inter se acriter contenderunt, quam studia excitaverant uterque sui corporis hominum,

    Liv. 26, 48, 6.—
    3.
    With sibi.
    (α).
    Sibi with pronom. force (cf. sui, IV. C. fin.):

    reddam suum sibi,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 119 ( = ei; but referred to b, infra, by Brix ad loc.); cf.:

    suam rem sibi salvam sistam,

    id. Poen. 5, 2, 123:

    idem lege sibi sua curationem petet,

    for himself, Cic. Agr. 2, 9, 22 (cf. id. Phil. 2, 37, 96;

    I. B. 2. b. supra): ut vindicare sibi suum fulgorem possint,

    Sen. Q. N. 1, 1, 11; cf.

    the formula of divorce: tuas res tibi habeto,

    Dig. 24, 2, 2.—Hence, illam suam suas res sibi habere jussit, Cic. Phil. 2, 28, 69.—
    (β).
    With sibi redundant, to strengthen suus (anteand post-class. and colloq.):

    quo pacto serviat suo sibi patri,

    Plaut. Capt. prol. 5:

    eum necabam ilico per cerebrum pinna sua sibi, quasi turturem,

    id. Poen. 2, 40; v. sui, IV. C. and the passages there cited.—
    4.
    With gen. agreeing with the subject of suus:

    quas cum solus pertulisset ut sua unius in his gratia esset,

    that the credit of it should belong to him alone, Liv. 2, 8, 3:

    qui de sua unius sententia omnia gerat,

    id. 44, 22, 11; cf.:

    unam Aegyptus in hoc spem habet suam,

    Sen. Q. N. 4, 2, 2.—For suus ipsius, etc., v. D. 1. b. supra.—
    5.
    With demonstr., rel., or indef. pronn. and adjj., of his, hers, etc.:

    postulat ut ad hanc suam praedam adjutores vos profiteamini,

    to this booty of his, Cic. Rosc. Am. 2, 6:

    Sestius cum illo exercitu suo,

    id. Sest. 5, 12:

    qua gravitate sua,

    id. ib. 61, 129:

    suam rem publicam illam defenderunt,

    that republic of theirs, id. ib. 67, 141:

    in istum civem suum,

    against this citizen of theirs, id. Balb. 18, 41:

    cum illo suo pari,

    id. Pis. 8, 18:

    te nulla sua calamitate civitas satiare potest?

    id. Phil. 8, 6, 19:

    dubitatis igitur, quin vos M. Laterensis ad suam spem aliquam delegerit,

    for some hope of his, id. Planc. 16, 39:

    non tam sua ulla spe quam militum impetu tractus,

    by any hope of his, Liv. 25, 21, 5:

    nullo suo merito,

    from no fault of theirs, id. 26, 29, 4:

    ipse arcano cum paucis familiaribus suis colloquitur,

    with a few of his friends, Caes. B. C. 1, 19.—
    6.
    With descriptive adjj.
    (α).
    Standing before the adj. and noun (so most freq.):

    suorum improbissimorum sermonum domicilium,

    Cic. Pis. 31, 76:

    causam sui dementissimi consilii,

    id. Phil. 2, 22, 53:

    suam insatiabilem crudelitatem,

    id. ib. 11, 3, 8:

    suis amplissimis fortunis,

    id. ib. 13, 8, 16:

    suum pristinum morem,

    id. Pis. 12, 27:

    suis lenissimis postulatis,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 5: simili ratione Pompeius in suis veteribus castris consedit (suis emphatic; cf. b, infra), id. ib. 3, 76.—
    (β).
    Between the adj. and noun (less emphatic):

    pro eximiis suis beneficiis,

    Cic. Prov. Cons. 4, 7:

    propter summam suam humanitatem,

    id. Fam. 15, 14, 1:

    ex praeteritis suis officiis,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 60:

    Caesar in veteribus suis castris consedit,

    id. ib. 3, 76.—
    (γ).
    After adj. and noun:

    veterem amicum suum excepit,

    Cic. Rab. Post. 16, 43:

    in illo ardenti tribunatu suo,

    id. Sest. 54, 116.—
    7.
    Objectively for the pers. pron. (rare):

    neque cuiquam mortalium injuriae suae parvae videntur ( = sibi illatae),

    Sall. C. 51, 11; so,

    neglectam ab Scipione et nimis leviter latam suam injuriam ratus,

    Liv. 29, 9, 9:

    ipsae enim leges te a cognitione sua judicio publico reppulerunt ( = a se cognoscendo),

    Cic. Balb. 14, 32:

    suam invidiam tali morte quaesitam ( = quaesitum esse ab eo ut homines se inviderent),

    Tac. A. 3, 16; so,

    nulla sua invidia,

    Cic. Mil. 15, 40.—
    8.
    Abl. fem. sua, with refert or interest, for gen. of the pers. pron.: neminem esse qui quomodo se habeat nihil sua censeat interesse, Cic. Fin. 5, 10, 30:

    si scit sua nihil interesse utrum anima per os, an per jugulum exeat,

    Sen. Ep. 76, 33; v. intersum, III.—
    9.
    Strengthened by the suffix - pte or -met.
    (α).
    By - pte (not used with ipse) affixed to the forms sua, suo, and (ante-class.) suum:

    quom illa osculata esset suumpte amicum,

    Plaut. Mil. 2, 4, 38:

    ut terrena suopte nutu et suo pondere in terram ferantur,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 17, 40:

    ferri suopte pondere,

    id. N. D. 1, 25, 69:

    suapte natura,

    id. Fat. 18, 42:

    suapte vi et natura,

    id. ib. 19, 43; id. Fin. 1, 16, 54; 5, 22, 61:

    suopte ingenio,

    Liv. 25, 18; so id. 1, 25, 1; 1, 18, 4:

    suapte manu,

    Cic. Or. 3, 3, 10:

    locus suapte natura infestus,

    Liv. 44, 6, 9; so,

    suapte natura,

    id. 4, 22, 4:

    flumina suapte natura vasta,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 27, 8; so id. Ben. 4, 17, 2:

    sponte suapte,

    Varr. L. L. 6, 7, § 70.—
    (β).
    With - met, almost always followed by ipse (in all forms of suus except suus, suum, suae, and suorum):

    suomet ipsi more,

    Sall. J. 31, 6:

    suomet ipsi instrumento,

    Liv. 22, 14, 13:

    suomet ipsi metu,

    Tac. H. 3, 16 fin.:

    suamet ipsum pecunia,

    Sall. J. 8, 2:

    suamet ipsae fraude,

    Liv. 8, 18, 9:

    intra suamet ipsum moenia,

    id. 6, 36, 4:

    suismet ipsi praesidiis,

    id. 8, 25, 6:

    suismet ipsis corporibus,

    id. 2, 19, 5:

    suosmet ipsi cives,

    id. 2, 9, 5:

    suasmet ipse spes,

    Tac. A. 3, 66 fin. —Without ipse:

    populum suimet sanguinis mercede,

    Sall. H. Fragm. 1, 41, 25 Dietsch:

    magna pars suismet aut proxumorum telis obtruncabantur,

    id. ib. 2, 52 ib.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > sua

  • 9 suum

    sŭus, a, um (old form sos, sa, sum; dat. plur. sis, Enn. ap. Fest. p. 301 Mull.; acc. sas. id. ib. p. 325 ib.; cf. Paul. ex Fest. p. 47; Schol. Pers. 1, 108; sing. sam for suam, Fest. p. 47 Mull.;

    so for suo, C. I. L. 5, 2007. In ante-class. verse su- with the following vowel freq. forms one syllable,

    Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 48; id. Ps. 1, 3, 5; Ter. And. 1, 1, 68; Lucr. 1, 1022; v. Neue, Formenl. 2, 189 sqq.), pron. poss., 3 d pers. [root SVA-; Sanscr. sva, own; cf. sui; Gr. seWo-, whence sphe, etc., and he; cf. heos], of or belonging to himself, herself, etc.; his own, her own, etc.; his, her, its, their; one ' s; hers, theirs.
    I.
    Ordinary possessive use his, etc. (cf. the similar use of the pers. pron. sui, q. v.).
    A.
    With antecedent in the same sentence.
    1.
    The antecedent a subject-nominative, expressed or understood.
    (α).
    His:

    Caesar copias suas divisit,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 97:

    ille in sua sententia perseverat,

    id. ib. 1, 72:

    tantam habebat suarum rerum fiduciam,

    id. ib. 2, 37:

    cum sceleris sui socios Romae reliquisset,

    Cic. Cat. 3, 1, 3:

    cur ego non ignoscam si anteposuit suam salutem meae?

    id. Pis. 32, 79; id. Phil. 2, 18, 45; id. Mil. 10, 27; id. Fam. 15, 14, 1:

    Hanno praefecturam ejus (i.e. Muttinis) filio suo (Hannonis) dedit,

    Liv. 26, 40, 7:

    imperat princeps civibus suis,

    Sen. Clem. 1, 16, 2:

    nemo rem suam emit,

    id. Ben. 7, 4, 8.—
    (β).
    Her:

    mea Glycerium suos parentes repperit,

    Ter. And. 5, 6, 5:

    utinam haec ignoraret suum patrem,

    id. Phorm. 5, 6, 34:

    si nunc facere volt era officium suom,

    Plaut. Cas. 2, 8, 72:

    ne eadem mulier cum suo conjuge honestissimum adulescentem oppressisse videatur,

    Cic. Cael. 32, 78:

    si omnibus suis copiis excellentem virum res publica armasset,

    id. Phil. 13, 16, 32.—
    (γ).
    Its:

    omne animal, simul et ortum est, et se ipsum et omnes partes suas diligit,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 11, 33:

    cum mea domus ardore suo deflagrationem Italiae toti minaretur,

    id. Planc. 40, 95.—
    (δ).
    Their: (legiones) si consulem suum reliquerunt, vituperandae sunt Cic. Phil. 5, 2, 4:

    mittent aliquem de suo numero,

    id. ib. 11, 10, 25:

    rationem illi sententiae suae non fere reddebant,

    id. Tusc. 1, 17, 38:

    qui agellos suos redimere a piratis solebant,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 37, § 85:

    edicunt ut ad suum vestitum senatores redirent,

    id. Sest. 14, 32:

    suis finibus eos prohibent,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 1: Allobrogibus sese persuasuros existimabant ut per suos (Allobrogum) fines eos (Helvetios) ire paterentur, id. id. 1, 6;

    and distributively: ac naves onerariae LXIII. in portu expugnatae, quaedam cum suis oneribus, frumento, armis, aere, etc.,

    some with their several cargoes, Liv. 26, 47, 9.—
    2.
    With a subject-clause as antecedent:

    id sua sponte apparebat tuta celeribus consiliis praepositurum,

    was selfevident, Liv. 22, 38, 13:

    ad id quod sua sponte satis collectum animorum erat, indignitate etiam Romani accendebantur,

    id. 3, 62, 1:

    secutum tamen sua sponte est ut vilior ob ea regi Hannibal et suspectior fieret,

    id. 35, 14, 4. —
    3.
    With subject-acc. as antecedent:

    hanc dicam Athenis advenisse cum aliquo amatore suo, Plant. Mil. 2, 2, 86: doceo gratissimum esse in sua tribu Plancium,

    Cic. Planc. 19, 47:

    cupio eum suae causae confidere,

    id. Sest. 64, 135:

    suspicari debuit (Milo), eum (Clodium) ad villam suam (Clodii) deversurum,

    id. Mil. 19, 51: Medeam praedicant in fuga fratris sui membra dissipavisse, id. Imp. Pomp. 9, 22:

    (dixit) Caesarem pro sua dignitate debere et studium et iracundiam suam reipublicae dimittere,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 8.—
    4.
    With object-acc. as antecedent.
    (α).
    Suus being an adjunct of the subject (generally rendered in Engl. by a pass. constr.):

    hunc pater suus de templo deduxit,

    he was taken from the temple by his father, Cic. Inv. 2, 17, 52:

    hunc sui cives e civitate ejecerunt,

    id. Sest. 68, 142:

    Alexandrum uxor sua... occidit,

    id. Inv. 2, 49, 144:

    illum ulciscentur mores sui,

    id. Att. 9, 12, 2:

    quodsi quem natura sua... forte deficiet,

    id. Or. 1, 14:

    utrumque regem sua multitudo consalutaverat,

    Liv. 1, 7, 1:

    quas (urbes) sua virtus ac dii juvent, magnas sibi opes facere,

    id. 1, 9, 3; 1, 7, 15; 6, 33, 5:

    quos nec sua conscientia impulerit, nec, etc.,

    id. 26, 33, 3; 25, 14, 7:

    consulem C. Marium servus suus interemit,

    Val. Max. 6, 8, 2:

    quis non Vedium Pollionem pejus oderat quam servi sui?

    Sen. Clem. 1, 18, 2:

    sera dies sit qua illum gens sua caelo adserat,

    id. Cons. Poll. 12 (31), 5.—With the antecedent understood from the principal sentence:

    ita forma simili pueri ut mater sua internoscere (sc. eos) non posset,

    Plaut. Men. prol. 19; and with suus as adjunct both of the subject and of the antecedent: jubet salvere suos vir uxorem suam, id. merc. 4, 3, 11. —
    (β).
    With impers. verbs:

    sunt homines, quos libidinis infamiaeque suae neque pudeat neque taedeat,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 12, 35:

    video fore ut inimicos tuos poeniteat intemperantiae suae,

    id. Fam. 3, 10, 1:

    si Caesarem beneficii sui poeniteret,

    id. Lig. 10, 29; so id. Agr. 2, 11, 26:

    jam ne nobilitatis quidem suae plebejos poenitere,

    Liv. 10, 7, 8:

    militem jam minus virtutis poenitere suae,

    id. 22, 12, 10.—
    (γ).
    As adjunct of other members of the sentence:

    ad parentes suos ducas Silenium,

    Plaut. Cist. 2, 3, 86. nam is illius filiam conicit in navem clam matrem suam (i.e. filiae), id. Mil. 2, 1, 34:

    eosdem ad quaestoris sui aut imperatoris, aut commilitonum suorum pericula impulistis,

    Cic. Phil. 13, 17, 34:

    totum enim ex sua patria sustulisti,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 49, § 127; id. Or. 3, 32, 126: quem (Hammonium) tibi etiam suo nomine ( on his own account) commendo... itaque peto a te ut ejus procuratorem et ipsum suo nomine diligas, id. Fam. 13, 21, 2:

    Caesar Fabium in sua remittit hiberna,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 33; id. B. C. 3, 24:

    introire ad Ciceronem, et domi suae imparatum confodere,

    Sall. C. 28, 1:

    suis flammis delete Fidenas,

    i. e. the flames kindled by the Fidenates, Liv. 4, 33, 5:

    suo igni involvit hostes,

    Tac. A. 14, 30:

    quid Caesarem in sua fata inmisit?

    Sen. Ep. 94, 65; id. Q. N. 1, praef. 7; cf.

    with antecedent supplied from preceding sentence: non destiti rogare et petere (sc. Brutum) mea causa, suadere et hortari sua,

    Cic. Att. 6, 2, 7.—
    5.
    With dat. as antecedent.
    (α).
    As adjunct of subject (cf. 4. supra):

    suus rex reginae placet,

    a queen likes her own king, Plaut. Stich. 1, 2, 76:

    ei nunc alia ducenda'st domum, sua cognata Lemniensis,

    id. Cist. 1, 1, 101:

    Autronio nonne sodales, non collegae sui... defuerunt?

    Cic. Sull. 2, 7:

    si ceteris facta sua recte prosunt,

    id. Cat. 3, 12, 27:

    cui non magistri sui atque doctores, cui non... locus ipse... in mente versetur?

    id. Planc. 33, 81:

    haec omnia plane... Siculis erepta sunt: primum suae leges, etc.,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 13, § 33:

    Romanis multitudo sua auxit animum,

    Liv. 21, 50, 4:

    sicuti populo Romano sua fortuna labet,

    id. 42, 50, 7:

    Lanuvinis sacra sua reddita,

    id. 8, 14, 2:

    vilitas sua illis detrahit pretium,

    Sen. Ben. 4, 29, 2:

    nemo est cui felicitas sua satisfaciat,

    id. Ep. 115, 17:

    labor illi suus restitutus est,

    id. Brev. Vit. 20, 3:

    magnitudo sua singulis constat,

    id. Q. N. 1, 1, 10:

    tantum sapienti sua, quantum Dec omnis aetas patet,

    id. Ep. 53, 11. —

    With antecedent supplied from principal sentence: mater quod suasit sua Adulescens mulier fecit, i.e. ei,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 38.—
    (β).
    Of other words:

    regique Thebano regnum stabilivit suum,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 40:

    mittam hodie huic suo die natali malam rem magnam,

    id. Ps. 1, 3, 5:

    ego Metello non irascor, neque ei suam vacationem eripio,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 68, § 164:

    desinant insidiari domui suae consuli,

    id. Cat. 1, 13, 32:

    quibus ea res honori fuerit a suis civibus,

    id. Mil. 35, 96: Scipio suas res Syracusanis restituit, Liv. [p. 1824] 29, 1, 17:

    nos non suas (leges Lacedaemoniis arbitror) ademisse, sed nostras leges dedisse,

    id. 39, 37, 6:

    Graccho et Tuditano provinciae Lucani et Galliae cum suis exercitibus prorogatae,

    id. 25, 3, 5.—
    6.
    With gen., abl., or object of a prep. as antecedent:

    nec illius animi aciem praestringit splendor sui nominis,

    Cic. Rab. Post. 16, 43:

    nolite a sacris patriis Junonis Sospitae domesticum et suum consulem avellere,

    id. Mur. 41, 90:

    quamvis tu magna mihi scripseris de Bruti adventu ad suas legiones,

    id. Att. 14, 13, 12:

    suae legis ad scriptum ipsam quoque sententiam adjungere,

    the meaning of their law to which they refer, id. Inv. 2, 49, 147:

    cum ambitio alterius suam primum apud eos majestatem solvisset,

    Liv. 22, 42, 12:

    nunc causam instituendorum ludorum ab origine sua repetam,

    Val. Max. 2, 4, 4:

    Jubam in regno suo non locorum notitia adjuvet, non popularium pro rege suo virtus,

    Sen. Ep. 71, 10; id. Ben. 7, 6, 3; id. Clem. 1, 3, 4.—Esp. with cujusque as antecedent:

    in qua deliberatione ad suam cujusque naturam consilium est omne revocandum,

    Cic. Off. 1, 33, 119 (v. II. D. 2. infra).— Abl.:

    operam dare ut sua lex ipso scripto videatur niti,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 49, 147 (cf. supra):

    (Caesar reperiebat) ad Galbam propter justitiam prudentiamque suam totius belli summam deferri,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 4:

    credere, ad suum concilium a Jove deos advocari,

    Sen. Q. N. 2, 42, 1.—
    7.
    With predic. nom. as antecedent:

    sapientissimi artis suae professores sunt a quibus et propria studia verecunde et aliena callide administrantur,

    Val. Max. 8, 12, 1.—
    8.
    With appositive noun.
    (α).
    With gram. subject as antecedent:

    hoc Anaximandro, populari ac sodali suo, non persuasit,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 37, 118:

    vidit fortissimum virum, inimicissimum suum,

    id. Mil. 9, 25:

    (hic) fuit in Creta contubernalis Saturnini, propinqui sui,

    id. Planc. 11, 27:

    ut non per L. Crassum, adfinem suum... causam illam defenderit,

    id. Balb. 21, 49:

    ne cum hoc T. Broccho, avunculo, ne cum ejus filio, consobrino suo, ne nobiscum vivat,

    id. Lig. 4, 11:

    Caesar mittit ad eum A. Clodium, suum atque illius familiarem,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 57.—
    (β).
    With object as antecedent:

    Dicaearchum cum Aristoxeno, aequali et condiscipulo suo, omittamus,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 18, 41:

    tres fratres optimos, non solum sibi ipsos, neque nobis, necessariis suis, sed etiam rei publicae condonavit,

    id. Lig. 12, 36:

    Varroni, quem, sui generis hominem,... vulgus extrahere ad consulatum nitebatur,

    Liv. 22, 34, 2.—
    (γ).
    With appositive noun as antecedent:

    si P. Scipionem, clarissimum virum, majorumque suorum simillimum res publica tenere potuisset,

    Cic. Phil. 13, 14, 29:

    M. Fabi Ambusti, potentis viri cum inter sui corporis homines, tum ad plebem, etc.,

    Liv. 6, 34, 5:

    C. vero Fabricii, et Q. Aemilii Papi, principum saeculi sui, domibus argentum fuisse confitear oportet,

    Val. Max. 4, 4, 3.—
    9.
    In participial clauses.
    (α).
    The antecedent being the logical subject of the participle, and other than the principal subject:

    credamus igitur Panaetio, a Platone suo dissentienti ( = qui dissentiebat),

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 32, 79:

    ea Sex. Roscium, expulsum ex suis bonis, recepit domum,

    id. Rosc. Am. 10, 27:

    diffidentemque rebus suis confirmavit,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23:

    Dejotarum ad me venientem cum omnibus copiis suis, certiorem feci, etc.,

    id. Fam. 15, 4, 7; id. Cat. 4, 9, 18: si hominis et suis et populi Romani ornamentis amplissimi ( being greatly distinguished) causam repudiassem, id. Mur. 4, 8:

    stupentes tribunos et suam jam vicem magis anxios quam, etc., liberavit consensus populi Romani,

    Liv. 8, 35, 1; 22, 42, 8:

    manet in folio scripta querela suo ( = quam scripsit),

    Ov. F. 5, 224; cf. in abl. absol.:

    et ipsis (hostibus) regressis in castra sua,

    Liv. 22, 60, 9:

    quibus (speculis) si unum ostenderis hominem, populus adparet, unaquaque parte faciem exprimente sua,

    Sen. Q. N. 1, 5, 5.—
    (β).
    The logical subject of the participle, being also the principal subject:

    sic a suis legionibus condemnatus irrupit in Galliam,

    Cic. Phil. 10, 10, 21:

    hunc agrum patres nostri, acceptum a majoribus suis ( = quem acceperant), perdiderunt,

    id. Agr. 2, 31, 84:

    ut in suis ordinibus dispositi dispersos adorirentur,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 92: Appius, odium in se aliorum suo in eos metiens odio, haud ignaro, inquit, imminet fortuna, Liv. 3, 54, 3:

    ipsa capit Condita in pharetra ( = quae condiderat) tela minora sua,

    Ov. F. 2, 326; cf. in abl. absol.:

    Sopater, expositis suis difficultatibus ( = cum exposuisset, etc.): Timarchidem... perducit,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 28, § 69:

    Caesar, primum suo deinde omnium ex conspectu remotis equis, etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 25:

    Campani, audita sua pariter sociorumque clade, legatos ad Hannibalem miserunt,

    Liv. 25, 15, 1:

    (Appius) deposito suo magistratu... domum est reductus,

    id. 4, 24, 7; 3, 35, 9; 9, 10, 13; 9, 41, 9.—
    (γ).
    The antecedent being the principal subject, not the logical subject of the participle:

    M. Papirius dicitur Gallo, barbam suam (i.e. Papirii) permulcenti,... iram movisse,

    Liv. 5, 41, 9: cum Gracchus, verecundia deserendi socios, implorantis fidem suam populique Romani, substitisset. id. 23, 36, 8; cf. in abl. absol.:

    si sine maximo dedecore, tam impeditis suis rebus, potuisset emori,

    Cic. Rab. Post. 10, 29; id. Mil. 14, 38; id. Planc. 21, 51; id. Clu. 14, 42:

    ita (consul) proelio uno accidit Vestinorum res, haudquaquam tamen incruento milite suo (consulis),

    Liv. 8, 29, 12; cf.

    with antecedent to be supplied: Campani, cum, robore juventutis suae acciso, nulla (sc. eis) propinqua spes esset, etc.,

    id. 7, 29, 7.—
    10.
    In gerund. construction. ( a) With subject as antecedent:

    mihi ipsa Roma ad complectendum conservatorem suum progredi visa est,

    Cic. Pis. 22, 52.—
    (β).
    With object, the logical subjects of the gerund as antecedent:

    cur iis persequendi juris sui... adimis potestatem?

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 6, 21:

    si senatui doloris sui de me declarandi potestas esset erepta,

    id. Sest. 23, 51:

    nec tribunis plebis (spatium datur) sui periculi deprecandi,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 5.—
    (γ).
    With antecedent dependent on the gerund:

    eamque rem illi putant a suum cuique tribuendo appellatam,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 19.—
    11.
    As adjunct of a noun dependent on a subjectinf., with its logical subject as antecedent:

    magnum Miloni fuit, conficere illam pestem nulla sua invidia?

    Cic. Mil. 15, 40:

    neque enim fuit Gabinii, remittere tantum de suo nec regis, imponere tantum plus suis,

    his claim, id. Rab. Post. 11, 31:

    Piso, cui fructum pietatis suae neque ex me neque a populo Romano ferre licuit,

    id. Sest. 31, 68:

    ei cujus magis intersit, vel sua, vel rei publicae causa vivere,

    id. Off. 3, 23, 90:

    sapientis est consilium explicare suum de maximis rebus,

    id. Or. 2, 81, 333; id. Mil. 15, 41.—With logical subject understood:

    totam Italiam suis colonis ut complere (sc. eis) liceat, permittitur,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 13, 34:

    maximum (sc. eis) solacium erit, propinquorum eodem monumento declarari, et virtutem suorum, et populi Romani pietatem,

    id. Phil. 14, 13, 35.
    B.
    Without gram. antec., one ' s, one ' s own.
    1.
    Dependent on subject-inff.:

    ejusdem animi est, posteris suis amplitudinem nobis quam non acceperit tradere, et memoriam prope intermortuam generis sui, virtute renovare,

    Cic. Mur. 7, 16:

    siquidem atrocius est, patriae parentem quam suum occidere,

    id. Phil. 2, 13, 31:

    miliens perire est melius quam in sua civitate sine armorum praesidio non posse vivere,

    id. ib. 2, 44, 112: quanto est honestius, alienis injuriis quam suis commoveri, one ' s own, id. Verr. 2, 3, 72, § 169:

    contentum suis rebus esse maximae sunt certissimaeque divitiae,

    id. Par. 6, 51:

    ut non liceat sui commodi causa nocere alteri,

    id. Off. 3, 5, 23:

    detrahere de altero sui commodi causa,

    id. ib. 3, 5, 24:

    suis exemplis melius est uti,

    Auct. Her. 4, 1, 2:

    levius est sua decreta tollere quam aliorum,

    Liv. 3, 21. 5; 39, 5, 2;

    29, 37, 11: satius est vitae suae rationes quam frumenti publici nosse,

    Sen. Brev. Vit. 18, 3:

    quanto satius est sua mala exstinguere quam aliena posteris tradere?

    id. Q. N. 3, praef. 5:

    cum initia beneficiorum suorum spectare, tum etiam exitus decet,

    id. Ben. 2, 14, 2; 3, 1, 5:

    Romani nominis gloriae, non suae, composuisse illa decuit,

    Plin. 1, prooem. § 16.—With 1 st pers. plur., as indef. antecedent: cum possimus ab Ennio sumere... exemplum, videtur esse arrogantia illa relinquere, et ad sua devenire, to one ' s own = to our own, Auct. Her. 4, 1, 2.—
    2.
    Without a subject-inf.:

    omnia torquenda sunt ad commodum suae causae... sua diligenter narrando,

    Cic. Inv. 1, 21, 30: ut in ceteris habenda ratio non sua (al. sui) solum, sed etiam aliorum, id. Off. 1, 39, 139:

    erat Dareo mite ac tractabile ingenium, nisi suam naturam plerumque fortuna corrumperet (suam not referring to Dareo),

    Curt. 3, 2, 17 MSS. (Foss, mansuetam). — With 1 st pers. plur., as indef. antecedent (cf. 1. supra):

    non erit ista amicitia sed mercatura quaedam utilitatum suarum,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 44, 122; cf.: pro suo possidere, II. A. 2. a. g; and Cic. Off. 2, 21, 73, II. A. 2. b. a; cf. also II. B. 1. a; II. B. 5. c.; II. B. 7. b.; II. C. 8. b. b infra.
    C.
    With antec. in a previous sentence. Here ejus, eorum, earum are used for his, her, their, unless the clause is oblique in regard to the antecedent, i. e. the antecedent is conceived as the author of the statement.
    1.
    In clauses dependent on a verbum sentiendi or dicendi, expressed or understood, referring to the grammatical or logical subject of the verb.
    a.
    In infinitive clauses:

    (Clodius) Caesaris potentiam suam potentiam esse dicebat,

    Cic. Mil. 32, 88:

    (Caelius) a sua (causa) putat ejus (i.e. Ascitii) esse sejunctam,

    id. Cael. 10, 24:

    ipsos certo scio non negare ad haec bona Chrysogonum accessisse impulsu suo (referring to ipsos),

    id. Rosc. Am. 37, 107:

    hostes viderunt,... suorum tormentorum usum spatio propinquitatis interire,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 16:

    docent, sui judicii rem non esse,

    id. ib. 1, 13.—The reference of suus may be ambiguous, esp. if an infinitive is dependent on another:

    hoc Verrem dicere ajebant, te... opera sua consulem factum, i.e. Verris, though grammatically it might refer to the subj. of aiebant,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 10, 29:

    (Ariovistus) dixit neminem secum sine sua pernicie contendisse,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 36; cf. the context with, in all, eleven reflexive pronouns referring to four different antecedents (populus Romanus, Ariovistus, Caesar, nemo); cf.

    also: occurrebat ei, mancam praeturam suam futuram consule Milone,

    Cic. Mil. 9, 25; 32, 88; Liv. 3, 42, 2.—
    b.
    Suus in a clause dependent on inf.:

    scio equidem, ut, qui argentum afferret atque expressam imaginem suam (i.e. militis) huc ad nos, cum eo ajebat velle mitti mulierem,

    Plaut. Ps. 2, 2, 55:

    isti bonorum emptores arbitrantur, vos hic sedere qui excipiatis eos qui de suis (i.e. emptorum) manibus effugerint,

    Cic. Rosc. Am. 52, 151:

    Siculi venisse tempus ajebant ut commoda sua defenderem,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 1, 3:

    ut tunc tandem sentiret recuperanda esse quae prius sua culpa amissa forent,

    Liv. 44, 8, 4. —

    Ambiguous: velle Pompejum se Caesari purgatum, ne ea quae reipublicae causa egerit (Pompejus) in suam (i.e. Caesaris) contumeliam vertat (where suam might be referred to Pompejus),

    Caes. B. C. 1, 8.—
    c.
    In oblique clauses introduced by ut or ne, or clauses subordinate to such:

    Cassius constituit ut ludi absente te fierent suo nomine,

    Cic. Att. 15, 11, 2:

    postulat ut ad hanc suam praedam tam nefariam adjutores vos profiteamini,

    id. Rosc. Am. 2, 6:

    Nasidius eos magnopere hortatur ut rursus cum Bruti classe, additis suis (i.e. Nasidii) auxiliis confligant,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 3:

    (regem) denuntiasse sibi ut triduo regni sui decederent finibus,

    Liv. 42, 25, 12:

    Sabinae mulieres, hinc patres, hinc viros orantes, ne parricidio macularent partus suos (i.e. mulierum),

    id. 1, 13, 2:

    Patron praecepit suis ut arma induerent, ad omne imperium suum parati,

    Curt. 5, 11, 1.—With reflex. pron., referring to a different antecedent:

    ad hanc (Laidem) Demosthenes clanculum adit, et ut sibi copiam sui faceret, petit,

    Gell. 1, 8, 5. —
    d.
    In subordinate clauses introduced by quin or quod:

    (Dejotarus) non recusat quin id suum facinus judices,

    Cic. Deiot. 15, 43; so id. ib. 4, 15;

    16, 45: parietes hujus curiae tibi gratias agere gestiunt, quod futura sit illa auctoritas in his majorum suorum et suis sedibus,

    id. Marcell. 3, 10:

    quidni gauderet quod iram suam nemo sentiret?

    Sen. Troad. 3, 13:

    querenti quod uxor sua e fico se suspendisset,

    Quint. 6, 3, 88;

    and with intentional ambiguity: cum Proculejus quereretur de filio quod is mortem suam expectaret,

    id. 9, 3, 68. —
    e.
    In interrogative clauses:

    si, quod officii sui sit, non occurrit animo, nihil umquam omnino aget,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 8, 25:

    ut non auderet iterum dicere quot milia fundus suus abesset ab urbe,

    id. Caecin. 10, [p. 1825] 28:

    donec sciat unisquisque quid sui, quid alieni sit,

    Liv. 6, 27, 8:

    rex ignarus, quae cum Hannibale legatis suis convenisset, quaeque legati ejus ad se allaturi fuissent,

    id. 23, 39, 2:

    postquam animadvertit quantus agminis sui terror esset,

    id. 43, 19, 5. —
    2.
    In a virtually oblique clause.
    a.
    In final clause, introduced by ut, ne, or rel., referring to the subject of the purpose:

    me a portu praemisit domum, ut haec nuntiem uxori suae,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 41:

    quasi Appius ille Caecus viam muniverit, non qua populus uteretur, sed ubi impune sui posteri latrocinarentur, i. e. Appii,

    Cic. Mil. 7, 17:

    quae gens ad Caesarem legatos mise. rat, ut suis omnibus facultatibus uteretur,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 80:

    inde castra movent, ne qua vis sociis suis ab Romano exercitu inferri possit,

    Liv. 43, 23, 5:

    (Romani) Albam a fundamentis proruerunt, ne memoria originum suarum exstaret,

    id. 26, 13, 16:

    oppidani nuntios Romam, qui certiorem de suo casu senatum facerent, misere,

    id. 6, 33, 7; cf.:

    tanto intervallo ab hostibus consedit, ut nec adventus suus propinquitate nimia nosci posset, et, etc.,

    Liv. 10, 20, 7:

    Datames locum delegit talem ut non multum obesse multitudo hostium suae paucitati posset,

    Nep. Dat. 7, 3:

    quid si gubernator a diis procellas petat ut gratior ars sua periculo fiat?

    Sen. Ben. 6, 25, 4. —
    b.
    In other dependent clauses represented as conceived by an antecedent in the principal sentence:

    Sulla, si sibi suus pudor ac dignitas non prodesset, nullum auxilium requisivit ( = negavit se defendi velle, si, etc.),

    Cic. Sull. 5, 15:

    Paetus omnes libros quos frater suus reliquisset mihi donavit ( = dixit se donare libros quos, etc.),

    id. Att. 2, 1, 12:

    non enim a te emit, sed, priusquam tu suum sibi venderes, ipse possedit ( = potitus est, ne, etc.),

    id. Phil. 2, 37, 96:

    Africanus, si sua res ageretur, testimonium non diceret,

    id. Rosc. Am. 36, 3:

    ille ipse (Pompejus) proposuit epistulam illam, in qua est Pro tuis rebus gestis amplissimis. Amplioribusne quam suis, quam Africani?

    id. Att. 8, 9, 2:

    spiritus dabat (Manlio) quod... vinculorum suorum invidiam dictator fugisset,

    Liv. 6, 18, 4:

    (Numa) Camenis eum lucum sacravit, quod earum ibi concilia cum conjuge sua Egeria essent,

    id. 1, 21, 3:

    adulescens deos omnis invocare ad gratiam illi pro se referendam, quoniam sibi nequaquam satis facultatis pro suo animo atque illius erga se esset,

    id. 26, 50, 4 (cf. D. 1. a. infra).
    D.
    In the place of ejus.
    1.
    In clauses virtually oblique, but with indicative, being conceived by the antecedent (hence suus, not ejus), but asserted as fact by the author (hence indicative, not subjunctive):

    Cicero tibi mandat ut Aristodemo idem respondeas, quod de fratre suo (Ciceronis) respondisti,

    Cic. Att. 2, 7, 4:

    oriundi ab Sabinis, ne, quia post Tatii mortem ab sua parte non erat regnatum, imperium amitterent, sui corporis creari regem volebant,

    Liv. 1, 17, 2:

    C. Caesar villam pulcherrimam, quia mater sua aliquando in illa custodita erat, diruit,

    Sen. Ira, 3, 21, 5:

    Philemonem, a manu servum, qui necem suam per venenum inimicis promiserat, non gravius quam simplici morte punivit,

    Suet. Caes. 74; cf.:

    quomodo excandescunt si quid e juba sua decisum est,

    Sen. Brev. Vit. 12, 3.—
    2.
    To avoid ambiguity:

    petunt rationes illius (Catilinae) ut orbetur consilio res publica, ut minuatur contra suum (i.e. Catilinae) furorem imperatorum copia (instead of ejus, which might be referred to res publica),

    Cic. Mur. 39, 83:

    equites a cornibus positos, cum jam pelleretur media peditum suorum acies, incurrisse ab lateribus ferunt,

    Liv. 1, 37, 3.—
    3.
    Colloquially and in epistolary style suus is used emphatically instead of ejus, with the meaning own, peculiar: deinde ille actutum subferret suus servus poenas Sosia, his own slave (opp. Mercury, who personates Sosias), Plaut. Am. 3, 4, 19: mira erant in civitatibus ipsorum furta Graecorum quae magistratus sui fecerant, their own magistrates ( = ipsorum), Cic. Att. 6, 2, 5:

    in quibus (litteris Bruti) unum alienum summa sua prudentia (est), ut spectem ludos suos,

    his peculiar prudence, id. ib. 15, 26, 1; so,

    quod quidem ille (Nero) decernebat, quorumdam dolo ad omina sui exitus vertebatur,

    Tac. A. 16, 24; cf. II. A. 1. b and g; II. A. 2. a. b; II. B. 3.—
    4.
    Without particular emphasis (mostly ante- and post-class. and poet.):

    tum erit tempestiva cum semen suum maturum erit,

    Cato, R. R. 31:

    vitis si macra erit, sarmenta sua concidito minute,

    id. ib. 37:

    qui sic purgatus erit, diuturna valetudine utatur, neque ullus morbus veniet, nisi sua culpa,

    id. ib. 157:

    Cimon in eandem invidiam incidit quam pater suus,

    Nep. Cim. 3, 1:

    id qua ratione consecutus sit (Lysander) latet. Non enim virtute sui exercitus factum est, etc.,

    id. Lys. 1, 2:

    ipse sub Esquiliis, ubi erat regia sua, Concidit,

    Ov. F. 6, 601:

    quodque suus conjux riguo collegerat horto, Truncat olus foliis,

    id. M. 8, 646; so id. ib. 15, 819.
    II.
    In partic.
    A.
    As substt.
    1.
    sui, suorum, m., his, their (etc.) friends, soldiers, fellow-beings, equals, adherents, followers, partisans, posterity, slaves, family, etc., of persons in any near connection with the antecedent.
    (α).
    (Corresp. to the regular usage, I. A. B. C.) Cupio abducere ut reddam (i.e. eam) suis, to her family, friends, Ter. Eun. 1, 2, 77; cf. id. ib. 1, 2, 66:

    cum animus societatem caritatis coierit cum suis, omnesque natura conjunctos suos duxerit,

    fellow-beings, Cic. Leg. 1, 23, 60:

    mulier ingeniosa praecepit suis omnia Caelio pollicerentur,

    her slaves, id. Cael. 25, 62:

    quo facilius et nostras domos obire, et ipse a suis coli possit,

    his friends, id. ib. 7, 18:

    qua gratiam beneficii vestri cum suorum laude conjungant,

    their family, id. Agr. 2, 1, 1:

    vellem hanc contemptionem pecuniae suis reliquisset,

    to his posterity, id. Phil. 3, 6, 16:

    cum divisurum se urbem palam suis polliceretur,

    his partisans, id. ib. 13, 9, 19:

    Caesar, cohortatus suos, proelium commisit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 25; so,

    Curio exercitum reduxit, suis omnibus praeter Fabium incolumibus,

    id. B. C. 2, 35:

    Caesar receptui suorum timens,

    id. ib. 3, 46:

    certior ab suis factus est, praeclusas esse portas,

    id. ib. 2, 20:

    omnium suorum consensu, Curio bellum ducere parabat,

    id. ib. 2, 37: so,

    Pompejus suorum omnium hortatu statuerat proelio decertare,

    id. ib. 3, 86:

    Caesar Brundisium ad suos severius scripsit,

    to his officers, id. ib. 3, 25:

    naviculam conscendit cum paucis suis,

    a few of his followers, id. ib. 3, 104:

    multum cum suis consiliandi causa secreto praeter consuetudinem loqueretur,

    id. ib. 1, 19:

    nupsit Melino, adulescenti inprimis inter suos et honesto et nobili,

    his equals, associates, Cic. Clu. 5, 11:

    rex raptim a suis in equum impositus fugit,

    his suite, Liv. 41, 4, 7:

    subsidio suorum proelium restituere,

    comrades, id. 21, 52, 10:

    feras bestias... ad opem suis ferendam avertas,

    their young, id. 26, 13, 12:

    abstulit sibi in suos potestatem,

    his slaves, Sen. Ira, 3, 12, 6:

    Besso et Nabarzani nuntiaverant sui regem... interemptum esse,

    their fellow - conspirators, Curt. 5, 12, 14. — Very rarely sing.:

    ut bona mens suis omnibus fuerit. Si quem libido abripuit, illorum eum, cum quibus conjuravit, non suum judicet esse,

    Liv. 39, 16, 5.—
    (β).
    Irregular use (acc. to I. D.): sui = ejus amici, etc. (freq.;

    the absolute use of ejus in this sense being inadmissible): quasi vero quisquam dormiat? ne sui quidem hoc velint, non modo ipse (sui = ejus amici, liberi),

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 38, 92:

    is (annus) ejus omnem spem... morte pervertit. Fuit hoc luctuosum suis, acerbum patriae, etc.,

    id. Or. 3, 2, 8:

    quadrigas, quia per suos ( = ipsius milites) agendae erant, in prima acie locaverat rex,

    Liv. 37, 41, 8:

    auctoritatem Pisistrati qui inter suos ( = ejus cives) maxima erat,

    id. 37, 12:

    quo cum multitudine adversariorum sui superarentur, ipse fuit superior, etc.,

    Nep. Hann. 8, 4; v. g.—
    (γ).
    Without antecedent (cf. I. B. supra): quoties necesse est fallere aut falli a suis, by one ' s friends, Sen. Phoen. 493.—
    (δ).
    Sing.: sŭa, suae. f., a sweetheart, mistress (rare): illam suam suas res sibi habere jussit. Cic. Phil. 2, 28. 69:

    cedo quid hic faciet sua?

    Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 92.—
    2.
    sŭum, i, n., and more freq. sŭa, suorum, n. plur., = one ' s property.
    a.
    Sing.
    (α).
    Lit.:

    nec suom adimerem alteri,

    his property, his own, Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 38 (34):

    nunc si ille salvos revenit, reddam suom sibi (v. D. 3. a. infra),

    id. ib. 1, 2, 119:

    illum studeo quam facillime ad suum pervenire,

    Cic. Fam. 13, 26, 4:

    populi Romani hanc esse consuetudinem ut socios sui nihil deperdere velit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 43; cf. Cic. Rab. Post. 11, 3, I. A. 11. supra:

    nec donare illi de suo dicimur,

    Sen. Ben. 7, 4, 2; so esp. with quisque; v. infra — Hence, de suo = per se, or sua sponte;

    (stellae) quae per igneos tractus labentia inde splendorem trahant caloremque, non de suo clara,

    Sen. Q. N. 7, 1, 6. —
    (β).
    Trop.:

    meum mihi placebat, illi suum (of a literary essay),

    Cic. Att. 14, 20, 3: suom quemque decet, his own manners, etc., Plaut. Stich. 5, 4, 11; so, expendere oportet quid quisque habeat sui ( what peculiarities) nec velle experiri quam se aliena deceant;

    id enim maxime quemque decet quod est cujusque maxime suum,

    Cic. Off. 1, 31, 113.—
    (γ).
    Jurid. term: aliquid pro suo possidere, to possess in the belief of one ' s legal right:

    pro suo possessio tale est, cum dominium nobis acquiri putamus. Et ea causa possidemus ex qua acquiritur, et praeterea pro suo,

    Dig. 41, 10, 1;

    so without an antecedent, and referring to a first person: item re donata, pro donato et pro suo possideo,

    ib. 41, 10, 1; v. the whole tit. ib. 42, 10 (Pro suo); cf. ib. 23, 3, 67; cf. C., infra fin.;

    similarly: usucapere pro suo = acquire dominion by a possession pro suo, Fragm. Vat. 111: res pro suo, quod justam causam possidendi habet, usucapit,

    id. ib. 260; Dig. 41, 3, 27. —
    b.
    Plur.
    (α).
    One ' s property:

    Roscius tibi omnia sua praeter animam tradidit,

    Cic. Rosc. Am. 50, 146:

    qui etiam hostibus externis victis sua saepissime reddiderunt,

    id. Agr. 1, 6, 19:

    tu autem vicinis tuis Massiliensibus sua reddis,

    id. Att. 14, 14, 6:

    Remi legatos miserunt qui dicerent se suaque omnia in fidem atque potestatem populi Romani permittere,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 3, 2; 1, 11, 2; 2, 13, 2:

    ipsi milites alveos informes quibus se suaque transveherent, faciebant,

    their baggage, Liv. 21, 26, 9:

    docere eos qui sua permisere fortunae,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, praef. 7; so without an antecedent, one ' s own property (cf. I. B. 2. supra):

    hanc ob causam maxime ut sua tenerentur res publicae constitutae sunt,

    Cic. Off. 2, 21, 73;

    rarely = eorum res: quod vero etiam sua reddiderint (i.e. Gallis),

    Liv. 39, 55, 3. —
    (β).
    One ' s own affairs:

    aliena ut melius videant et dijudicent Quam sua,

    Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 96:

    cognoscunt... immobile agmen et sua quemque molientem,

    Liv. 10, 20, 8:

    omnia ei hostium non secus quam sua nota erant,

    id. 22, 41, 5:

    aliena cum suis perdidit,

    Sen. Ben. 7, 16, 3.— Absol., referring to a noun fem.: sua (finxit) C. Cassius ( = suas persuasiones; cf.

    the context),

    Quint. 6, 3, 90.
    B.
    Predicative uses: suum esse, facere, fieri, putare, etc., like a gen. poss., to be, etc., the property, or under the dominion, control, power of the antecedent.
    1.
    Of property in things.
    (α).
    Corporeal:

    scripsit causam dicere Prius aurum quare sit suum,

    Ter. Eun. prol. 11:

    nihil erat cujusquam quod non hoc anno suum fore putabat (Clodius),

    Cic. Mil. 32, 87:

    quia suum cujusque fit, eorum quae natura fuerant communia quod cuique obtigit, id quisque teneat,

    id. Off. 1, 7, 21:

    Juba suam esse praedicans praedam,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 84:

    gratum sibi populum facturum, si omnes res Neapolitanorum suas duxissent,

    Liv. 22, 32, 8: libros esse dicimus Ciceronis;

    eosdem Dorus librarius suos vocat,

    Sen. Ben. 7, 6, 1:

    cum enim istarum personarum nihil suum esse possit,

    since these persons can own nothing, Gai. Inst. 2, 96; cf. Dig. 1, 7, 15 pr.—Virtually predicative:

    referas ad eos qui suam rem nullam habent ( = rem quae sua sit),

    nothing of their own, Cic. Phil. 2, 6, 15:

    qui in potestate nostra est, nihil suum habere potest,

    Gai. Inst. 2, 84. — ( b) Of literary works:

    quae convenere in Andriam ex Perinthia Fatetur transtulisse, atque usum pro suis ( = quasi sua essent),

    Ter. And. prol. 14:

    potest autem... quae tum audiet... ingenue pro suis dicere,

    his own thoughts, Quint. 12, 3, 3.—
    (γ).
    Of a country or people:

    suum facere = suae dicionis facere: commemorat ut (Caesar) magnam partem Italiae beneficio atque auctoritate eorum suam fecerit,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 32:

    in quam (Asiam) jam ex parte suam fecerit,

    Liv. 44, 24, 4:

    crudelissima ac superbissima gens sua omnia suique arbitrii facit,

    id. 21, 44, 5.—
    (δ).
    Trop.:

    omnia sua putavit quae vos vestra esse velletis,

    Cic. Phil. 11, 12, 27:

    non meminit, illum exercitum senatus populique Romani esse, non suum,

    id. ib. 13, 6, 4: [p. 1826] probavit, non rempublicam suam esse, sed se reipublicae, Sen. Clem. 1, 19, 8;

    so of incorporeal things: hi si velint scire quam brevis eorum vita sit, cogitent ex quota parte sua sit,

    how much of it is their own, id. Brev. Vit. 19, 3; so, suum facere, to appropriate:

    prudentis est, id quod in quoque optimum est, si possit, suum facere,

    Quint. 10, 2, 26:

    quaeremus quomodo animus (hanc virtutem) usu suam faciat,

    Sen. Clem. 1, 3, 1.—
    2.
    Of persons.
    (α).
    Under a master ' s or father ' s control:

    ut lege caverent, ne quis quem civitatis mutandae causa suum faceret, neve alienaret,

    make any one his slave, Liv. 41, 8, 12: quid eam tum? suamne esse ajebat, his daughter, i.e. in his power? Ter. And. 5, 4, 29:

    eduxit mater pro sua ( = quasi sua esset),

    id. Eun. 1, 2, 76.—
    (β).
    Reflexively = sui juris, independent, one ' s own master or mistress, not subject to another ' s control, under one ' s own control (v. sui juris, infra):

    ancilla, quae mea fuit hodie, sua nunc est,

    Plaut. Pers. 4, 3, 3.—
    (γ).
    Of moral power over others: suus = devoted to one:

    hice hoc munere arbitrantur Suam Thaidem esse,

    Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 38:

    eos hic fecit suos Paulo sumptu,

    id. Ad. 5, 4, 21:

    sed istunc exora, ut (mulierem) suam esse adsimulet,

    to be friendly to him, id. Heaut. 2, 3, 117:

    cum Antonio sic agens ut perspiciat, si in eo negotio nobis satisfecerit, totum me futurum suum,

    Cic. Att. 14, 1 a, 2:

    Alpheus... utebatur populo sane suo,

    devoted to him, id. Quint. 7, 29.— Poet.: vota suos habuere deos, the vows (inst. of the persons uttering them) had the gods on their side, Ov. M. 4, 373. —
    (δ).
    Of power over one's self, etc.:

    nam qui sciet ubi quidque positum sit, quaque eo veniat, is poterit eruere, semperque esse in disputando suus,

    self-possessed, Cic. Fin. 4, 4, 10:

    inaestimabile bonum est suum fieri,

    selfcontrol, Sen. Ep. 75, 18:

    (furiosus) qui suus non est,

    Dig. 42, 4, 7, § 9:

    vix sua, vix sanae virgo Niseia compos Mentis erat,

    Ov. M. 8, 35. —
    3.
    Suum est, as impers. predicate: = ejus est, characteristic of, peculiar to one (very rare):

    dixit antea, sed suum illud est, nihil ut affirmet,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 42, 99.
    C.
    Attributive usages, almost always (except in Seneca) with suus before its noun.
    1.
    The property, relations, affairs, etc., of one opposed to those of another, own.
    a.
    Opposition expressed:

    nihil de suo casu, multa de vestro querebatur,

    Cic. Balb. 8, 21:

    sua sibi propiora pericula quam mea loquebantur,

    id. Sest. 18, 40:

    suasque et imperatoris laudes canentes,

    Liv. 45, 38, 12:

    damnatione collegae et sua,

    id. 22, 35, 3:

    Senecae fratris morte pavidum et pro sua incolumitate pavidum,

    Tac. A. 14, 73:

    velut pro Vitellio conquerentes suum dolorem proferebant,

    id. H. 3, 37;

    opp. alienus: ut suo potius tempore mercatorem admitterent, quam celerius alieno,

    at a time convenient to themselves, Varr. R. R. 3, 16, 11. —Without antecedent, opp. externus:

    (Platoni) duo placet esse motus, unum suum, alterum externum, esse autem divinius quod ipsum ex se sua sponte moveatur, etc.,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 12, 32. —
    b.
    Implied:

    voluptatem suis se finibus tenere jubeamus,

    within the limits assigned to it, Cic. Fin. 3, 1, 1:

    cum vobis immortale monumentum suis paene manibus senatus... exstruxerit,

    id. Phil. 14, 12, 33:

    superiores (amnes) in Italia, hic (Rhodanus) trans Alpes, hospitales suas tantum, nec largiores quam intulere aquas vehentes,

    Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 224: colligitur aqua ex imbribus;

    ex suo fonte nativa est,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 3:

    pennas ambo non habuere suas (non suas = alienas),

    Ov. Tr. 3, 4, 24. —
    c.
    In particular phrases. ( a) Sua sponte and suo Marte, of one ' s own accord, by one ' s self, without the suggestion, influence, aid, etc., of others:

    Caesar bellum contra Antonium sua sponte suscepit,

    Cic. Phil. 8, 2, 5:

    sua sponte ad Caesarem in jus adierunt,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 87.—So of things, = per se, by or of itself, for itself, for its own sake:

    jus et omne honestum sua sponte expetendum (cf. in the context: per se igitur jus est expetendum),

    Cic. Leg. 1, 18, 48: justitium sua sponte inceptum priusquam indiceretur, by itself, i. e. without a decree, Liv. 9, 7, 8; so,

    sortes sua sponte attenuatas,

    id. 22, 1, 11 (cf. id. 22, 38, 13; 35, 14, 4, I. A. 2., supra): rex enim ipse, sua sponte, nullis commentariis Caesaris, simul atque audivit ejus interitum suo Marte res suas recuperavit, Cic. Phil. 2, 37, 95.—
    (β).
    Suus locus, in milit. lang., one ' s own ground, position, or lines:

    restitit suo loco Romana acies (opp. to the advance of the enemy),

    Liv. 22, 16, 2.—So figuratively:

    et staturas suo loco leges,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 20, 2:

    aciem instruxit primum suis locis, pauloque a castris Pompeji longius,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 84 (cf.: suo loco, 7. b. g, infra).—
    (γ).
    For suo jure v. 3. infra.—
    (δ).
    Sua Venus = one's own Venus, i. e. good luck (v. Venus): ille non est mihi par virtutibus, nec officiis;

    sed habuit suam Venerem,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 28, 2. —
    2.
    Of private relations (opp. to public):

    ut in suis rebus, ita in re publica luxuriosus nepos,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 18, 48:

    deinde ut communibus pro communibus utatur, privatis ut suis,

    id. Off. 1, 7, 20:

    quod oppidum Labienus sua pecunia exaedificaverat,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 15:

    militibus agros ex suis possessionibus pollicetur,

    i. e. his private property, id. ib. 1, 17; Sen. Ben. 7, 6, 3. —
    3.
    Of just rights or claims:

    imperatori senatuique honos suus redditus,

    due to them, Liv. 3, 10, 3:

    neque inpedimento fuit, quominus religionibus suus tenor suaque observatio redderetur,

    Val. Max. 1, 1, 8:

    quibus omnibus debetur suus decor,

    Quint. 11, 1, 41. —

    So distributively: is mensibus suis dimisit legionem,

    in the month in which each soldier was entitled to his discharge, Liv. 40, 41, 8. — Esp.: suo jure (so, meo, nostro, tuo, etc., jure), by his own right:

    Tullus Hostilius qui suo jure in porta nomen inscripsit,

    Cic. Phil. 13, 12, 26:

    earum rerum hic A. Licinius fructum a me repetere prope suo jure debet,

    id. Arch. 1, 1; id. Marcell. 2, 6; id. Phil. 2, 25, 62; id. Balb. 8, 21:

    numquam illum res publica suo jure esset ulta,

    by its unquestionable right, id. Mil. 33, 88. —
    4.
    Of that to which one is exclusively devoted:

    huic quaestioni suum diem dabimus,

    a day for its exclusive discussion, Sen. Ep. 94, 52:

    homini autem suum bonum ratio est,

    his exclusive good, id. ib. 76, 10:

    in majorem me quaestionem vocas, cui suus locus, suus dies dandus est,

    id. Q. N. 2, 46, 1. —

    With proprius: mentio inlata apud senatum est, rem suo proprio magistratu egere,

    that the business needed a particular officer exclusively for itself, Liv. 4, 8, 4:

    et Hannibalem suo proprio occupandum bello,

    id. 27, 38, 7; cf.:

    dissupasset hostes, ni suo proprio eum proelio equites Volscorum exceptum tenuissent,

    in which they alone fought, id. 3, 70, 4:

    mare habet suas venas quibus impletur,

    by which it alone is fed, Sen. Q. N. 3, 14, 3. —
    5.
    According to one ' s liking, of one ' s own choice.
    a.
    Of persons, devoted to one, friendly, dear:

    Milone occiso (Clodius) habuisset suos consules,

    after his own heart, Cic. Mil. 33, 89:

    collegit ipse se contra suum Clodium,

    his dear Clodius, id. Pis. 12, 27 (cf.: suum facere, habere, II. B. 2. g).—
    b.
    Of things, favorable.
    (α).
    Of place: neque Jugurtham nisi... suo loco pugnam facere, on his own ground, i. e. chosen by him, favorable, Sall. J. 61, 1:

    hic magna auxilia expectabant et suis locis bellum in hiemem ducere cogitabant,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 61; cf.:

    numquam nostris locis laboravimus,

    Liv. 9, 19, 15.—
    (β).
    Of time:

    cum Perseus suo maxime tempore et alieno hostibus incipere bellum posset,

    Liv. 42, 43, 3; v. 7. b, infra. —
    c.
    Of circumstances: sua occasio, a favorable opportunity; sometimes without antecedent:

    neque occasioni tuae desis, neque suam occasionem hosti des,

    Liv. 22, 39, 21:

    tantum abfuit ut ex incommodo alieno sua occasio peteretur,

    id. 4, 58, 2:

    aestuque suo Locros trajecit,

    a favorable tide, id. 23, 41, 11:

    ignoranti quem portum petat nullus suus ventus est,

    Sen. Ep. 71, 3:

    orba suis essent etiamnunc lintea ventis,

    Ov. M. 13, 195:

    aut ille Ventis iturus non suis,

    Hor. Epod. 9, 30. —
    6.
    Of persons or things, peculiar, particular:

    quae est ei (animo) natura? Propria, puto, et sua,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 29, 70:

    omnis enim motus animi suum quendam a natura habet vultum,

    id. de Or. 3, 57, 316:

    geometrae et musici... more quodam loquuntur suo. Ipsae rhetorum artes verbis in docendo quasi privatis utuntur ac suis,

    id. Fin. 3, 1, 4:

    sensus omnis habet suum finem,

    its peculiar limits, Quint. 9, 4, 61: animus cum suum ambitum complevit et finibus se suis cinxit, consummatum est summum bonum, Sen. Vit. Beat. 9, 3: est etiam in nominibus ( nouns) diverso collocatis sua gratia, their peculiar elegance, Quint. 9, 3, 86:

    ibi non bello aperto, sed suis artibus, fraude et insidiis, est paene circumventus,

    Liv. 21, 34, 1:

    nec Hannibalem fefellit, suis se artibus peti,

    id. 22, 16, 5:

    adversus hostem non virtute tantum, sed suis (i. e. hostis) etiam pugnare consiliis oportebat,

    Flor. 2, 6, 26:

    liberam Minucii temeritatem se suo modo expleturum,

    Liv. 22, 28, 2:

    equites ovantes sui moris carmine,

    id. 10, 26, 11:

    exsultans cum sui moris tripudiis,

    id. 21, 42, 3:

    tripudiantes suo more,

    id. 23, 26, 9.—So, suo Marte, referring to the style of fighting peculiar to the different arms:

    equitem suo alienoque Marte pugnare,

    that the cavalry were fighting both in their own style and in that of the other arms, Liv. 3, 62, 9; cf.: suo Marte, 1, c. a, supra.—And distributively ( = suus quisque):

    suos autem haec operum genera ut auctores, sic etiam amatores habent,

    Quint. 12, 10, 2:

    illa vero fatidica fulmina ex alto et ex suis venire sideribus,

    Plin. 2, 43, 43, § 113; cf.:

    quae quidem planiora suis exemplis reddentur,

    Val. Max. 3, 4 prooem.—
    7.
    Proper, right.
    a.
    Referring to one's ordinary or normal condition:

    quod certe non fecisset, si suum numerum naves habuissent,

    their regular complement, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 51, § 133. — So poet.:

    flecte ratem! numerum non habet illa suum,

    its full number, Ov. H. 10, 36:

    novus exercitus consulibus est decretus: binae legiones cum suo equitatu,

    Liv. 40, 36, 6:

    cum suo justo equitatu,

    id. 21, 17, 8:

    totam (disciplinam) in suum statum redegit,

    Val. Max. 2, 7, 2:

    tranquilla mente et vultu suo,

    with the ordinary expression of his face, Sen. Clem. 2, 6, 2:

    media pars aeris ab his (ignibus) submota, in frigore suo manet. Natura enim aeris gelida est,

    id. Q. N. 2, 10, 4:

    cornuaque in patriis non sua vidit aquis,

    not natural to her, Ov. H. 14, 90. —

    So, non suus, of ingrafted branches and their fruit: miraturque (arbos) novas frondis et non sua poma,

    Verg. G. 2, 82. —
    b.
    Of time, proper, regular, etc. (cf. 5. b, supra).
    (α).
    The regular time ( = stato tempore):

    signum quod semper tempore exoritur suo,

    Plaut. Rud. prol. 4:

    cum et recte et suo tempore pepererit,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 16: aestas suo tempore incanduit...;

    tam solstitium quam aequinoctium suos dies retulit,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 16, 3:

    omnes venti vicibus suis spirant majore ex parte,

    Plin. 2, 47, 48, § 128. —
    (β).
    The right or proper time:

    salictum suo tempore caedito,

    Cato, R. R. 33:

    cessit e vita suo magis quam suorum civium tempore,

    the right time for himself, Cic. Brut. 1, 4; so,

    exstingui homini suo tempore optabile est,

    id. Sen. 23, 85:

    Scandilius dicit se suo tempore rediturum,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 60, § 139:

    si Ardeates sua tempora exspectare velint,

    Liv. 4, 7, 6:

    Chrysippus dicit, illum... opperiri debere suum tempus, ad quod velut dato signo prosiliat,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 25, 3:

    quam multi exercitus tempore suo victorem hostem pepulerunt!

    Liv. 44, 39, 4. — Without antecedent: sed suo tempore totius sceleris hujus fons aperietur. Cic. Phil. 14, 6, 15; cf.:

    de ordine laudis, etc., praecipiemus suo tempore,

    Quint. 2, 4, 21. —
    (γ).
    Suo loco = at the proper place:

    quae erant prudentiae propria suo loco dicta sunt,

    Cic. Off. 1, 40, 143:

    quod reddetur suo loco,

    Quint. 11, 1, 16:

    ut suo loco dicetur,

    Plin. 2, 90, 102, § 221:

    inscripta quae suis locis reddam,

    id. 1, prooem. § 27; Sen. Ben. 2, 20, 2; cf. 1, c. b; 4. supra. —
    (δ).
    Suited, appropriate, adapted to one:

    in eodem fundo suum quidquid conseri oportet,

    Cato, R. R. 7:

    siquidem hanc vendidero pretio suo,

    at a suitable price, Plaut. Pers. 4, 4, 30:

    in partes suas digerenda causa,

    Quint. 11, 1, 6:

    confundetur quidquid in suas partes natura digessit,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 29, 8. — Poet.: haec ego dumque queror, lacrimae sua verba sequuntur, Deque meis oculis in tua membra cadunt, appropriate, i. e. tristia, Ov. H. 14, 67.—Without antecedent: suum quidquid genus talearum serito, any fit kind, i. e. suited to the ground, Cato, R. R. 48. —
    8.
    Own, with the notion of independence of, or dependence on others (cf. B. 2. g d).
    a.
    Of political independence: pacem condicionibus his fecerunt ut Capuae suae leges, sui magistratus essent, her own laws, i. e. not subject to Carthage, Liv. 23, 7, 2: liberos [p. 1827] eos ac suis legibus victuros, id. 25, 23, 4. —

    Esp. in the phrases suae potestatis or in sua potestate esse, suo jure uti, sui juris esse: Puteolos, qui nunc in sua potestate sunt, suo jure, libertate aequa utuntur, totos occupabunt,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 31, 86:

    Rhegini potestatis suae ad ultimum remanserunt,

    retained their self-government, Liv. 23, 30, 9:

    urbem ne quam formulae sui juris facerent,

    id. 38, 9, 10. —
    b.
    Of paternal authority.
    (α).
    Free from the power of the paterfamilias; in the phrases sui juris esse, suae potestatis esse, to be independent:

    quaedam personae sui juris sunt, quaedam alieno juri sunt subjectae, Gai,

    Inst. 1, 48:

    sui juris sunt familiarum suarum principes, id est pater familiae, itemque mater familiae,

    Ulp. Fragm. 4, 1:

    liberi parentum potestate liberantur emancipatione. Sed filius quidem ter manumissus sui juris fit, ceteri autem liberi una manumissione sui juris fiunt,

    id. ib. 10, 1:

    morte patris filius et filia sui juris fiunt,

    id. ib. 10, 2:

    patres familiarum sunt qui sunt suae potestatis,

    Dig. 1, 6, 4:

    si modo defunctus testator suae potestatis mortis tempore fuerit,

    Gai. Inst. 2, 147. —

    With indef. reference: si sui juris sumus,

    Dig. 46, 2, 20; cf.:

    pro suo possideo, 2. a. supra.—Attributively: sui juris arrogatio feminae,

    Cod. Just. 8, 47, 8:

    homo sui juris,

    ib. 10, § 5.— Trop.:

    sapiens numquam semiliber erit: integrae semper libertatis et sui juris,

    Sen. Brev. Vit. 5, 3:

    non illarum coitu fieri cometen, sed proprium et sui juris esse,

    id. Q. N. 7, 12, 2: nullique sunt tam feri et sui juris adfectus, ut non disciplina perdomentur, id. Ira, 2, 12, 3. —
    (β).
    Subject to paternal authority, in the phrases suus heres, sui liberi; suus heres, an heir who had been in the paternal power of the deceased:

    CVI SVVS HERES NON SIT, XII. Tab. fr. 5, 4.—In the jurists without antecedent: sui et necessarii heredes sunt velut filius filiave, nepos neptisve ex filia, deinceps ceteri qui modo in potestate morientis fuerunt,

    Gai. Inst. 2, 156:

    (emancipati liberi) non sunt sui heredes,

    ib. 2, 135:

    alia facta est juris interpretatio inter suos heredes,

    ib. 3, 15:

    datur patrono adversus suos heredes bonorum possessio (where patrono is not the antecedent of suos),

    ib. 3, 41:

    sui heredes vel instituendi sunt vel exheredandi,

    Ulp. Fragm. 22, 14:

    accrescunt suis quidem heredibus in partem virilem, extraneis autem in partem dimidiam,

    id. ib. 22, 17. —

    Sui liberi, children in paternal power: de suis et legitimis liberis,

    Cod. Just. 6, 55 inscr.
    D.
    In particular connections.
    1.
    With ipse, his own, etc. (cf. Zumpt, Gram. § 696).
    a.
    Ipse agreeing with the antecedent of suus, the antecedent being,
    (α).
    A subjectnom.:

    (ingenium ejus) valet ipsum suis viribus,

    by its own strength, Cic. Cael. 19, 45:

    legio Martia non ipsa suis decretis hostem judicavit Antonium?

    by its own resolutions, id. Phil. 4, 2, 5:

    ruit ipse suis cladibus,

    id. ib. 14, 3, 8:

    si ex scriptis cognosci ipsi suis potuissent,

    id. de Or. 2, 2, 8:

    qui se ipse sua gravitate et castimonia defenderet,

    id. Cael. 5, 11:

    quod ipse suae civitatis imperium obtenturus esset,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 3:

    suamet ipsae fraude omnes interierunt,

    Liv. 8, 18, 9; 39, 49, 3:

    ut saeviret ipse in suum sanguinem effecerunt,

    id. 40, 5, 1:

    respicerent suum ipsi exercitum,

    id. 42, 52, 10; 21, 31, 12; 22, 38, 3; 6, 19, 6.—
    (β).
    A subject-acc.:

    sunt qui dicant eam sua ipsam peremptam mercede,

    Liv. 1, 11, 9:

    (tribuniciam potestatem) suis ipsam viribus dissolvi,

    id. 2, 44, 2.—
    (γ).
    An object in dat. or acc.:

    sic ut ipsis consistendi in suis munitionibus locus non esset,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 6:

    tribuni (hostem) intra suamet ipsum moenia compulere,

    Liv. 6, 36, 4:

    alios sua ipsos invidia opportunos interemit,

    id. 1, 54, 8; 22, 14, 13.—Suus as adjunct of subject (rare):

    aliquando sua praesidia in ipsos consurrexerunt,

    their own garrisons revolted against them, Sen. Clem. 1, 26, 1.—
    b.
    With gen. of ipse, strengthening the possessive notion (cf. 4.;

    post-Aug. and very rare, but freq. in modern Lat.): aves (foetus suos) libero caelo suaeque ipsorum fiduciae permittunt,

    Quint. 2, 6, 7 (but tuus ipsius occurs in Cic.:

    tuo ipsius studio,

    Cic. Mur. 4, 9:

    tuam ipsius amicitiam,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 4, § 7).—
    c.
    Both suus and ipse agreeing with the governing noun (very rare; not in Cic. or Caes.): quae tamen in ipso cursu suo dissipata est (= ipsa in cursu suo), in its very course, Sen. Q. N. 1, 1, 3 dub.:

    suamet ipsa scelera,

    Sall. C. 23, 2 (Dietsch ex conj. ipse):

    suismet ipsis corporibus,

    Liv. 2, 19, 5 MSS. (Weissenb. ex conj. ipsi):

    a suismet ipsis praesidiis,

    id. 8, 25, 6 MSS. (Weissenb. ipsi).—
    2.
    With quisque, distributively, each ( every one)... his own; in prose quisque is generally preceded by suus.
    a.
    Quisque and suus in different cases.
    (α).
    Quisque as subjectnom.:

    sentit enim vim quisque suam quoad possit abuti,

    Lucr. 5, 1033:

    suo quisque loco cubet,

    Cato, R. R. 5:

    suum quisque noscat ingenium,

    Cic. Off. 1, 31, 114:

    ad suam quisque (me disciplinam) rapiet,

    id. Ac. 2, 36, 114:

    quod suos quisque servos in tali re facere voluisset,

    id. Mil. 10, 29:

    cum suo quisque auxilio uteretur,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 51:

    celeriter ad suos quisque ordines redit,

    id. ib. 3, 37.—In apposition with plur. subj. (freq. in Liv.):

    nunc alii sensus quo pacto quisque suam rem Sentiat,

    Lucr. 4, 522:

    ut omnes cives Romani in suis quisque centuriis prima luce adessent,

    that all the Roman citizens should be present, each in his own centuria, Liv. 1, 44, 1:

    hinc senatus, hinc plebs, suum quisque intuentes ducem constiterant,

    id. 6, 15, 3:

    ut (trigemini) pro sua quisque patria dimicent,

    id. 1, 24, 2:

    stabant compositi suis quisque ordinibus,

    id. 44, 38, 11:

    (consules) in suas quisque provincias proficiscuntur,

    id. 25, 12, 2; 25, 26, 13:

    in suo quaeque (stella) motu naturam suam exercent,

    Plin. 2, 39, 39, § 106.—With abl. absol.:

    omnes, velut dis auctoribus in spem suam quisque acceptis, proelium una voce poscunt,

    Liv. 21, 45, 9 Weissenb. ad loc.:

    relictis suis quisque stationibus... concurrerunt,

    id. 32, 24, 4; 4, 44, 10; 39, 49, 3; 2, 38, 6.—
    (β).
    With acc. of quisque as subj.:

    fabrum esse suae quemque fortunae, App. Claud. ap. Ps.-Sall. Ep. ad Caes. Rep. c. l.: sui quemque juris et retinendi et dimittendi esse dominum,

    Cic. Balb. 13, 31:

    recipere se in domos suas quemque jussit,

    Liv. 25, 10, 9; and (ungrammatically) nom., as apposition to a subj.-acc.:

    se non modo suam quisque patriam, sed totam Siciliam relicturos,

    id. 26, 29, 3 MSS. (Weissenb. ex conj. quosque).—
    (γ).
    As adjunct of the subject-nom., with a case of quisque as object, attribut. gen., etc.:

    sua cujusque animantis natura est,

    Cic. Fin. 5, 9, 25:

    sua quemque fraus, suum facinus, suum scelus, etc., de sanitate ac mente deturbat,

    id. Pis. 20, 46:

    sua quemque fraus et suus terror maxime vexat,

    id. Rosc. Am. 24, 67:

    suum cuique incommodum ferendum est,

    id. Off. 3, 6, 30:

    ut solidum suum cuique solvatur,

    id. Rab. Post. 17, 46:

    ne suus cuique domi hostis esset,

    Liv. 3, 16, 3:

    ut sua cuique respublica in manu esset,

    id. 26, 8, 11:

    animus suus cuique ordinem pugnandi dabat,

    id. 22, 5, 8:

    tentorium suum cuique militi domus ac penates sunt,

    id. 44, 39, 5:

    suus cuique (stellae) color est,

    Plin. 2, 18, 16, § 79:

    trahit sua quemque voluptas,

    Verg. E. 2, 65:

    stat sua cuique dies,

    id. A. 10, 467.—
    (δ).
    As predicate-nom. (v. II. B.):

    opinionem, quae sua cuique conjectanti esse potest,

    Liv. 6, 12, 3.—
    (ε).
    As adjunct of subj.-acc.:

    suum cuique honorem et gradum redditum gaudeo,

    Cic. Rosc. Am. 47, 136:

    scientiam autem suam cujusque artis esse,

    id. Fin. 5, 9, 26.—
    (ζ).
    As adjunct of an object, with a case of quisque as object or attribut. gen.: suam cuique sponsam, mihi meam: suum cuique amorem, mihi meum, Atil. Fragm. inc. 1: suom cuique per me uti atque frui licet, Cato ap. Gell. 13, 24 (23), 1:

    ut suo quemque appellem nomine,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 2, 52:

    placet Stoicis suo quamque rem nomine appellare,

    Cic. Fam. 9, 22, 1:

    ad suam cujusque naturam consilium est omne revocandum,

    id. Off. 1, 33, 119:

    justitia quae suum cuique distribuit,

    id. N. D. 3, 15, 38:

    in tribuendo suum cuique,

    id. Off. 1, 5, 14:

    Turnus sui cuique periculi recens erat documentum,

    Liv. 1, 52, 4:

    in trimatu suo cuique dimidiam esse mensuram futurae certum esse,

    Plin. 7, 15, 16, § 73:

    certa cuique rerum suarum possessio,

    Vell. 2, 89, 4; cf.: qua re suum unicuique studium suaque omnibus delectatio relinquatur, Ps.-Cic. Cons. 26, 93.—With quemque in apposition with acc. plur.:

    Camillus vidit intentos opifices suo quemque operi,

    Liv. 6, 25, 9; so cujusque in appos. with gen. plur.: trium clarissimorum suae cujusque gentis virorum mors, id. 39, 52, 7; and cuique with dat. plur.: sui cuique mores fingunt fortunam hominibus, Poet. ap. Nep. Att. 11, 6 (where Lachm. ad Lucr. 2, 372, reads quique, ex conj.; cf. b. b, infra).—
    b.
    Attraction of suus and quisque as adjuncts of nouns.
    (α).
    Attraction of suus:

    ut nemo sit nostrum quin in sensibus sui cujusque generis judicium requirat acrius (= suum cujusque generis judicium),

    Cic. Ac. 2, 7, 19:

    quas tamen inter omnes (voces) est suo quoque in genere (vox) mediocris ( = inter omnes voces est mediocris vox, sua quoque in genere),

    id. de Or. 3, 57, 216:

    eo concilia suae cujusque regionis indici jussit (= sua cujusque regionis concilia),

    Liv. 45, 29, 10:

    equites suae cuique parti post principia collocat (= equites suos cuique parti),

    id. 3, 22, 6:

    cum motibus armorum et corporum suae cuique genti assuetis,

    id. 25, 17, 5:

    legiones deducebantur cum tribunis et centurionibus et sui cujusque ordinis militibus (= suis cujusque),

    Tac. A. 14, 27:

    quae sui cujusque sunt ingenii,

    Quint. 7, 10, 10 Halm (al. sua):

    sui cujusque ingenii poma vel semina gerunt (= sua cujusque),

    Col. 3, 1;

    and by a double attraction: has (cohortes) subsidiariae ternae et aliae totidem suae cujusque legionis subsequebantur (= has cohortes... totidem cujusque legionis, suam quaeque legionem, subsequebantur),

    Caes. B. C. 1, 83. —
    (β).
    Attraction of quisque:

    tanta ibi copia venustatum in suo quique loco sita,

    Plaut. Poen. 5, 4, 6 (al. quaeque):

    quodvis frumentum non tamen omne Quique suo genere inter se simile esse videbis,

    Lucr. 2, 372 Lachm. and Munro ad loc.:

    cum verba debeant sui cujusque generis copulari,

    Varr. L. L. 10, 48:

    in sensibus sui cujusque generis judicium,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 7, 19:

    haec igitur proclivitas ad suum quodque genus aegrotatio dicatur,

    id. Tusc. 4, 12, 28:

    separatim greges sui cujusque generis nocte remeabant (= greges sui quisque generis),

    Liv. 24, 3, 5:

    ut sui cujusque mensis acciperet (frumentum),

    Suet. Aug. 40;

    and quisque both attracted and in its own case: quia cujusque partis naturae et in corpore et in animo sua quaeque vis sit (where either cujusque or quaeque is redundant),

    Cic. Fin. 5, 17, 46; v. Madv. ad loc.; Cato, R. R. 23 fin.;

    so esp. in the phrases suo quoque tempore, anno, die, loco, etc.: pecunia, quae in stipendium Romanis suo quoque anno penderetur, deerat (= suo quaeque anno),

    each instalment in the year when due, Liv. 33, 46, 9 Weissenb. ad loc.:

    suo quoque loco,

    Varr. R. R. 1, 7, 2; 1, 22, 6:

    opera quae suis quibusque temporibus anni vilicum exsequi oporteret,

    Col. 11, 3:

    suo quoque tempore,

    Vitr. 2, 9, 4:

    nisi sua quaque die usurae exsolverentur (= sua quaeque die),

    Dig. 22, 1, 12 init.; 13, 7, 8, § 3:

    ut opera rustica suo quoque tempore faciat,

    ib. 19, 2, 25, § 3 (al. quaeque)—
    c.
    In the order quisque... suus.
    (α).
    In relative clauses, comparative clauses with ut, and interrogative clauses introduced by quid, etc., where quisque immediately follows the relative, etc.:

    ut quisque suom volt esse, ita est,

    Ter. Ad. 3, 3, 45; cf.

    with sibi,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 18, 49; id. Lael. 9, 30:

    expendere oportere quid quisque habeat sui... nec velle experiri quam se aliena deceant. Id enim maxime quemque decet quod est cujusque maxime suum,

    id. Off. 1, 31, 113:

    neque solum quid in senatu quisque civitatis suae dicerent ignorabant, sed, etc.,

    Liv. 32, 19, 9:

    gratius id fore laetiusque quod quisque sua manu ex hoste captum rettulerit,

    id. 5, 20, 8; 6, 25, 10; cf.:

    in quibus cum multa sint quae sua quisque dicere velit, nihil est quod quisque suum possit dicere,

    Sen. Vit. Beat. 23, 1.—
    (β).
    If the emphasis is not on suus, but (for quisque, when emphatic, unusquisque is used) on some other word:

    in civitates quemque suas... dimisit,

    Liv. 21, 48, 2:

    in patriam quisque suam remissus est,

    Just. 33, 2, 8:

    in vestigio quemque suo vidit,

    Liv. 28, 22, 15; cf.:

    hospitibus quisque suis scribebant,

    id. 33, 45, 6:

    pro facultatibus quisque suis,

    id. 42, 53, 3; cf.:

    respiciendae sunt cuique facultates suae,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 15, 3:

    praecipitat quisque vitam suam et futuri desiderio laborat,

    id. Brev. Vit. 7, 5; id. Ben. 7, 5, 1:

    tunc praeceps quisque se proripit et penates suos deserit,

    id. Q. N. 6, 1, 5; 5, 18, 8:

    summum quisque causae suae judicem facit,

    Plin. 1, prooem. § 10: aestimatione nocturnae [p. 1828] quietis, dimidio quisque spatio vitae suae vivit, id. 7, 50, 51, § 167.—
    (γ).
    Poets adopt the order quisque suus when the metre requires it, Verg. A. 6, 743:

    oscula quisque suae matri tulerunt,

    Ov. F. 2, 715. —
    (δ).
    When suus and quisque belong to different clauses:

    atque earum quaeque, suum tenens munus... manet in lege naturae,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 13, 38. —
    d.
    Suus uterque, or uterque suus, distributively of two subjects:

    suas uterque legiones reducit in castra,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 40; 2, 28:

    ideo quod uterque suam legem confirmare debebit,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 49, 142:

    cum sui utrosque adhortarentur,

    Liv. 1, 25, 1:

    ad utrumque ducem sui redierunt,

    id. 21, 29, 5:

    utraque (lex) sua via it,

    Sen. Ben. 6, 6, 1; cf.

    uterque, in apposit.: nec ipsi tam inter se acriter contenderunt, quam studia excitaverant uterque sui corporis hominum,

    Liv. 26, 48, 6.—
    3.
    With sibi.
    (α).
    Sibi with pronom. force (cf. sui, IV. C. fin.):

    reddam suum sibi,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 119 ( = ei; but referred to b, infra, by Brix ad loc.); cf.:

    suam rem sibi salvam sistam,

    id. Poen. 5, 2, 123:

    idem lege sibi sua curationem petet,

    for himself, Cic. Agr. 2, 9, 22 (cf. id. Phil. 2, 37, 96;

    I. B. 2. b. supra): ut vindicare sibi suum fulgorem possint,

    Sen. Q. N. 1, 1, 11; cf.

    the formula of divorce: tuas res tibi habeto,

    Dig. 24, 2, 2.—Hence, illam suam suas res sibi habere jussit, Cic. Phil. 2, 28, 69.—
    (β).
    With sibi redundant, to strengthen suus (anteand post-class. and colloq.):

    quo pacto serviat suo sibi patri,

    Plaut. Capt. prol. 5:

    eum necabam ilico per cerebrum pinna sua sibi, quasi turturem,

    id. Poen. 2, 40; v. sui, IV. C. and the passages there cited.—
    4.
    With gen. agreeing with the subject of suus:

    quas cum solus pertulisset ut sua unius in his gratia esset,

    that the credit of it should belong to him alone, Liv. 2, 8, 3:

    qui de sua unius sententia omnia gerat,

    id. 44, 22, 11; cf.:

    unam Aegyptus in hoc spem habet suam,

    Sen. Q. N. 4, 2, 2.—For suus ipsius, etc., v. D. 1. b. supra.—
    5.
    With demonstr., rel., or indef. pronn. and adjj., of his, hers, etc.:

    postulat ut ad hanc suam praedam adjutores vos profiteamini,

    to this booty of his, Cic. Rosc. Am. 2, 6:

    Sestius cum illo exercitu suo,

    id. Sest. 5, 12:

    qua gravitate sua,

    id. ib. 61, 129:

    suam rem publicam illam defenderunt,

    that republic of theirs, id. ib. 67, 141:

    in istum civem suum,

    against this citizen of theirs, id. Balb. 18, 41:

    cum illo suo pari,

    id. Pis. 8, 18:

    te nulla sua calamitate civitas satiare potest?

    id. Phil. 8, 6, 19:

    dubitatis igitur, quin vos M. Laterensis ad suam spem aliquam delegerit,

    for some hope of his, id. Planc. 16, 39:

    non tam sua ulla spe quam militum impetu tractus,

    by any hope of his, Liv. 25, 21, 5:

    nullo suo merito,

    from no fault of theirs, id. 26, 29, 4:

    ipse arcano cum paucis familiaribus suis colloquitur,

    with a few of his friends, Caes. B. C. 1, 19.—
    6.
    With descriptive adjj.
    (α).
    Standing before the adj. and noun (so most freq.):

    suorum improbissimorum sermonum domicilium,

    Cic. Pis. 31, 76:

    causam sui dementissimi consilii,

    id. Phil. 2, 22, 53:

    suam insatiabilem crudelitatem,

    id. ib. 11, 3, 8:

    suis amplissimis fortunis,

    id. ib. 13, 8, 16:

    suum pristinum morem,

    id. Pis. 12, 27:

    suis lenissimis postulatis,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 5: simili ratione Pompeius in suis veteribus castris consedit (suis emphatic; cf. b, infra), id. ib. 3, 76.—
    (β).
    Between the adj. and noun (less emphatic):

    pro eximiis suis beneficiis,

    Cic. Prov. Cons. 4, 7:

    propter summam suam humanitatem,

    id. Fam. 15, 14, 1:

    ex praeteritis suis officiis,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 60:

    Caesar in veteribus suis castris consedit,

    id. ib. 3, 76.—
    (γ).
    After adj. and noun:

    veterem amicum suum excepit,

    Cic. Rab. Post. 16, 43:

    in illo ardenti tribunatu suo,

    id. Sest. 54, 116.—
    7.
    Objectively for the pers. pron. (rare):

    neque cuiquam mortalium injuriae suae parvae videntur ( = sibi illatae),

    Sall. C. 51, 11; so,

    neglectam ab Scipione et nimis leviter latam suam injuriam ratus,

    Liv. 29, 9, 9:

    ipsae enim leges te a cognitione sua judicio publico reppulerunt ( = a se cognoscendo),

    Cic. Balb. 14, 32:

    suam invidiam tali morte quaesitam ( = quaesitum esse ab eo ut homines se inviderent),

    Tac. A. 3, 16; so,

    nulla sua invidia,

    Cic. Mil. 15, 40.—
    8.
    Abl. fem. sua, with refert or interest, for gen. of the pers. pron.: neminem esse qui quomodo se habeat nihil sua censeat interesse, Cic. Fin. 5, 10, 30:

    si scit sua nihil interesse utrum anima per os, an per jugulum exeat,

    Sen. Ep. 76, 33; v. intersum, III.—
    9.
    Strengthened by the suffix - pte or -met.
    (α).
    By - pte (not used with ipse) affixed to the forms sua, suo, and (ante-class.) suum:

    quom illa osculata esset suumpte amicum,

    Plaut. Mil. 2, 4, 38:

    ut terrena suopte nutu et suo pondere in terram ferantur,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 17, 40:

    ferri suopte pondere,

    id. N. D. 1, 25, 69:

    suapte natura,

    id. Fat. 18, 42:

    suapte vi et natura,

    id. ib. 19, 43; id. Fin. 1, 16, 54; 5, 22, 61:

    suopte ingenio,

    Liv. 25, 18; so id. 1, 25, 1; 1, 18, 4:

    suapte manu,

    Cic. Or. 3, 3, 10:

    locus suapte natura infestus,

    Liv. 44, 6, 9; so,

    suapte natura,

    id. 4, 22, 4:

    flumina suapte natura vasta,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 27, 8; so id. Ben. 4, 17, 2:

    sponte suapte,

    Varr. L. L. 6, 7, § 70.—
    (β).
    With - met, almost always followed by ipse (in all forms of suus except suus, suum, suae, and suorum):

    suomet ipsi more,

    Sall. J. 31, 6:

    suomet ipsi instrumento,

    Liv. 22, 14, 13:

    suomet ipsi metu,

    Tac. H. 3, 16 fin.:

    suamet ipsum pecunia,

    Sall. J. 8, 2:

    suamet ipsae fraude,

    Liv. 8, 18, 9:

    intra suamet ipsum moenia,

    id. 6, 36, 4:

    suismet ipsi praesidiis,

    id. 8, 25, 6:

    suismet ipsis corporibus,

    id. 2, 19, 5:

    suosmet ipsi cives,

    id. 2, 9, 5:

    suasmet ipse spes,

    Tac. A. 3, 66 fin. —Without ipse:

    populum suimet sanguinis mercede,

    Sall. H. Fragm. 1, 41, 25 Dietsch:

    magna pars suismet aut proxumorum telis obtruncabantur,

    id. ib. 2, 52 ib.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > suum

  • 10 suus

    sŭus, a, um (old form sos, sa, sum; dat. plur. sis, Enn. ap. Fest. p. 301 Mull.; acc. sas. id. ib. p. 325 ib.; cf. Paul. ex Fest. p. 47; Schol. Pers. 1, 108; sing. sam for suam, Fest. p. 47 Mull.;

    so for suo, C. I. L. 5, 2007. In ante-class. verse su- with the following vowel freq. forms one syllable,

    Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 48; id. Ps. 1, 3, 5; Ter. And. 1, 1, 68; Lucr. 1, 1022; v. Neue, Formenl. 2, 189 sqq.), pron. poss., 3 d pers. [root SVA-; Sanscr. sva, own; cf. sui; Gr. seWo-, whence sphe, etc., and he; cf. heos], of or belonging to himself, herself, etc.; his own, her own, etc.; his, her, its, their; one ' s; hers, theirs.
    I.
    Ordinary possessive use his, etc. (cf. the similar use of the pers. pron. sui, q. v.).
    A.
    With antecedent in the same sentence.
    1.
    The antecedent a subject-nominative, expressed or understood.
    (α).
    His:

    Caesar copias suas divisit,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 97:

    ille in sua sententia perseverat,

    id. ib. 1, 72:

    tantam habebat suarum rerum fiduciam,

    id. ib. 2, 37:

    cum sceleris sui socios Romae reliquisset,

    Cic. Cat. 3, 1, 3:

    cur ego non ignoscam si anteposuit suam salutem meae?

    id. Pis. 32, 79; id. Phil. 2, 18, 45; id. Mil. 10, 27; id. Fam. 15, 14, 1:

    Hanno praefecturam ejus (i.e. Muttinis) filio suo (Hannonis) dedit,

    Liv. 26, 40, 7:

    imperat princeps civibus suis,

    Sen. Clem. 1, 16, 2:

    nemo rem suam emit,

    id. Ben. 7, 4, 8.—
    (β).
    Her:

    mea Glycerium suos parentes repperit,

    Ter. And. 5, 6, 5:

    utinam haec ignoraret suum patrem,

    id. Phorm. 5, 6, 34:

    si nunc facere volt era officium suom,

    Plaut. Cas. 2, 8, 72:

    ne eadem mulier cum suo conjuge honestissimum adulescentem oppressisse videatur,

    Cic. Cael. 32, 78:

    si omnibus suis copiis excellentem virum res publica armasset,

    id. Phil. 13, 16, 32.—
    (γ).
    Its:

    omne animal, simul et ortum est, et se ipsum et omnes partes suas diligit,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 11, 33:

    cum mea domus ardore suo deflagrationem Italiae toti minaretur,

    id. Planc. 40, 95.—
    (δ).
    Their: (legiones) si consulem suum reliquerunt, vituperandae sunt Cic. Phil. 5, 2, 4:

    mittent aliquem de suo numero,

    id. ib. 11, 10, 25:

    rationem illi sententiae suae non fere reddebant,

    id. Tusc. 1, 17, 38:

    qui agellos suos redimere a piratis solebant,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 37, § 85:

    edicunt ut ad suum vestitum senatores redirent,

    id. Sest. 14, 32:

    suis finibus eos prohibent,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 1: Allobrogibus sese persuasuros existimabant ut per suos (Allobrogum) fines eos (Helvetios) ire paterentur, id. id. 1, 6;

    and distributively: ac naves onerariae LXIII. in portu expugnatae, quaedam cum suis oneribus, frumento, armis, aere, etc.,

    some with their several cargoes, Liv. 26, 47, 9.—
    2.
    With a subject-clause as antecedent:

    id sua sponte apparebat tuta celeribus consiliis praepositurum,

    was selfevident, Liv. 22, 38, 13:

    ad id quod sua sponte satis collectum animorum erat, indignitate etiam Romani accendebantur,

    id. 3, 62, 1:

    secutum tamen sua sponte est ut vilior ob ea regi Hannibal et suspectior fieret,

    id. 35, 14, 4. —
    3.
    With subject-acc. as antecedent:

    hanc dicam Athenis advenisse cum aliquo amatore suo, Plant. Mil. 2, 2, 86: doceo gratissimum esse in sua tribu Plancium,

    Cic. Planc. 19, 47:

    cupio eum suae causae confidere,

    id. Sest. 64, 135:

    suspicari debuit (Milo), eum (Clodium) ad villam suam (Clodii) deversurum,

    id. Mil. 19, 51: Medeam praedicant in fuga fratris sui membra dissipavisse, id. Imp. Pomp. 9, 22:

    (dixit) Caesarem pro sua dignitate debere et studium et iracundiam suam reipublicae dimittere,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 8.—
    4.
    With object-acc. as antecedent.
    (α).
    Suus being an adjunct of the subject (generally rendered in Engl. by a pass. constr.):

    hunc pater suus de templo deduxit,

    he was taken from the temple by his father, Cic. Inv. 2, 17, 52:

    hunc sui cives e civitate ejecerunt,

    id. Sest. 68, 142:

    Alexandrum uxor sua... occidit,

    id. Inv. 2, 49, 144:

    illum ulciscentur mores sui,

    id. Att. 9, 12, 2:

    quodsi quem natura sua... forte deficiet,

    id. Or. 1, 14:

    utrumque regem sua multitudo consalutaverat,

    Liv. 1, 7, 1:

    quas (urbes) sua virtus ac dii juvent, magnas sibi opes facere,

    id. 1, 9, 3; 1, 7, 15; 6, 33, 5:

    quos nec sua conscientia impulerit, nec, etc.,

    id. 26, 33, 3; 25, 14, 7:

    consulem C. Marium servus suus interemit,

    Val. Max. 6, 8, 2:

    quis non Vedium Pollionem pejus oderat quam servi sui?

    Sen. Clem. 1, 18, 2:

    sera dies sit qua illum gens sua caelo adserat,

    id. Cons. Poll. 12 (31), 5.—With the antecedent understood from the principal sentence:

    ita forma simili pueri ut mater sua internoscere (sc. eos) non posset,

    Plaut. Men. prol. 19; and with suus as adjunct both of the subject and of the antecedent: jubet salvere suos vir uxorem suam, id. merc. 4, 3, 11. —
    (β).
    With impers. verbs:

    sunt homines, quos libidinis infamiaeque suae neque pudeat neque taedeat,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 12, 35:

    video fore ut inimicos tuos poeniteat intemperantiae suae,

    id. Fam. 3, 10, 1:

    si Caesarem beneficii sui poeniteret,

    id. Lig. 10, 29; so id. Agr. 2, 11, 26:

    jam ne nobilitatis quidem suae plebejos poenitere,

    Liv. 10, 7, 8:

    militem jam minus virtutis poenitere suae,

    id. 22, 12, 10.—
    (γ).
    As adjunct of other members of the sentence:

    ad parentes suos ducas Silenium,

    Plaut. Cist. 2, 3, 86. nam is illius filiam conicit in navem clam matrem suam (i.e. filiae), id. Mil. 2, 1, 34:

    eosdem ad quaestoris sui aut imperatoris, aut commilitonum suorum pericula impulistis,

    Cic. Phil. 13, 17, 34:

    totum enim ex sua patria sustulisti,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 49, § 127; id. Or. 3, 32, 126: quem (Hammonium) tibi etiam suo nomine ( on his own account) commendo... itaque peto a te ut ejus procuratorem et ipsum suo nomine diligas, id. Fam. 13, 21, 2:

    Caesar Fabium in sua remittit hiberna,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 33; id. B. C. 3, 24:

    introire ad Ciceronem, et domi suae imparatum confodere,

    Sall. C. 28, 1:

    suis flammis delete Fidenas,

    i. e. the flames kindled by the Fidenates, Liv. 4, 33, 5:

    suo igni involvit hostes,

    Tac. A. 14, 30:

    quid Caesarem in sua fata inmisit?

    Sen. Ep. 94, 65; id. Q. N. 1, praef. 7; cf.

    with antecedent supplied from preceding sentence: non destiti rogare et petere (sc. Brutum) mea causa, suadere et hortari sua,

    Cic. Att. 6, 2, 7.—
    5.
    With dat. as antecedent.
    (α).
    As adjunct of subject (cf. 4. supra):

    suus rex reginae placet,

    a queen likes her own king, Plaut. Stich. 1, 2, 76:

    ei nunc alia ducenda'st domum, sua cognata Lemniensis,

    id. Cist. 1, 1, 101:

    Autronio nonne sodales, non collegae sui... defuerunt?

    Cic. Sull. 2, 7:

    si ceteris facta sua recte prosunt,

    id. Cat. 3, 12, 27:

    cui non magistri sui atque doctores, cui non... locus ipse... in mente versetur?

    id. Planc. 33, 81:

    haec omnia plane... Siculis erepta sunt: primum suae leges, etc.,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 13, § 33:

    Romanis multitudo sua auxit animum,

    Liv. 21, 50, 4:

    sicuti populo Romano sua fortuna labet,

    id. 42, 50, 7:

    Lanuvinis sacra sua reddita,

    id. 8, 14, 2:

    vilitas sua illis detrahit pretium,

    Sen. Ben. 4, 29, 2:

    nemo est cui felicitas sua satisfaciat,

    id. Ep. 115, 17:

    labor illi suus restitutus est,

    id. Brev. Vit. 20, 3:

    magnitudo sua singulis constat,

    id. Q. N. 1, 1, 10:

    tantum sapienti sua, quantum Dec omnis aetas patet,

    id. Ep. 53, 11. —

    With antecedent supplied from principal sentence: mater quod suasit sua Adulescens mulier fecit, i.e. ei,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 38.—
    (β).
    Of other words:

    regique Thebano regnum stabilivit suum,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 40:

    mittam hodie huic suo die natali malam rem magnam,

    id. Ps. 1, 3, 5:

    ego Metello non irascor, neque ei suam vacationem eripio,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 68, § 164:

    desinant insidiari domui suae consuli,

    id. Cat. 1, 13, 32:

    quibus ea res honori fuerit a suis civibus,

    id. Mil. 35, 96: Scipio suas res Syracusanis restituit, Liv. [p. 1824] 29, 1, 17:

    nos non suas (leges Lacedaemoniis arbitror) ademisse, sed nostras leges dedisse,

    id. 39, 37, 6:

    Graccho et Tuditano provinciae Lucani et Galliae cum suis exercitibus prorogatae,

    id. 25, 3, 5.—
    6.
    With gen., abl., or object of a prep. as antecedent:

    nec illius animi aciem praestringit splendor sui nominis,

    Cic. Rab. Post. 16, 43:

    nolite a sacris patriis Junonis Sospitae domesticum et suum consulem avellere,

    id. Mur. 41, 90:

    quamvis tu magna mihi scripseris de Bruti adventu ad suas legiones,

    id. Att. 14, 13, 12:

    suae legis ad scriptum ipsam quoque sententiam adjungere,

    the meaning of their law to which they refer, id. Inv. 2, 49, 147:

    cum ambitio alterius suam primum apud eos majestatem solvisset,

    Liv. 22, 42, 12:

    nunc causam instituendorum ludorum ab origine sua repetam,

    Val. Max. 2, 4, 4:

    Jubam in regno suo non locorum notitia adjuvet, non popularium pro rege suo virtus,

    Sen. Ep. 71, 10; id. Ben. 7, 6, 3; id. Clem. 1, 3, 4.—Esp. with cujusque as antecedent:

    in qua deliberatione ad suam cujusque naturam consilium est omne revocandum,

    Cic. Off. 1, 33, 119 (v. II. D. 2. infra).— Abl.:

    operam dare ut sua lex ipso scripto videatur niti,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 49, 147 (cf. supra):

    (Caesar reperiebat) ad Galbam propter justitiam prudentiamque suam totius belli summam deferri,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 4:

    credere, ad suum concilium a Jove deos advocari,

    Sen. Q. N. 2, 42, 1.—
    7.
    With predic. nom. as antecedent:

    sapientissimi artis suae professores sunt a quibus et propria studia verecunde et aliena callide administrantur,

    Val. Max. 8, 12, 1.—
    8.
    With appositive noun.
    (α).
    With gram. subject as antecedent:

    hoc Anaximandro, populari ac sodali suo, non persuasit,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 37, 118:

    vidit fortissimum virum, inimicissimum suum,

    id. Mil. 9, 25:

    (hic) fuit in Creta contubernalis Saturnini, propinqui sui,

    id. Planc. 11, 27:

    ut non per L. Crassum, adfinem suum... causam illam defenderit,

    id. Balb. 21, 49:

    ne cum hoc T. Broccho, avunculo, ne cum ejus filio, consobrino suo, ne nobiscum vivat,

    id. Lig. 4, 11:

    Caesar mittit ad eum A. Clodium, suum atque illius familiarem,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 57.—
    (β).
    With object as antecedent:

    Dicaearchum cum Aristoxeno, aequali et condiscipulo suo, omittamus,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 18, 41:

    tres fratres optimos, non solum sibi ipsos, neque nobis, necessariis suis, sed etiam rei publicae condonavit,

    id. Lig. 12, 36:

    Varroni, quem, sui generis hominem,... vulgus extrahere ad consulatum nitebatur,

    Liv. 22, 34, 2.—
    (γ).
    With appositive noun as antecedent:

    si P. Scipionem, clarissimum virum, majorumque suorum simillimum res publica tenere potuisset,

    Cic. Phil. 13, 14, 29:

    M. Fabi Ambusti, potentis viri cum inter sui corporis homines, tum ad plebem, etc.,

    Liv. 6, 34, 5:

    C. vero Fabricii, et Q. Aemilii Papi, principum saeculi sui, domibus argentum fuisse confitear oportet,

    Val. Max. 4, 4, 3.—
    9.
    In participial clauses.
    (α).
    The antecedent being the logical subject of the participle, and other than the principal subject:

    credamus igitur Panaetio, a Platone suo dissentienti ( = qui dissentiebat),

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 32, 79:

    ea Sex. Roscium, expulsum ex suis bonis, recepit domum,

    id. Rosc. Am. 10, 27:

    diffidentemque rebus suis confirmavit,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 9, 23:

    Dejotarum ad me venientem cum omnibus copiis suis, certiorem feci, etc.,

    id. Fam. 15, 4, 7; id. Cat. 4, 9, 18: si hominis et suis et populi Romani ornamentis amplissimi ( being greatly distinguished) causam repudiassem, id. Mur. 4, 8:

    stupentes tribunos et suam jam vicem magis anxios quam, etc., liberavit consensus populi Romani,

    Liv. 8, 35, 1; 22, 42, 8:

    manet in folio scripta querela suo ( = quam scripsit),

    Ov. F. 5, 224; cf. in abl. absol.:

    et ipsis (hostibus) regressis in castra sua,

    Liv. 22, 60, 9:

    quibus (speculis) si unum ostenderis hominem, populus adparet, unaquaque parte faciem exprimente sua,

    Sen. Q. N. 1, 5, 5.—
    (β).
    The logical subject of the participle, being also the principal subject:

    sic a suis legionibus condemnatus irrupit in Galliam,

    Cic. Phil. 10, 10, 21:

    hunc agrum patres nostri, acceptum a majoribus suis ( = quem acceperant), perdiderunt,

    id. Agr. 2, 31, 84:

    ut in suis ordinibus dispositi dispersos adorirentur,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 92: Appius, odium in se aliorum suo in eos metiens odio, haud ignaro, inquit, imminet fortuna, Liv. 3, 54, 3:

    ipsa capit Condita in pharetra ( = quae condiderat) tela minora sua,

    Ov. F. 2, 326; cf. in abl. absol.:

    Sopater, expositis suis difficultatibus ( = cum exposuisset, etc.): Timarchidem... perducit,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 28, § 69:

    Caesar, primum suo deinde omnium ex conspectu remotis equis, etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 25:

    Campani, audita sua pariter sociorumque clade, legatos ad Hannibalem miserunt,

    Liv. 25, 15, 1:

    (Appius) deposito suo magistratu... domum est reductus,

    id. 4, 24, 7; 3, 35, 9; 9, 10, 13; 9, 41, 9.—
    (γ).
    The antecedent being the principal subject, not the logical subject of the participle:

    M. Papirius dicitur Gallo, barbam suam (i.e. Papirii) permulcenti,... iram movisse,

    Liv. 5, 41, 9: cum Gracchus, verecundia deserendi socios, implorantis fidem suam populique Romani, substitisset. id. 23, 36, 8; cf. in abl. absol.:

    si sine maximo dedecore, tam impeditis suis rebus, potuisset emori,

    Cic. Rab. Post. 10, 29; id. Mil. 14, 38; id. Planc. 21, 51; id. Clu. 14, 42:

    ita (consul) proelio uno accidit Vestinorum res, haudquaquam tamen incruento milite suo (consulis),

    Liv. 8, 29, 12; cf.

    with antecedent to be supplied: Campani, cum, robore juventutis suae acciso, nulla (sc. eis) propinqua spes esset, etc.,

    id. 7, 29, 7.—
    10.
    In gerund. construction. ( a) With subject as antecedent:

    mihi ipsa Roma ad complectendum conservatorem suum progredi visa est,

    Cic. Pis. 22, 52.—
    (β).
    With object, the logical subjects of the gerund as antecedent:

    cur iis persequendi juris sui... adimis potestatem?

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 6, 21:

    si senatui doloris sui de me declarandi potestas esset erepta,

    id. Sest. 23, 51:

    nec tribunis plebis (spatium datur) sui periculi deprecandi,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 5.—
    (γ).
    With antecedent dependent on the gerund:

    eamque rem illi putant a suum cuique tribuendo appellatam,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 19.—
    11.
    As adjunct of a noun dependent on a subjectinf., with its logical subject as antecedent:

    magnum Miloni fuit, conficere illam pestem nulla sua invidia?

    Cic. Mil. 15, 40:

    neque enim fuit Gabinii, remittere tantum de suo nec regis, imponere tantum plus suis,

    his claim, id. Rab. Post. 11, 31:

    Piso, cui fructum pietatis suae neque ex me neque a populo Romano ferre licuit,

    id. Sest. 31, 68:

    ei cujus magis intersit, vel sua, vel rei publicae causa vivere,

    id. Off. 3, 23, 90:

    sapientis est consilium explicare suum de maximis rebus,

    id. Or. 2, 81, 333; id. Mil. 15, 41.—With logical subject understood:

    totam Italiam suis colonis ut complere (sc. eis) liceat, permittitur,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 13, 34:

    maximum (sc. eis) solacium erit, propinquorum eodem monumento declarari, et virtutem suorum, et populi Romani pietatem,

    id. Phil. 14, 13, 35.
    B.
    Without gram. antec., one ' s, one ' s own.
    1.
    Dependent on subject-inff.:

    ejusdem animi est, posteris suis amplitudinem nobis quam non acceperit tradere, et memoriam prope intermortuam generis sui, virtute renovare,

    Cic. Mur. 7, 16:

    siquidem atrocius est, patriae parentem quam suum occidere,

    id. Phil. 2, 13, 31:

    miliens perire est melius quam in sua civitate sine armorum praesidio non posse vivere,

    id. ib. 2, 44, 112: quanto est honestius, alienis injuriis quam suis commoveri, one ' s own, id. Verr. 2, 3, 72, § 169:

    contentum suis rebus esse maximae sunt certissimaeque divitiae,

    id. Par. 6, 51:

    ut non liceat sui commodi causa nocere alteri,

    id. Off. 3, 5, 23:

    detrahere de altero sui commodi causa,

    id. ib. 3, 5, 24:

    suis exemplis melius est uti,

    Auct. Her. 4, 1, 2:

    levius est sua decreta tollere quam aliorum,

    Liv. 3, 21. 5; 39, 5, 2;

    29, 37, 11: satius est vitae suae rationes quam frumenti publici nosse,

    Sen. Brev. Vit. 18, 3:

    quanto satius est sua mala exstinguere quam aliena posteris tradere?

    id. Q. N. 3, praef. 5:

    cum initia beneficiorum suorum spectare, tum etiam exitus decet,

    id. Ben. 2, 14, 2; 3, 1, 5:

    Romani nominis gloriae, non suae, composuisse illa decuit,

    Plin. 1, prooem. § 16.—With 1 st pers. plur., as indef. antecedent: cum possimus ab Ennio sumere... exemplum, videtur esse arrogantia illa relinquere, et ad sua devenire, to one ' s own = to our own, Auct. Her. 4, 1, 2.—
    2.
    Without a subject-inf.:

    omnia torquenda sunt ad commodum suae causae... sua diligenter narrando,

    Cic. Inv. 1, 21, 30: ut in ceteris habenda ratio non sua (al. sui) solum, sed etiam aliorum, id. Off. 1, 39, 139:

    erat Dareo mite ac tractabile ingenium, nisi suam naturam plerumque fortuna corrumperet (suam not referring to Dareo),

    Curt. 3, 2, 17 MSS. (Foss, mansuetam). — With 1 st pers. plur., as indef. antecedent (cf. 1. supra):

    non erit ista amicitia sed mercatura quaedam utilitatum suarum,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 44, 122; cf.: pro suo possidere, II. A. 2. a. g; and Cic. Off. 2, 21, 73, II. A. 2. b. a; cf. also II. B. 1. a; II. B. 5. c.; II. B. 7. b.; II. C. 8. b. b infra.
    C.
    With antec. in a previous sentence. Here ejus, eorum, earum are used for his, her, their, unless the clause is oblique in regard to the antecedent, i. e. the antecedent is conceived as the author of the statement.
    1.
    In clauses dependent on a verbum sentiendi or dicendi, expressed or understood, referring to the grammatical or logical subject of the verb.
    a.
    In infinitive clauses:

    (Clodius) Caesaris potentiam suam potentiam esse dicebat,

    Cic. Mil. 32, 88:

    (Caelius) a sua (causa) putat ejus (i.e. Ascitii) esse sejunctam,

    id. Cael. 10, 24:

    ipsos certo scio non negare ad haec bona Chrysogonum accessisse impulsu suo (referring to ipsos),

    id. Rosc. Am. 37, 107:

    hostes viderunt,... suorum tormentorum usum spatio propinquitatis interire,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 16:

    docent, sui judicii rem non esse,

    id. ib. 1, 13.—The reference of suus may be ambiguous, esp. if an infinitive is dependent on another:

    hoc Verrem dicere ajebant, te... opera sua consulem factum, i.e. Verris, though grammatically it might refer to the subj. of aiebant,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 10, 29:

    (Ariovistus) dixit neminem secum sine sua pernicie contendisse,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 36; cf. the context with, in all, eleven reflexive pronouns referring to four different antecedents (populus Romanus, Ariovistus, Caesar, nemo); cf.

    also: occurrebat ei, mancam praeturam suam futuram consule Milone,

    Cic. Mil. 9, 25; 32, 88; Liv. 3, 42, 2.—
    b.
    Suus in a clause dependent on inf.:

    scio equidem, ut, qui argentum afferret atque expressam imaginem suam (i.e. militis) huc ad nos, cum eo ajebat velle mitti mulierem,

    Plaut. Ps. 2, 2, 55:

    isti bonorum emptores arbitrantur, vos hic sedere qui excipiatis eos qui de suis (i.e. emptorum) manibus effugerint,

    Cic. Rosc. Am. 52, 151:

    Siculi venisse tempus ajebant ut commoda sua defenderem,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 1, 3:

    ut tunc tandem sentiret recuperanda esse quae prius sua culpa amissa forent,

    Liv. 44, 8, 4. —

    Ambiguous: velle Pompejum se Caesari purgatum, ne ea quae reipublicae causa egerit (Pompejus) in suam (i.e. Caesaris) contumeliam vertat (where suam might be referred to Pompejus),

    Caes. B. C. 1, 8.—
    c.
    In oblique clauses introduced by ut or ne, or clauses subordinate to such:

    Cassius constituit ut ludi absente te fierent suo nomine,

    Cic. Att. 15, 11, 2:

    postulat ut ad hanc suam praedam tam nefariam adjutores vos profiteamini,

    id. Rosc. Am. 2, 6:

    Nasidius eos magnopere hortatur ut rursus cum Bruti classe, additis suis (i.e. Nasidii) auxiliis confligant,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 3:

    (regem) denuntiasse sibi ut triduo regni sui decederent finibus,

    Liv. 42, 25, 12:

    Sabinae mulieres, hinc patres, hinc viros orantes, ne parricidio macularent partus suos (i.e. mulierum),

    id. 1, 13, 2:

    Patron praecepit suis ut arma induerent, ad omne imperium suum parati,

    Curt. 5, 11, 1.—With reflex. pron., referring to a different antecedent:

    ad hanc (Laidem) Demosthenes clanculum adit, et ut sibi copiam sui faceret, petit,

    Gell. 1, 8, 5. —
    d.
    In subordinate clauses introduced by quin or quod:

    (Dejotarus) non recusat quin id suum facinus judices,

    Cic. Deiot. 15, 43; so id. ib. 4, 15;

    16, 45: parietes hujus curiae tibi gratias agere gestiunt, quod futura sit illa auctoritas in his majorum suorum et suis sedibus,

    id. Marcell. 3, 10:

    quidni gauderet quod iram suam nemo sentiret?

    Sen. Troad. 3, 13:

    querenti quod uxor sua e fico se suspendisset,

    Quint. 6, 3, 88;

    and with intentional ambiguity: cum Proculejus quereretur de filio quod is mortem suam expectaret,

    id. 9, 3, 68. —
    e.
    In interrogative clauses:

    si, quod officii sui sit, non occurrit animo, nihil umquam omnino aget,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 8, 25:

    ut non auderet iterum dicere quot milia fundus suus abesset ab urbe,

    id. Caecin. 10, [p. 1825] 28:

    donec sciat unisquisque quid sui, quid alieni sit,

    Liv. 6, 27, 8:

    rex ignarus, quae cum Hannibale legatis suis convenisset, quaeque legati ejus ad se allaturi fuissent,

    id. 23, 39, 2:

    postquam animadvertit quantus agminis sui terror esset,

    id. 43, 19, 5. —
    2.
    In a virtually oblique clause.
    a.
    In final clause, introduced by ut, ne, or rel., referring to the subject of the purpose:

    me a portu praemisit domum, ut haec nuntiem uxori suae,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 41:

    quasi Appius ille Caecus viam muniverit, non qua populus uteretur, sed ubi impune sui posteri latrocinarentur, i. e. Appii,

    Cic. Mil. 7, 17:

    quae gens ad Caesarem legatos mise. rat, ut suis omnibus facultatibus uteretur,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 80:

    inde castra movent, ne qua vis sociis suis ab Romano exercitu inferri possit,

    Liv. 43, 23, 5:

    (Romani) Albam a fundamentis proruerunt, ne memoria originum suarum exstaret,

    id. 26, 13, 16:

    oppidani nuntios Romam, qui certiorem de suo casu senatum facerent, misere,

    id. 6, 33, 7; cf.:

    tanto intervallo ab hostibus consedit, ut nec adventus suus propinquitate nimia nosci posset, et, etc.,

    Liv. 10, 20, 7:

    Datames locum delegit talem ut non multum obesse multitudo hostium suae paucitati posset,

    Nep. Dat. 7, 3:

    quid si gubernator a diis procellas petat ut gratior ars sua periculo fiat?

    Sen. Ben. 6, 25, 4. —
    b.
    In other dependent clauses represented as conceived by an antecedent in the principal sentence:

    Sulla, si sibi suus pudor ac dignitas non prodesset, nullum auxilium requisivit ( = negavit se defendi velle, si, etc.),

    Cic. Sull. 5, 15:

    Paetus omnes libros quos frater suus reliquisset mihi donavit ( = dixit se donare libros quos, etc.),

    id. Att. 2, 1, 12:

    non enim a te emit, sed, priusquam tu suum sibi venderes, ipse possedit ( = potitus est, ne, etc.),

    id. Phil. 2, 37, 96:

    Africanus, si sua res ageretur, testimonium non diceret,

    id. Rosc. Am. 36, 3:

    ille ipse (Pompejus) proposuit epistulam illam, in qua est Pro tuis rebus gestis amplissimis. Amplioribusne quam suis, quam Africani?

    id. Att. 8, 9, 2:

    spiritus dabat (Manlio) quod... vinculorum suorum invidiam dictator fugisset,

    Liv. 6, 18, 4:

    (Numa) Camenis eum lucum sacravit, quod earum ibi concilia cum conjuge sua Egeria essent,

    id. 1, 21, 3:

    adulescens deos omnis invocare ad gratiam illi pro se referendam, quoniam sibi nequaquam satis facultatis pro suo animo atque illius erga se esset,

    id. 26, 50, 4 (cf. D. 1. a. infra).
    D.
    In the place of ejus.
    1.
    In clauses virtually oblique, but with indicative, being conceived by the antecedent (hence suus, not ejus), but asserted as fact by the author (hence indicative, not subjunctive):

    Cicero tibi mandat ut Aristodemo idem respondeas, quod de fratre suo (Ciceronis) respondisti,

    Cic. Att. 2, 7, 4:

    oriundi ab Sabinis, ne, quia post Tatii mortem ab sua parte non erat regnatum, imperium amitterent, sui corporis creari regem volebant,

    Liv. 1, 17, 2:

    C. Caesar villam pulcherrimam, quia mater sua aliquando in illa custodita erat, diruit,

    Sen. Ira, 3, 21, 5:

    Philemonem, a manu servum, qui necem suam per venenum inimicis promiserat, non gravius quam simplici morte punivit,

    Suet. Caes. 74; cf.:

    quomodo excandescunt si quid e juba sua decisum est,

    Sen. Brev. Vit. 12, 3.—
    2.
    To avoid ambiguity:

    petunt rationes illius (Catilinae) ut orbetur consilio res publica, ut minuatur contra suum (i.e. Catilinae) furorem imperatorum copia (instead of ejus, which might be referred to res publica),

    Cic. Mur. 39, 83:

    equites a cornibus positos, cum jam pelleretur media peditum suorum acies, incurrisse ab lateribus ferunt,

    Liv. 1, 37, 3.—
    3.
    Colloquially and in epistolary style suus is used emphatically instead of ejus, with the meaning own, peculiar: deinde ille actutum subferret suus servus poenas Sosia, his own slave (opp. Mercury, who personates Sosias), Plaut. Am. 3, 4, 19: mira erant in civitatibus ipsorum furta Graecorum quae magistratus sui fecerant, their own magistrates ( = ipsorum), Cic. Att. 6, 2, 5:

    in quibus (litteris Bruti) unum alienum summa sua prudentia (est), ut spectem ludos suos,

    his peculiar prudence, id. ib. 15, 26, 1; so,

    quod quidem ille (Nero) decernebat, quorumdam dolo ad omina sui exitus vertebatur,

    Tac. A. 16, 24; cf. II. A. 1. b and g; II. A. 2. a. b; II. B. 3.—
    4.
    Without particular emphasis (mostly ante- and post-class. and poet.):

    tum erit tempestiva cum semen suum maturum erit,

    Cato, R. R. 31:

    vitis si macra erit, sarmenta sua concidito minute,

    id. ib. 37:

    qui sic purgatus erit, diuturna valetudine utatur, neque ullus morbus veniet, nisi sua culpa,

    id. ib. 157:

    Cimon in eandem invidiam incidit quam pater suus,

    Nep. Cim. 3, 1:

    id qua ratione consecutus sit (Lysander) latet. Non enim virtute sui exercitus factum est, etc.,

    id. Lys. 1, 2:

    ipse sub Esquiliis, ubi erat regia sua, Concidit,

    Ov. F. 6, 601:

    quodque suus conjux riguo collegerat horto, Truncat olus foliis,

    id. M. 8, 646; so id. ib. 15, 819.
    II.
    In partic.
    A.
    As substt.
    1.
    sui, suorum, m., his, their (etc.) friends, soldiers, fellow-beings, equals, adherents, followers, partisans, posterity, slaves, family, etc., of persons in any near connection with the antecedent.
    (α).
    (Corresp. to the regular usage, I. A. B. C.) Cupio abducere ut reddam (i.e. eam) suis, to her family, friends, Ter. Eun. 1, 2, 77; cf. id. ib. 1, 2, 66:

    cum animus societatem caritatis coierit cum suis, omnesque natura conjunctos suos duxerit,

    fellow-beings, Cic. Leg. 1, 23, 60:

    mulier ingeniosa praecepit suis omnia Caelio pollicerentur,

    her slaves, id. Cael. 25, 62:

    quo facilius et nostras domos obire, et ipse a suis coli possit,

    his friends, id. ib. 7, 18:

    qua gratiam beneficii vestri cum suorum laude conjungant,

    their family, id. Agr. 2, 1, 1:

    vellem hanc contemptionem pecuniae suis reliquisset,

    to his posterity, id. Phil. 3, 6, 16:

    cum divisurum se urbem palam suis polliceretur,

    his partisans, id. ib. 13, 9, 19:

    Caesar, cohortatus suos, proelium commisit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 25; so,

    Curio exercitum reduxit, suis omnibus praeter Fabium incolumibus,

    id. B. C. 2, 35:

    Caesar receptui suorum timens,

    id. ib. 3, 46:

    certior ab suis factus est, praeclusas esse portas,

    id. ib. 2, 20:

    omnium suorum consensu, Curio bellum ducere parabat,

    id. ib. 2, 37: so,

    Pompejus suorum omnium hortatu statuerat proelio decertare,

    id. ib. 3, 86:

    Caesar Brundisium ad suos severius scripsit,

    to his officers, id. ib. 3, 25:

    naviculam conscendit cum paucis suis,

    a few of his followers, id. ib. 3, 104:

    multum cum suis consiliandi causa secreto praeter consuetudinem loqueretur,

    id. ib. 1, 19:

    nupsit Melino, adulescenti inprimis inter suos et honesto et nobili,

    his equals, associates, Cic. Clu. 5, 11:

    rex raptim a suis in equum impositus fugit,

    his suite, Liv. 41, 4, 7:

    subsidio suorum proelium restituere,

    comrades, id. 21, 52, 10:

    feras bestias... ad opem suis ferendam avertas,

    their young, id. 26, 13, 12:

    abstulit sibi in suos potestatem,

    his slaves, Sen. Ira, 3, 12, 6:

    Besso et Nabarzani nuntiaverant sui regem... interemptum esse,

    their fellow - conspirators, Curt. 5, 12, 14. — Very rarely sing.:

    ut bona mens suis omnibus fuerit. Si quem libido abripuit, illorum eum, cum quibus conjuravit, non suum judicet esse,

    Liv. 39, 16, 5.—
    (β).
    Irregular use (acc. to I. D.): sui = ejus amici, etc. (freq.;

    the absolute use of ejus in this sense being inadmissible): quasi vero quisquam dormiat? ne sui quidem hoc velint, non modo ipse (sui = ejus amici, liberi),

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 38, 92:

    is (annus) ejus omnem spem... morte pervertit. Fuit hoc luctuosum suis, acerbum patriae, etc.,

    id. Or. 3, 2, 8:

    quadrigas, quia per suos ( = ipsius milites) agendae erant, in prima acie locaverat rex,

    Liv. 37, 41, 8:

    auctoritatem Pisistrati qui inter suos ( = ejus cives) maxima erat,

    id. 37, 12:

    quo cum multitudine adversariorum sui superarentur, ipse fuit superior, etc.,

    Nep. Hann. 8, 4; v. g.—
    (γ).
    Without antecedent (cf. I. B. supra): quoties necesse est fallere aut falli a suis, by one ' s friends, Sen. Phoen. 493.—
    (δ).
    Sing.: sŭa, suae. f., a sweetheart, mistress (rare): illam suam suas res sibi habere jussit. Cic. Phil. 2, 28. 69:

    cedo quid hic faciet sua?

    Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 92.—
    2.
    sŭum, i, n., and more freq. sŭa, suorum, n. plur., = one ' s property.
    a.
    Sing.
    (α).
    Lit.:

    nec suom adimerem alteri,

    his property, his own, Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 38 (34):

    nunc si ille salvos revenit, reddam suom sibi (v. D. 3. a. infra),

    id. ib. 1, 2, 119:

    illum studeo quam facillime ad suum pervenire,

    Cic. Fam. 13, 26, 4:

    populi Romani hanc esse consuetudinem ut socios sui nihil deperdere velit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 43; cf. Cic. Rab. Post. 11, 3, I. A. 11. supra:

    nec donare illi de suo dicimur,

    Sen. Ben. 7, 4, 2; so esp. with quisque; v. infra — Hence, de suo = per se, or sua sponte;

    (stellae) quae per igneos tractus labentia inde splendorem trahant caloremque, non de suo clara,

    Sen. Q. N. 7, 1, 6. —
    (β).
    Trop.:

    meum mihi placebat, illi suum (of a literary essay),

    Cic. Att. 14, 20, 3: suom quemque decet, his own manners, etc., Plaut. Stich. 5, 4, 11; so, expendere oportet quid quisque habeat sui ( what peculiarities) nec velle experiri quam se aliena deceant;

    id enim maxime quemque decet quod est cujusque maxime suum,

    Cic. Off. 1, 31, 113.—
    (γ).
    Jurid. term: aliquid pro suo possidere, to possess in the belief of one ' s legal right:

    pro suo possessio tale est, cum dominium nobis acquiri putamus. Et ea causa possidemus ex qua acquiritur, et praeterea pro suo,

    Dig. 41, 10, 1;

    so without an antecedent, and referring to a first person: item re donata, pro donato et pro suo possideo,

    ib. 41, 10, 1; v. the whole tit. ib. 42, 10 (Pro suo); cf. ib. 23, 3, 67; cf. C., infra fin.;

    similarly: usucapere pro suo = acquire dominion by a possession pro suo, Fragm. Vat. 111: res pro suo, quod justam causam possidendi habet, usucapit,

    id. ib. 260; Dig. 41, 3, 27. —
    b.
    Plur.
    (α).
    One ' s property:

    Roscius tibi omnia sua praeter animam tradidit,

    Cic. Rosc. Am. 50, 146:

    qui etiam hostibus externis victis sua saepissime reddiderunt,

    id. Agr. 1, 6, 19:

    tu autem vicinis tuis Massiliensibus sua reddis,

    id. Att. 14, 14, 6:

    Remi legatos miserunt qui dicerent se suaque omnia in fidem atque potestatem populi Romani permittere,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 3, 2; 1, 11, 2; 2, 13, 2:

    ipsi milites alveos informes quibus se suaque transveherent, faciebant,

    their baggage, Liv. 21, 26, 9:

    docere eos qui sua permisere fortunae,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, praef. 7; so without an antecedent, one ' s own property (cf. I. B. 2. supra):

    hanc ob causam maxime ut sua tenerentur res publicae constitutae sunt,

    Cic. Off. 2, 21, 73;

    rarely = eorum res: quod vero etiam sua reddiderint (i.e. Gallis),

    Liv. 39, 55, 3. —
    (β).
    One ' s own affairs:

    aliena ut melius videant et dijudicent Quam sua,

    Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 96:

    cognoscunt... immobile agmen et sua quemque molientem,

    Liv. 10, 20, 8:

    omnia ei hostium non secus quam sua nota erant,

    id. 22, 41, 5:

    aliena cum suis perdidit,

    Sen. Ben. 7, 16, 3.— Absol., referring to a noun fem.: sua (finxit) C. Cassius ( = suas persuasiones; cf.

    the context),

    Quint. 6, 3, 90.
    B.
    Predicative uses: suum esse, facere, fieri, putare, etc., like a gen. poss., to be, etc., the property, or under the dominion, control, power of the antecedent.
    1.
    Of property in things.
    (α).
    Corporeal:

    scripsit causam dicere Prius aurum quare sit suum,

    Ter. Eun. prol. 11:

    nihil erat cujusquam quod non hoc anno suum fore putabat (Clodius),

    Cic. Mil. 32, 87:

    quia suum cujusque fit, eorum quae natura fuerant communia quod cuique obtigit, id quisque teneat,

    id. Off. 1, 7, 21:

    Juba suam esse praedicans praedam,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 84:

    gratum sibi populum facturum, si omnes res Neapolitanorum suas duxissent,

    Liv. 22, 32, 8: libros esse dicimus Ciceronis;

    eosdem Dorus librarius suos vocat,

    Sen. Ben. 7, 6, 1:

    cum enim istarum personarum nihil suum esse possit,

    since these persons can own nothing, Gai. Inst. 2, 96; cf. Dig. 1, 7, 15 pr.—Virtually predicative:

    referas ad eos qui suam rem nullam habent ( = rem quae sua sit),

    nothing of their own, Cic. Phil. 2, 6, 15:

    qui in potestate nostra est, nihil suum habere potest,

    Gai. Inst. 2, 84. — ( b) Of literary works:

    quae convenere in Andriam ex Perinthia Fatetur transtulisse, atque usum pro suis ( = quasi sua essent),

    Ter. And. prol. 14:

    potest autem... quae tum audiet... ingenue pro suis dicere,

    his own thoughts, Quint. 12, 3, 3.—
    (γ).
    Of a country or people:

    suum facere = suae dicionis facere: commemorat ut (Caesar) magnam partem Italiae beneficio atque auctoritate eorum suam fecerit,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 32:

    in quam (Asiam) jam ex parte suam fecerit,

    Liv. 44, 24, 4:

    crudelissima ac superbissima gens sua omnia suique arbitrii facit,

    id. 21, 44, 5.—
    (δ).
    Trop.:

    omnia sua putavit quae vos vestra esse velletis,

    Cic. Phil. 11, 12, 27:

    non meminit, illum exercitum senatus populique Romani esse, non suum,

    id. ib. 13, 6, 4: [p. 1826] probavit, non rempublicam suam esse, sed se reipublicae, Sen. Clem. 1, 19, 8;

    so of incorporeal things: hi si velint scire quam brevis eorum vita sit, cogitent ex quota parte sua sit,

    how much of it is their own, id. Brev. Vit. 19, 3; so, suum facere, to appropriate:

    prudentis est, id quod in quoque optimum est, si possit, suum facere,

    Quint. 10, 2, 26:

    quaeremus quomodo animus (hanc virtutem) usu suam faciat,

    Sen. Clem. 1, 3, 1.—
    2.
    Of persons.
    (α).
    Under a master ' s or father ' s control:

    ut lege caverent, ne quis quem civitatis mutandae causa suum faceret, neve alienaret,

    make any one his slave, Liv. 41, 8, 12: quid eam tum? suamne esse ajebat, his daughter, i.e. in his power? Ter. And. 5, 4, 29:

    eduxit mater pro sua ( = quasi sua esset),

    id. Eun. 1, 2, 76.—
    (β).
    Reflexively = sui juris, independent, one ' s own master or mistress, not subject to another ' s control, under one ' s own control (v. sui juris, infra):

    ancilla, quae mea fuit hodie, sua nunc est,

    Plaut. Pers. 4, 3, 3.—
    (γ).
    Of moral power over others: suus = devoted to one:

    hice hoc munere arbitrantur Suam Thaidem esse,

    Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 38:

    eos hic fecit suos Paulo sumptu,

    id. Ad. 5, 4, 21:

    sed istunc exora, ut (mulierem) suam esse adsimulet,

    to be friendly to him, id. Heaut. 2, 3, 117:

    cum Antonio sic agens ut perspiciat, si in eo negotio nobis satisfecerit, totum me futurum suum,

    Cic. Att. 14, 1 a, 2:

    Alpheus... utebatur populo sane suo,

    devoted to him, id. Quint. 7, 29.— Poet.: vota suos habuere deos, the vows (inst. of the persons uttering them) had the gods on their side, Ov. M. 4, 373. —
    (δ).
    Of power over one's self, etc.:

    nam qui sciet ubi quidque positum sit, quaque eo veniat, is poterit eruere, semperque esse in disputando suus,

    self-possessed, Cic. Fin. 4, 4, 10:

    inaestimabile bonum est suum fieri,

    selfcontrol, Sen. Ep. 75, 18:

    (furiosus) qui suus non est,

    Dig. 42, 4, 7, § 9:

    vix sua, vix sanae virgo Niseia compos Mentis erat,

    Ov. M. 8, 35. —
    3.
    Suum est, as impers. predicate: = ejus est, characteristic of, peculiar to one (very rare):

    dixit antea, sed suum illud est, nihil ut affirmet,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 42, 99.
    C.
    Attributive usages, almost always (except in Seneca) with suus before its noun.
    1.
    The property, relations, affairs, etc., of one opposed to those of another, own.
    a.
    Opposition expressed:

    nihil de suo casu, multa de vestro querebatur,

    Cic. Balb. 8, 21:

    sua sibi propiora pericula quam mea loquebantur,

    id. Sest. 18, 40:

    suasque et imperatoris laudes canentes,

    Liv. 45, 38, 12:

    damnatione collegae et sua,

    id. 22, 35, 3:

    Senecae fratris morte pavidum et pro sua incolumitate pavidum,

    Tac. A. 14, 73:

    velut pro Vitellio conquerentes suum dolorem proferebant,

    id. H. 3, 37;

    opp. alienus: ut suo potius tempore mercatorem admitterent, quam celerius alieno,

    at a time convenient to themselves, Varr. R. R. 3, 16, 11. —Without antecedent, opp. externus:

    (Platoni) duo placet esse motus, unum suum, alterum externum, esse autem divinius quod ipsum ex se sua sponte moveatur, etc.,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 12, 32. —
    b.
    Implied:

    voluptatem suis se finibus tenere jubeamus,

    within the limits assigned to it, Cic. Fin. 3, 1, 1:

    cum vobis immortale monumentum suis paene manibus senatus... exstruxerit,

    id. Phil. 14, 12, 33:

    superiores (amnes) in Italia, hic (Rhodanus) trans Alpes, hospitales suas tantum, nec largiores quam intulere aquas vehentes,

    Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 224: colligitur aqua ex imbribus;

    ex suo fonte nativa est,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 3:

    pennas ambo non habuere suas (non suas = alienas),

    Ov. Tr. 3, 4, 24. —
    c.
    In particular phrases. ( a) Sua sponte and suo Marte, of one ' s own accord, by one ' s self, without the suggestion, influence, aid, etc., of others:

    Caesar bellum contra Antonium sua sponte suscepit,

    Cic. Phil. 8, 2, 5:

    sua sponte ad Caesarem in jus adierunt,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 87.—So of things, = per se, by or of itself, for itself, for its own sake:

    jus et omne honestum sua sponte expetendum (cf. in the context: per se igitur jus est expetendum),

    Cic. Leg. 1, 18, 48: justitium sua sponte inceptum priusquam indiceretur, by itself, i. e. without a decree, Liv. 9, 7, 8; so,

    sortes sua sponte attenuatas,

    id. 22, 1, 11 (cf. id. 22, 38, 13; 35, 14, 4, I. A. 2., supra): rex enim ipse, sua sponte, nullis commentariis Caesaris, simul atque audivit ejus interitum suo Marte res suas recuperavit, Cic. Phil. 2, 37, 95.—
    (β).
    Suus locus, in milit. lang., one ' s own ground, position, or lines:

    restitit suo loco Romana acies (opp. to the advance of the enemy),

    Liv. 22, 16, 2.—So figuratively:

    et staturas suo loco leges,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 20, 2:

    aciem instruxit primum suis locis, pauloque a castris Pompeji longius,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 84 (cf.: suo loco, 7. b. g, infra).—
    (γ).
    For suo jure v. 3. infra.—
    (δ).
    Sua Venus = one's own Venus, i. e. good luck (v. Venus): ille non est mihi par virtutibus, nec officiis;

    sed habuit suam Venerem,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 28, 2. —
    2.
    Of private relations (opp. to public):

    ut in suis rebus, ita in re publica luxuriosus nepos,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 18, 48:

    deinde ut communibus pro communibus utatur, privatis ut suis,

    id. Off. 1, 7, 20:

    quod oppidum Labienus sua pecunia exaedificaverat,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 15:

    militibus agros ex suis possessionibus pollicetur,

    i. e. his private property, id. ib. 1, 17; Sen. Ben. 7, 6, 3. —
    3.
    Of just rights or claims:

    imperatori senatuique honos suus redditus,

    due to them, Liv. 3, 10, 3:

    neque inpedimento fuit, quominus religionibus suus tenor suaque observatio redderetur,

    Val. Max. 1, 1, 8:

    quibus omnibus debetur suus decor,

    Quint. 11, 1, 41. —

    So distributively: is mensibus suis dimisit legionem,

    in the month in which each soldier was entitled to his discharge, Liv. 40, 41, 8. — Esp.: suo jure (so, meo, nostro, tuo, etc., jure), by his own right:

    Tullus Hostilius qui suo jure in porta nomen inscripsit,

    Cic. Phil. 13, 12, 26:

    earum rerum hic A. Licinius fructum a me repetere prope suo jure debet,

    id. Arch. 1, 1; id. Marcell. 2, 6; id. Phil. 2, 25, 62; id. Balb. 8, 21:

    numquam illum res publica suo jure esset ulta,

    by its unquestionable right, id. Mil. 33, 88. —
    4.
    Of that to which one is exclusively devoted:

    huic quaestioni suum diem dabimus,

    a day for its exclusive discussion, Sen. Ep. 94, 52:

    homini autem suum bonum ratio est,

    his exclusive good, id. ib. 76, 10:

    in majorem me quaestionem vocas, cui suus locus, suus dies dandus est,

    id. Q. N. 2, 46, 1. —

    With proprius: mentio inlata apud senatum est, rem suo proprio magistratu egere,

    that the business needed a particular officer exclusively for itself, Liv. 4, 8, 4:

    et Hannibalem suo proprio occupandum bello,

    id. 27, 38, 7; cf.:

    dissupasset hostes, ni suo proprio eum proelio equites Volscorum exceptum tenuissent,

    in which they alone fought, id. 3, 70, 4:

    mare habet suas venas quibus impletur,

    by which it alone is fed, Sen. Q. N. 3, 14, 3. —
    5.
    According to one ' s liking, of one ' s own choice.
    a.
    Of persons, devoted to one, friendly, dear:

    Milone occiso (Clodius) habuisset suos consules,

    after his own heart, Cic. Mil. 33, 89:

    collegit ipse se contra suum Clodium,

    his dear Clodius, id. Pis. 12, 27 (cf.: suum facere, habere, II. B. 2. g).—
    b.
    Of things, favorable.
    (α).
    Of place: neque Jugurtham nisi... suo loco pugnam facere, on his own ground, i. e. chosen by him, favorable, Sall. J. 61, 1:

    hic magna auxilia expectabant et suis locis bellum in hiemem ducere cogitabant,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 61; cf.:

    numquam nostris locis laboravimus,

    Liv. 9, 19, 15.—
    (β).
    Of time:

    cum Perseus suo maxime tempore et alieno hostibus incipere bellum posset,

    Liv. 42, 43, 3; v. 7. b, infra. —
    c.
    Of circumstances: sua occasio, a favorable opportunity; sometimes without antecedent:

    neque occasioni tuae desis, neque suam occasionem hosti des,

    Liv. 22, 39, 21:

    tantum abfuit ut ex incommodo alieno sua occasio peteretur,

    id. 4, 58, 2:

    aestuque suo Locros trajecit,

    a favorable tide, id. 23, 41, 11:

    ignoranti quem portum petat nullus suus ventus est,

    Sen. Ep. 71, 3:

    orba suis essent etiamnunc lintea ventis,

    Ov. M. 13, 195:

    aut ille Ventis iturus non suis,

    Hor. Epod. 9, 30. —
    6.
    Of persons or things, peculiar, particular:

    quae est ei (animo) natura? Propria, puto, et sua,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 29, 70:

    omnis enim motus animi suum quendam a natura habet vultum,

    id. de Or. 3, 57, 316:

    geometrae et musici... more quodam loquuntur suo. Ipsae rhetorum artes verbis in docendo quasi privatis utuntur ac suis,

    id. Fin. 3, 1, 4:

    sensus omnis habet suum finem,

    its peculiar limits, Quint. 9, 4, 61: animus cum suum ambitum complevit et finibus se suis cinxit, consummatum est summum bonum, Sen. Vit. Beat. 9, 3: est etiam in nominibus ( nouns) diverso collocatis sua gratia, their peculiar elegance, Quint. 9, 3, 86:

    ibi non bello aperto, sed suis artibus, fraude et insidiis, est paene circumventus,

    Liv. 21, 34, 1:

    nec Hannibalem fefellit, suis se artibus peti,

    id. 22, 16, 5:

    adversus hostem non virtute tantum, sed suis (i. e. hostis) etiam pugnare consiliis oportebat,

    Flor. 2, 6, 26:

    liberam Minucii temeritatem se suo modo expleturum,

    Liv. 22, 28, 2:

    equites ovantes sui moris carmine,

    id. 10, 26, 11:

    exsultans cum sui moris tripudiis,

    id. 21, 42, 3:

    tripudiantes suo more,

    id. 23, 26, 9.—So, suo Marte, referring to the style of fighting peculiar to the different arms:

    equitem suo alienoque Marte pugnare,

    that the cavalry were fighting both in their own style and in that of the other arms, Liv. 3, 62, 9; cf.: suo Marte, 1, c. a, supra.—And distributively ( = suus quisque):

    suos autem haec operum genera ut auctores, sic etiam amatores habent,

    Quint. 12, 10, 2:

    illa vero fatidica fulmina ex alto et ex suis venire sideribus,

    Plin. 2, 43, 43, § 113; cf.:

    quae quidem planiora suis exemplis reddentur,

    Val. Max. 3, 4 prooem.—
    7.
    Proper, right.
    a.
    Referring to one's ordinary or normal condition:

    quod certe non fecisset, si suum numerum naves habuissent,

    their regular complement, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 51, § 133. — So poet.:

    flecte ratem! numerum non habet illa suum,

    its full number, Ov. H. 10, 36:

    novus exercitus consulibus est decretus: binae legiones cum suo equitatu,

    Liv. 40, 36, 6:

    cum suo justo equitatu,

    id. 21, 17, 8:

    totam (disciplinam) in suum statum redegit,

    Val. Max. 2, 7, 2:

    tranquilla mente et vultu suo,

    with the ordinary expression of his face, Sen. Clem. 2, 6, 2:

    media pars aeris ab his (ignibus) submota, in frigore suo manet. Natura enim aeris gelida est,

    id. Q. N. 2, 10, 4:

    cornuaque in patriis non sua vidit aquis,

    not natural to her, Ov. H. 14, 90. —

    So, non suus, of ingrafted branches and their fruit: miraturque (arbos) novas frondis et non sua poma,

    Verg. G. 2, 82. —
    b.
    Of time, proper, regular, etc. (cf. 5. b, supra).
    (α).
    The regular time ( = stato tempore):

    signum quod semper tempore exoritur suo,

    Plaut. Rud. prol. 4:

    cum et recte et suo tempore pepererit,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 16: aestas suo tempore incanduit...;

    tam solstitium quam aequinoctium suos dies retulit,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 16, 3:

    omnes venti vicibus suis spirant majore ex parte,

    Plin. 2, 47, 48, § 128. —
    (β).
    The right or proper time:

    salictum suo tempore caedito,

    Cato, R. R. 33:

    cessit e vita suo magis quam suorum civium tempore,

    the right time for himself, Cic. Brut. 1, 4; so,

    exstingui homini suo tempore optabile est,

    id. Sen. 23, 85:

    Scandilius dicit se suo tempore rediturum,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 60, § 139:

    si Ardeates sua tempora exspectare velint,

    Liv. 4, 7, 6:

    Chrysippus dicit, illum... opperiri debere suum tempus, ad quod velut dato signo prosiliat,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 25, 3:

    quam multi exercitus tempore suo victorem hostem pepulerunt!

    Liv. 44, 39, 4. — Without antecedent: sed suo tempore totius sceleris hujus fons aperietur. Cic. Phil. 14, 6, 15; cf.:

    de ordine laudis, etc., praecipiemus suo tempore,

    Quint. 2, 4, 21. —
    (γ).
    Suo loco = at the proper place:

    quae erant prudentiae propria suo loco dicta sunt,

    Cic. Off. 1, 40, 143:

    quod reddetur suo loco,

    Quint. 11, 1, 16:

    ut suo loco dicetur,

    Plin. 2, 90, 102, § 221:

    inscripta quae suis locis reddam,

    id. 1, prooem. § 27; Sen. Ben. 2, 20, 2; cf. 1, c. b; 4. supra. —
    (δ).
    Suited, appropriate, adapted to one:

    in eodem fundo suum quidquid conseri oportet,

    Cato, R. R. 7:

    siquidem hanc vendidero pretio suo,

    at a suitable price, Plaut. Pers. 4, 4, 30:

    in partes suas digerenda causa,

    Quint. 11, 1, 6:

    confundetur quidquid in suas partes natura digessit,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 29, 8. — Poet.: haec ego dumque queror, lacrimae sua verba sequuntur, Deque meis oculis in tua membra cadunt, appropriate, i. e. tristia, Ov. H. 14, 67.—Without antecedent: suum quidquid genus talearum serito, any fit kind, i. e. suited to the ground, Cato, R. R. 48. —
    8.
    Own, with the notion of independence of, or dependence on others (cf. B. 2. g d).
    a.
    Of political independence: pacem condicionibus his fecerunt ut Capuae suae leges, sui magistratus essent, her own laws, i. e. not subject to Carthage, Liv. 23, 7, 2: liberos [p. 1827] eos ac suis legibus victuros, id. 25, 23, 4. —

    Esp. in the phrases suae potestatis or in sua potestate esse, suo jure uti, sui juris esse: Puteolos, qui nunc in sua potestate sunt, suo jure, libertate aequa utuntur, totos occupabunt,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 31, 86:

    Rhegini potestatis suae ad ultimum remanserunt,

    retained their self-government, Liv. 23, 30, 9:

    urbem ne quam formulae sui juris facerent,

    id. 38, 9, 10. —
    b.
    Of paternal authority.
    (α).
    Free from the power of the paterfamilias; in the phrases sui juris esse, suae potestatis esse, to be independent:

    quaedam personae sui juris sunt, quaedam alieno juri sunt subjectae, Gai,

    Inst. 1, 48:

    sui juris sunt familiarum suarum principes, id est pater familiae, itemque mater familiae,

    Ulp. Fragm. 4, 1:

    liberi parentum potestate liberantur emancipatione. Sed filius quidem ter manumissus sui juris fit, ceteri autem liberi una manumissione sui juris fiunt,

    id. ib. 10, 1:

    morte patris filius et filia sui juris fiunt,

    id. ib. 10, 2:

    patres familiarum sunt qui sunt suae potestatis,

    Dig. 1, 6, 4:

    si modo defunctus testator suae potestatis mortis tempore fuerit,

    Gai. Inst. 2, 147. —

    With indef. reference: si sui juris sumus,

    Dig. 46, 2, 20; cf.:

    pro suo possideo, 2. a. supra.—Attributively: sui juris arrogatio feminae,

    Cod. Just. 8, 47, 8:

    homo sui juris,

    ib. 10, § 5.— Trop.:

    sapiens numquam semiliber erit: integrae semper libertatis et sui juris,

    Sen. Brev. Vit. 5, 3:

    non illarum coitu fieri cometen, sed proprium et sui juris esse,

    id. Q. N. 7, 12, 2: nullique sunt tam feri et sui juris adfectus, ut non disciplina perdomentur, id. Ira, 2, 12, 3. —
    (β).
    Subject to paternal authority, in the phrases suus heres, sui liberi; suus heres, an heir who had been in the paternal power of the deceased:

    CVI SVVS HERES NON SIT, XII. Tab. fr. 5, 4.—In the jurists without antecedent: sui et necessarii heredes sunt velut filius filiave, nepos neptisve ex filia, deinceps ceteri qui modo in potestate morientis fuerunt,

    Gai. Inst. 2, 156:

    (emancipati liberi) non sunt sui heredes,

    ib. 2, 135:

    alia facta est juris interpretatio inter suos heredes,

    ib. 3, 15:

    datur patrono adversus suos heredes bonorum possessio (where patrono is not the antecedent of suos),

    ib. 3, 41:

    sui heredes vel instituendi sunt vel exheredandi,

    Ulp. Fragm. 22, 14:

    accrescunt suis quidem heredibus in partem virilem, extraneis autem in partem dimidiam,

    id. ib. 22, 17. —

    Sui liberi, children in paternal power: de suis et legitimis liberis,

    Cod. Just. 6, 55 inscr.
    D.
    In particular connections.
    1.
    With ipse, his own, etc. (cf. Zumpt, Gram. § 696).
    a.
    Ipse agreeing with the antecedent of suus, the antecedent being,
    (α).
    A subjectnom.:

    (ingenium ejus) valet ipsum suis viribus,

    by its own strength, Cic. Cael. 19, 45:

    legio Martia non ipsa suis decretis hostem judicavit Antonium?

    by its own resolutions, id. Phil. 4, 2, 5:

    ruit ipse suis cladibus,

    id. ib. 14, 3, 8:

    si ex scriptis cognosci ipsi suis potuissent,

    id. de Or. 2, 2, 8:

    qui se ipse sua gravitate et castimonia defenderet,

    id. Cael. 5, 11:

    quod ipse suae civitatis imperium obtenturus esset,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 3:

    suamet ipsae fraude omnes interierunt,

    Liv. 8, 18, 9; 39, 49, 3:

    ut saeviret ipse in suum sanguinem effecerunt,

    id. 40, 5, 1:

    respicerent suum ipsi exercitum,

    id. 42, 52, 10; 21, 31, 12; 22, 38, 3; 6, 19, 6.—
    (β).
    A subject-acc.:

    sunt qui dicant eam sua ipsam peremptam mercede,

    Liv. 1, 11, 9:

    (tribuniciam potestatem) suis ipsam viribus dissolvi,

    id. 2, 44, 2.—
    (γ).
    An object in dat. or acc.:

    sic ut ipsis consistendi in suis munitionibus locus non esset,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 6:

    tribuni (hostem) intra suamet ipsum moenia compulere,

    Liv. 6, 36, 4:

    alios sua ipsos invidia opportunos interemit,

    id. 1, 54, 8; 22, 14, 13.—Suus as adjunct of subject (rare):

    aliquando sua praesidia in ipsos consurrexerunt,

    their own garrisons revolted against them, Sen. Clem. 1, 26, 1.—
    b.
    With gen. of ipse, strengthening the possessive notion (cf. 4.;

    post-Aug. and very rare, but freq. in modern Lat.): aves (foetus suos) libero caelo suaeque ipsorum fiduciae permittunt,

    Quint. 2, 6, 7 (but tuus ipsius occurs in Cic.:

    tuo ipsius studio,

    Cic. Mur. 4, 9:

    tuam ipsius amicitiam,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 4, § 7).—
    c.
    Both suus and ipse agreeing with the governing noun (very rare; not in Cic. or Caes.): quae tamen in ipso cursu suo dissipata est (= ipsa in cursu suo), in its very course, Sen. Q. N. 1, 1, 3 dub.:

    suamet ipsa scelera,

    Sall. C. 23, 2 (Dietsch ex conj. ipse):

    suismet ipsis corporibus,

    Liv. 2, 19, 5 MSS. (Weissenb. ex conj. ipsi):

    a suismet ipsis praesidiis,

    id. 8, 25, 6 MSS. (Weissenb. ipsi).—
    2.
    With quisque, distributively, each ( every one)... his own; in prose quisque is generally preceded by suus.
    a.
    Quisque and suus in different cases.
    (α).
    Quisque as subjectnom.:

    sentit enim vim quisque suam quoad possit abuti,

    Lucr. 5, 1033:

    suo quisque loco cubet,

    Cato, R. R. 5:

    suum quisque noscat ingenium,

    Cic. Off. 1, 31, 114:

    ad suam quisque (me disciplinam) rapiet,

    id. Ac. 2, 36, 114:

    quod suos quisque servos in tali re facere voluisset,

    id. Mil. 10, 29:

    cum suo quisque auxilio uteretur,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 51:

    celeriter ad suos quisque ordines redit,

    id. ib. 3, 37.—In apposition with plur. subj. (freq. in Liv.):

    nunc alii sensus quo pacto quisque suam rem Sentiat,

    Lucr. 4, 522:

    ut omnes cives Romani in suis quisque centuriis prima luce adessent,

    that all the Roman citizens should be present, each in his own centuria, Liv. 1, 44, 1:

    hinc senatus, hinc plebs, suum quisque intuentes ducem constiterant,

    id. 6, 15, 3:

    ut (trigemini) pro sua quisque patria dimicent,

    id. 1, 24, 2:

    stabant compositi suis quisque ordinibus,

    id. 44, 38, 11:

    (consules) in suas quisque provincias proficiscuntur,

    id. 25, 12, 2; 25, 26, 13:

    in suo quaeque (stella) motu naturam suam exercent,

    Plin. 2, 39, 39, § 106.—With abl. absol.:

    omnes, velut dis auctoribus in spem suam quisque acceptis, proelium una voce poscunt,

    Liv. 21, 45, 9 Weissenb. ad loc.:

    relictis suis quisque stationibus... concurrerunt,

    id. 32, 24, 4; 4, 44, 10; 39, 49, 3; 2, 38, 6.—
    (β).
    With acc. of quisque as subj.:

    fabrum esse suae quemque fortunae, App. Claud. ap. Ps.-Sall. Ep. ad Caes. Rep. c. l.: sui quemque juris et retinendi et dimittendi esse dominum,

    Cic. Balb. 13, 31:

    recipere se in domos suas quemque jussit,

    Liv. 25, 10, 9; and (ungrammatically) nom., as apposition to a subj.-acc.:

    se non modo suam quisque patriam, sed totam Siciliam relicturos,

    id. 26, 29, 3 MSS. (Weissenb. ex conj. quosque).—
    (γ).
    As adjunct of the subject-nom., with a case of quisque as object, attribut. gen., etc.:

    sua cujusque animantis natura est,

    Cic. Fin. 5, 9, 25:

    sua quemque fraus, suum facinus, suum scelus, etc., de sanitate ac mente deturbat,

    id. Pis. 20, 46:

    sua quemque fraus et suus terror maxime vexat,

    id. Rosc. Am. 24, 67:

    suum cuique incommodum ferendum est,

    id. Off. 3, 6, 30:

    ut solidum suum cuique solvatur,

    id. Rab. Post. 17, 46:

    ne suus cuique domi hostis esset,

    Liv. 3, 16, 3:

    ut sua cuique respublica in manu esset,

    id. 26, 8, 11:

    animus suus cuique ordinem pugnandi dabat,

    id. 22, 5, 8:

    tentorium suum cuique militi domus ac penates sunt,

    id. 44, 39, 5:

    suus cuique (stellae) color est,

    Plin. 2, 18, 16, § 79:

    trahit sua quemque voluptas,

    Verg. E. 2, 65:

    stat sua cuique dies,

    id. A. 10, 467.—
    (δ).
    As predicate-nom. (v. II. B.):

    opinionem, quae sua cuique conjectanti esse potest,

    Liv. 6, 12, 3.—
    (ε).
    As adjunct of subj.-acc.:

    suum cuique honorem et gradum redditum gaudeo,

    Cic. Rosc. Am. 47, 136:

    scientiam autem suam cujusque artis esse,

    id. Fin. 5, 9, 26.—
    (ζ).
    As adjunct of an object, with a case of quisque as object or attribut. gen.: suam cuique sponsam, mihi meam: suum cuique amorem, mihi meum, Atil. Fragm. inc. 1: suom cuique per me uti atque frui licet, Cato ap. Gell. 13, 24 (23), 1:

    ut suo quemque appellem nomine,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 2, 52:

    placet Stoicis suo quamque rem nomine appellare,

    Cic. Fam. 9, 22, 1:

    ad suam cujusque naturam consilium est omne revocandum,

    id. Off. 1, 33, 119:

    justitia quae suum cuique distribuit,

    id. N. D. 3, 15, 38:

    in tribuendo suum cuique,

    id. Off. 1, 5, 14:

    Turnus sui cuique periculi recens erat documentum,

    Liv. 1, 52, 4:

    in trimatu suo cuique dimidiam esse mensuram futurae certum esse,

    Plin. 7, 15, 16, § 73:

    certa cuique rerum suarum possessio,

    Vell. 2, 89, 4; cf.: qua re suum unicuique studium suaque omnibus delectatio relinquatur, Ps.-Cic. Cons. 26, 93.—With quemque in apposition with acc. plur.:

    Camillus vidit intentos opifices suo quemque operi,

    Liv. 6, 25, 9; so cujusque in appos. with gen. plur.: trium clarissimorum suae cujusque gentis virorum mors, id. 39, 52, 7; and cuique with dat. plur.: sui cuique mores fingunt fortunam hominibus, Poet. ap. Nep. Att. 11, 6 (where Lachm. ad Lucr. 2, 372, reads quique, ex conj.; cf. b. b, infra).—
    b.
    Attraction of suus and quisque as adjuncts of nouns.
    (α).
    Attraction of suus:

    ut nemo sit nostrum quin in sensibus sui cujusque generis judicium requirat acrius (= suum cujusque generis judicium),

    Cic. Ac. 2, 7, 19:

    quas tamen inter omnes (voces) est suo quoque in genere (vox) mediocris ( = inter omnes voces est mediocris vox, sua quoque in genere),

    id. de Or. 3, 57, 216:

    eo concilia suae cujusque regionis indici jussit (= sua cujusque regionis concilia),

    Liv. 45, 29, 10:

    equites suae cuique parti post principia collocat (= equites suos cuique parti),

    id. 3, 22, 6:

    cum motibus armorum et corporum suae cuique genti assuetis,

    id. 25, 17, 5:

    legiones deducebantur cum tribunis et centurionibus et sui cujusque ordinis militibus (= suis cujusque),

    Tac. A. 14, 27:

    quae sui cujusque sunt ingenii,

    Quint. 7, 10, 10 Halm (al. sua):

    sui cujusque ingenii poma vel semina gerunt (= sua cujusque),

    Col. 3, 1;

    and by a double attraction: has (cohortes) subsidiariae ternae et aliae totidem suae cujusque legionis subsequebantur (= has cohortes... totidem cujusque legionis, suam quaeque legionem, subsequebantur),

    Caes. B. C. 1, 83. —
    (β).
    Attraction of quisque:

    tanta ibi copia venustatum in suo quique loco sita,

    Plaut. Poen. 5, 4, 6 (al. quaeque):

    quodvis frumentum non tamen omne Quique suo genere inter se simile esse videbis,

    Lucr. 2, 372 Lachm. and Munro ad loc.:

    cum verba debeant sui cujusque generis copulari,

    Varr. L. L. 10, 48:

    in sensibus sui cujusque generis judicium,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 7, 19:

    haec igitur proclivitas ad suum quodque genus aegrotatio dicatur,

    id. Tusc. 4, 12, 28:

    separatim greges sui cujusque generis nocte remeabant (= greges sui quisque generis),

    Liv. 24, 3, 5:

    ut sui cujusque mensis acciperet (frumentum),

    Suet. Aug. 40;

    and quisque both attracted and in its own case: quia cujusque partis naturae et in corpore et in animo sua quaeque vis sit (where either cujusque or quaeque is redundant),

    Cic. Fin. 5, 17, 46; v. Madv. ad loc.; Cato, R. R. 23 fin.;

    so esp. in the phrases suo quoque tempore, anno, die, loco, etc.: pecunia, quae in stipendium Romanis suo quoque anno penderetur, deerat (= suo quaeque anno),

    each instalment in the year when due, Liv. 33, 46, 9 Weissenb. ad loc.:

    suo quoque loco,

    Varr. R. R. 1, 7, 2; 1, 22, 6:

    opera quae suis quibusque temporibus anni vilicum exsequi oporteret,

    Col. 11, 3:

    suo quoque tempore,

    Vitr. 2, 9, 4:

    nisi sua quaque die usurae exsolverentur (= sua quaeque die),

    Dig. 22, 1, 12 init.; 13, 7, 8, § 3:

    ut opera rustica suo quoque tempore faciat,

    ib. 19, 2, 25, § 3 (al. quaeque)—
    c.
    In the order quisque... suus.
    (α).
    In relative clauses, comparative clauses with ut, and interrogative clauses introduced by quid, etc., where quisque immediately follows the relative, etc.:

    ut quisque suom volt esse, ita est,

    Ter. Ad. 3, 3, 45; cf.

    with sibi,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 18, 49; id. Lael. 9, 30:

    expendere oportere quid quisque habeat sui... nec velle experiri quam se aliena deceant. Id enim maxime quemque decet quod est cujusque maxime suum,

    id. Off. 1, 31, 113:

    neque solum quid in senatu quisque civitatis suae dicerent ignorabant, sed, etc.,

    Liv. 32, 19, 9:

    gratius id fore laetiusque quod quisque sua manu ex hoste captum rettulerit,

    id. 5, 20, 8; 6, 25, 10; cf.:

    in quibus cum multa sint quae sua quisque dicere velit, nihil est quod quisque suum possit dicere,

    Sen. Vit. Beat. 23, 1.—
    (β).
    If the emphasis is not on suus, but (for quisque, when emphatic, unusquisque is used) on some other word:

    in civitates quemque suas... dimisit,

    Liv. 21, 48, 2:

    in patriam quisque suam remissus est,

    Just. 33, 2, 8:

    in vestigio quemque suo vidit,

    Liv. 28, 22, 15; cf.:

    hospitibus quisque suis scribebant,

    id. 33, 45, 6:

    pro facultatibus quisque suis,

    id. 42, 53, 3; cf.:

    respiciendae sunt cuique facultates suae,

    Sen. Ben. 2, 15, 3:

    praecipitat quisque vitam suam et futuri desiderio laborat,

    id. Brev. Vit. 7, 5; id. Ben. 7, 5, 1:

    tunc praeceps quisque se proripit et penates suos deserit,

    id. Q. N. 6, 1, 5; 5, 18, 8:

    summum quisque causae suae judicem facit,

    Plin. 1, prooem. § 10: aestimatione nocturnae [p. 1828] quietis, dimidio quisque spatio vitae suae vivit, id. 7, 50, 51, § 167.—
    (γ).
    Poets adopt the order quisque suus when the metre requires it, Verg. A. 6, 743:

    oscula quisque suae matri tulerunt,

    Ov. F. 2, 715. —
    (δ).
    When suus and quisque belong to different clauses:

    atque earum quaeque, suum tenens munus... manet in lege naturae,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 13, 38. —
    d.
    Suus uterque, or uterque suus, distributively of two subjects:

    suas uterque legiones reducit in castra,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 40; 2, 28:

    ideo quod uterque suam legem confirmare debebit,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 49, 142:

    cum sui utrosque adhortarentur,

    Liv. 1, 25, 1:

    ad utrumque ducem sui redierunt,

    id. 21, 29, 5:

    utraque (lex) sua via it,

    Sen. Ben. 6, 6, 1; cf.

    uterque, in apposit.: nec ipsi tam inter se acriter contenderunt, quam studia excitaverant uterque sui corporis hominum,

    Liv. 26, 48, 6.—
    3.
    With sibi.
    (α).
    Sibi with pronom. force (cf. sui, IV. C. fin.):

    reddam suum sibi,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 119 ( = ei; but referred to b, infra, by Brix ad loc.); cf.:

    suam rem sibi salvam sistam,

    id. Poen. 5, 2, 123:

    idem lege sibi sua curationem petet,

    for himself, Cic. Agr. 2, 9, 22 (cf. id. Phil. 2, 37, 96;

    I. B. 2. b. supra): ut vindicare sibi suum fulgorem possint,

    Sen. Q. N. 1, 1, 11; cf.

    the formula of divorce: tuas res tibi habeto,

    Dig. 24, 2, 2.—Hence, illam suam suas res sibi habere jussit, Cic. Phil. 2, 28, 69.—
    (β).
    With sibi redundant, to strengthen suus (anteand post-class. and colloq.):

    quo pacto serviat suo sibi patri,

    Plaut. Capt. prol. 5:

    eum necabam ilico per cerebrum pinna sua sibi, quasi turturem,

    id. Poen. 2, 40; v. sui, IV. C. and the passages there cited.—
    4.
    With gen. agreeing with the subject of suus:

    quas cum solus pertulisset ut sua unius in his gratia esset,

    that the credit of it should belong to him alone, Liv. 2, 8, 3:

    qui de sua unius sententia omnia gerat,

    id. 44, 22, 11; cf.:

    unam Aegyptus in hoc spem habet suam,

    Sen. Q. N. 4, 2, 2.—For suus ipsius, etc., v. D. 1. b. supra.—
    5.
    With demonstr., rel., or indef. pronn. and adjj., of his, hers, etc.:

    postulat ut ad hanc suam praedam adjutores vos profiteamini,

    to this booty of his, Cic. Rosc. Am. 2, 6:

    Sestius cum illo exercitu suo,

    id. Sest. 5, 12:

    qua gravitate sua,

    id. ib. 61, 129:

    suam rem publicam illam defenderunt,

    that republic of theirs, id. ib. 67, 141:

    in istum civem suum,

    against this citizen of theirs, id. Balb. 18, 41:

    cum illo suo pari,

    id. Pis. 8, 18:

    te nulla sua calamitate civitas satiare potest?

    id. Phil. 8, 6, 19:

    dubitatis igitur, quin vos M. Laterensis ad suam spem aliquam delegerit,

    for some hope of his, id. Planc. 16, 39:

    non tam sua ulla spe quam militum impetu tractus,

    by any hope of his, Liv. 25, 21, 5:

    nullo suo merito,

    from no fault of theirs, id. 26, 29, 4:

    ipse arcano cum paucis familiaribus suis colloquitur,

    with a few of his friends, Caes. B. C. 1, 19.—
    6.
    With descriptive adjj.
    (α).
    Standing before the adj. and noun (so most freq.):

    suorum improbissimorum sermonum domicilium,

    Cic. Pis. 31, 76:

    causam sui dementissimi consilii,

    id. Phil. 2, 22, 53:

    suam insatiabilem crudelitatem,

    id. ib. 11, 3, 8:

    suis amplissimis fortunis,

    id. ib. 13, 8, 16:

    suum pristinum morem,

    id. Pis. 12, 27:

    suis lenissimis postulatis,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 5: simili ratione Pompeius in suis veteribus castris consedit (suis emphatic; cf. b, infra), id. ib. 3, 76.—
    (β).
    Between the adj. and noun (less emphatic):

    pro eximiis suis beneficiis,

    Cic. Prov. Cons. 4, 7:

    propter summam suam humanitatem,

    id. Fam. 15, 14, 1:

    ex praeteritis suis officiis,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 60:

    Caesar in veteribus suis castris consedit,

    id. ib. 3, 76.—
    (γ).
    After adj. and noun:

    veterem amicum suum excepit,

    Cic. Rab. Post. 16, 43:

    in illo ardenti tribunatu suo,

    id. Sest. 54, 116.—
    7.
    Objectively for the pers. pron. (rare):

    neque cuiquam mortalium injuriae suae parvae videntur ( = sibi illatae),

    Sall. C. 51, 11; so,

    neglectam ab Scipione et nimis leviter latam suam injuriam ratus,

    Liv. 29, 9, 9:

    ipsae enim leges te a cognitione sua judicio publico reppulerunt ( = a se cognoscendo),

    Cic. Balb. 14, 32:

    suam invidiam tali morte quaesitam ( = quaesitum esse ab eo ut homines se inviderent),

    Tac. A. 3, 16; so,

    nulla sua invidia,

    Cic. Mil. 15, 40.—
    8.
    Abl. fem. sua, with refert or interest, for gen. of the pers. pron.: neminem esse qui quomodo se habeat nihil sua censeat interesse, Cic. Fin. 5, 10, 30:

    si scit sua nihil interesse utrum anima per os, an per jugulum exeat,

    Sen. Ep. 76, 33; v. intersum, III.—
    9.
    Strengthened by the suffix - pte or -met.
    (α).
    By - pte (not used with ipse) affixed to the forms sua, suo, and (ante-class.) suum:

    quom illa osculata esset suumpte amicum,

    Plaut. Mil. 2, 4, 38:

    ut terrena suopte nutu et suo pondere in terram ferantur,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 17, 40:

    ferri suopte pondere,

    id. N. D. 1, 25, 69:

    suapte natura,

    id. Fat. 18, 42:

    suapte vi et natura,

    id. ib. 19, 43; id. Fin. 1, 16, 54; 5, 22, 61:

    suopte ingenio,

    Liv. 25, 18; so id. 1, 25, 1; 1, 18, 4:

    suapte manu,

    Cic. Or. 3, 3, 10:

    locus suapte natura infestus,

    Liv. 44, 6, 9; so,

    suapte natura,

    id. 4, 22, 4:

    flumina suapte natura vasta,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 27, 8; so id. Ben. 4, 17, 2:

    sponte suapte,

    Varr. L. L. 6, 7, § 70.—
    (β).
    With - met, almost always followed by ipse (in all forms of suus except suus, suum, suae, and suorum):

    suomet ipsi more,

    Sall. J. 31, 6:

    suomet ipsi instrumento,

    Liv. 22, 14, 13:

    suomet ipsi metu,

    Tac. H. 3, 16 fin.:

    suamet ipsum pecunia,

    Sall. J. 8, 2:

    suamet ipsae fraude,

    Liv. 8, 18, 9:

    intra suamet ipsum moenia,

    id. 6, 36, 4:

    suismet ipsi praesidiis,

    id. 8, 25, 6:

    suismet ipsis corporibus,

    id. 2, 19, 5:

    suosmet ipsi cives,

    id. 2, 9, 5:

    suasmet ipse spes,

    Tac. A. 3, 66 fin. —Without ipse:

    populum suimet sanguinis mercede,

    Sall. H. Fragm. 1, 41, 25 Dietsch:

    magna pars suismet aut proxumorum telis obtruncabantur,

    id. ib. 2, 52 ib.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > suus

  • 11 darse prisa con calma

    = make + haste slowly
    Ex. An ancient Roman poet once oddly admonished his readers to ' make haste slowly,' and a modern American one asked above all to learn 'to sit still'.
    * * *
    = make + haste slowly

    Ex: An ancient Roman poet once oddly admonished his readers to ' make haste slowly,' and a modern American one asked above all to learn 'to sit still'.

    Spanish-English dictionary > darse prisa con calma

  • 12 sentarse sin moverse

    (v.) = sit + still
    Ex. An ancient Roman poet once oddly admonished his readers to 'make haste slowly,' and a modern American one asked above all to learn ' to sit still'.
    * * *
    (v.) = sit + still

    Ex: An ancient Roman poet once oddly admonished his readers to 'make haste slowly,' and a modern American one asked above all to learn ' to sit still'.

    Spanish-English dictionary > sentarse sin moverse

  • 13 महा _mahā

    1
    महा A cow.
    2
    महा The substitute of महत् at the beginning of Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and also at the beginning of some other irregular words. (Note: The number of compounds of which महा is the first mem- ber is very large, and may be multiplied ad infinitum. The more important of them, or such as have peculiar significations, are given below.)
    -Comp. -अक्षः an epithet of Śiva. ˚पटलिक a chief keeper of archives.
    -अङ्ग a. huge, bulky.
    -(ङ्गः) 1 a camel.
    -2 a kind of rat.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -अञ्जनः N. of a mountain.
    -अत्ययः a great danger or calamity.
    -अध्वनिक a. 'having gone a long way', dead.
    -अध्वरः a great sacrifice.
    -अनसम् 1 a heavy carriage.
    -2 cooking utensils. (
    -सी) a kitchen-maid. (
    -सः, -सम्) a kitchen; सूपानस्य करिष्यामि कुशलो$स्मि महानसे Mb.4.2.2.
    -अनिलः a whirl- wind; महानिलेनेव निदाघजं रजः Ki.14.59.
    -अनुभाव a.
    1 of great prowess, dignified, noble, glorious, magnanimous, exalted, illustrious; ग्रहीतुमार्यान् परिचर्यया मुहुर्महानु- भावा हि नितान्तमर्थिनः Śi.1.17; Ś.3.
    -2 virtuous, righteous, just.
    (-वः) 1 a worthy or respectable person.
    -2 (pl.) people of a religious sect in Mahārāṣtra founded by Chakradhara in the 13th century.
    -अन्तकः 1 death.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -अन्धकारः 1 thick darkness.
    -2 gross (spiritual) ignorance.
    -अन्ध्राः (pl.) N. of a people and their country.
    -अन्वय, -अभिजन a. nobly-born, of noble birth. (
    -यः, -नः) noble birth, high descent.
    -अभिषवः the great extraction of Soma.
    -अमात्यः the chief or prime minister (of a king).
    -अम्बुकः an epithet of Śiva.
    -अम्बुजम् a billion.
    -अम्ल a. very sour. (
    -म्लम्) the fruit of the tamarind tree. अरण्यम् a great (dreary) forest, large forest.
    -अर्घ a. very costly, costing a high price; महार्घस्तीर्थानामिव हि महतां को$प्यतिशयः U.6.11. (
    -र्घः) a kind of quail.
    -अर्घ्य a.
    1 valuable, precious.
    -2 invaluable; ines- timable; see महार्ह below.
    -अर्चिस् a. flaming high.
    -अर्णवः 1 the great ocean.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -अर्थ a.
    1 rich.
    -2 great, noble, dignified.
    -3 important, weighty.
    -4 significant.
    -अर्बुदम् one thousand millions.
    -अर्ह a.
    1 very valuable, very costly; महार्हशय्यापरिवर्तनच्युतैः स्वकेशपुष्पैरपि या स्म दूयते Ku.5.12.
    -2 invaluable, inestimable; महार्हशयनोपेत किं शेषे निहतो भुवि Rām.6.19. 2. (
    -र्हम्) white sandal-wood.
    -अवरोहः the fig-tree.
    -अशनिध्वजः a great banner in the form of the thunderbolt; जहार चान्येन मयूरपत्रिणा शरेण शक्रस्य महाशनि- ध्वजम् R.3.56.
    - अशन a. voracious, gluttonous; Mb. 4.
    -अश्मन् m. a precious stone, ruby.
    -अष्टमी the eighth day in the bright half of Āśvina sacred to Durgā; आश्विने शुक्लपक्षस्य भवेद् या तिथिरष्टमी । महाष्टमीति सा प्रोक्ता......
    -असिः a large sword.
    -असुरी N. of Durgā.
    -अह्नः the afternoon.
    -आकार a. extensive, large, great.
    -आचार्यः 1 a great teacher.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -आढ्य a. wealthy, very rich. (
    -ढ्यः) the Kadamba tree.
    -आत्मन् a.
    1 high-souled, high-minded, magnanimous, noble; अयं दुरात्मा अथवा महात्मा कौटिल्यः Mu.7; द्विषन्ति मन्दाश्चरितं महात्मनाम् Ku.5.75; U.1.49; प्रकृतिसिद्धमिदं हि महात्मनाम् Bh.1.63.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, exalted, eminent; किमाचाराः किमाहाराः क्व च वासो महात्मनाम् Mb.3. 1.4.
    -3 mighty (महाबल); अथायमस्यां कृतवान् महात्मा लङ्केश्वरः कष्टमनार्यकर्म Rām.5.9.74. (-m.)
    1 the Supreme Spirit; युगपत्तु प्रलीयन्ते यदा तस्मिन् महात्मनि Ms.1.54.
    -2 the great principle, i. e. intellect of the Sāṅkhyas. (महात्मवत् means the same as महात्मन्).
    -आनकः a kind of large drum.
    -आनन्दः, -नन्दः 1 great joy or bliss.
    -2 espe- cially, the great bliss of final beatitude.
    (-न्दा) 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 a festival on the ninth day in the bright half of Māgha.
    -आपगा a great river.
    -आयुधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -आरम्भ a. undertaking great works, enterprizing. (
    -म्भः) any great enterprize.
    -आलयः 1 a temple in general.
    -2 a sanctuary, an asylum.
    -3 a great dwelling.
    -4 a place of pilgrimage.
    -5 the world of Brahman.
    -6 the Supreme Spirit.
    -7 a tree &c. sacred to a deity.
    -8 N. of a particular dark fortnight.
    -9 पितृश्राद्ध in the month of Bhādra- pada. (
    -या) N. of a particular deity.
    - आशय a. high- souled, nobleminded, magnanimous, noble; दैवात् प्रबुद्धः शुश्राव वराहो हि महाशयः Ks; राजा हिरण्यगर्भो महाशयः H.4; see महात्मन्.
    (-यः) 1 a noble-minded or magnanimous person; महाशयचक्रवर्ती Bv.1.7.
    -2 the ocean.
    -आस्पद a.
    1 occupying a great position.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -आहवः a great or tumultuous fight.
    -इच्छ a.
    1 magnanimous, noble-minded, high-souled, noble; मही महेच्छः परिकीर्य सूनौ R.18.33.
    -2 having lofty aims or aspirations, ambitious; विद्यावतां महेच्छानां...... नाश्रयः पार्थिवं विना Pt.1.37.
    -इन्द्रः 1 'the great Indra', N. of Indra; इयं महेन्द्रप्रभृतीनधिश्रियः Ku.5.53; R.13.2; Ms.7.7.
    -2 a chief or leader in general.
    -3 N. of a mountain range; पतिर्महेन्द्रस्य महोदधेश्च R.6.54;4.39,43. ˚चापः rain-bow. ˚नगरी N. of Amarāvatī, the capital of Indra. ˚मन्त्रिन् m. an epithet of Bṛihaspati. ˚वाहः the elephant Airāvata; महेन्द्रवाहप्रतिमो महात्मा Mb.9.17.52.
    -इभ्य a. very rich.
    -इषुः a great archer; अधिरोहति गाण्डीवं महेषौ Ki.13.16.
    -इष्वासः a great archer, a great warrior; अत्र शूरा महेष्वासा भामार्जुनसमा युधि Bg.1.4.
    -ईशः, -ईशानः N. of Śiva; महेशस्त्वां धत्ते शिरसि रसराजस्य जयिनीम् Udb. ˚बन्धुः the Bilva tree.
    -ईशानी N. of Pārvatī.
    -ईश्वरः 1 a great lord, sovereign; महेश्वरस्त्र्यम्बक एव नापरः R.; गोप्तारं न निधीनां कथयन्ति महेश्वरं विबुधाः Pt.2.74.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 a god (opp. प्रकृति).
    -5 the Supreme Being (परमात्मा); मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यान्मायिनं तु महेश्वरम् Śvet. Up.4.1. ˚सखः N. of Kubera; यया कैलासभवने महेश्वरसखं बली Mb.9.11.55.
    (-री) 1 N. of Durgā.
    -2 a kind of bell-metal.
    -उक्षः (for उक्षन्) a large bull; a full grown or strong bull; महोक्षतां वत्सतरः स्पृशन्निव R.3.32;4.22;6.72; Śi.5.63.
    -उत्पलम् a large blue lotus. (
    -लः) the Sārasa bird.
    -उत्सवः 1 a great festival or occasion of joy; नयनविषयं जन्मन्येकः स एव महोत्सवः Māl.1.36.
    -2 the god of love.
    -उत्साह a. possessed of great energy, energetic, persevering; अहं च कर्णं जानामि...... सत्यसंधं महोत्साहं...... Mb.3.91.2.
    (-हः) 1 perseverance.
    -2 great pride; ये जात्यादिमहो- त्साहान्नरेन्द्रान्नोपयान्ति च । तेषामामरणं भिक्षा प्रायश्चितं विनिर्मितम् ॥ Pt.1.38.
    -उदधिः 1 the great ocean; महोदधेः पूर इवेन्दु- दर्शनात् R.3.17.
    -2 an epithet of Indra. ˚जः a conch- shell, shell.
    - उदय a. very prosperous or lucky, very glorious or splendid, of great prosperity.
    (-यः) 1 (a) great elevation or rise, greatness, prosperity; नन्दस्त्वतीन्द्रियं दृष्ट्वा लोकपालमहोदयम् Bhāg.1.28.1; अपवर्ग- महोदयार्थयोर्भुवमंशाविव धर्मयोर्गतौ R.8.16. (b) great fortune or good luck. (c) greatness, pre-eminence.
    -2 final beatitude.
    -3 a lord, master.
    -4 N. of the district called Kānyakubja or Kanouja; see App.
    -5 N. of the capital of Kanouja.
    -6 sour milk mixed with honey.
    -7 = महात्मन् q. v.; संसक्तौ किमसुलभं महोदयानाम Ki.7.27. ˚पर्वन् a time of union of the middle of श्रवण नक्षत्र and the end of व्यतिपात (generally in the month of माघ or पौष at the beginning of अमावास्या).
    - उदर a. big-bellied, corpulent.
    -(रम्) 1 a big belly.
    -2 dropsy.
    -उदार a.
    1 very generous or magnanimous.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -उद्यम a. = महोत्साह q. v; महोद्यमाः कर्म समा- रभन्ते.
    -उद्योग a. very industrious or diligent, hard- working.
    -उद्रेकः a particular measure (= 4 प्रस्थs).
    -उन्नत a. exceedingly lofty. (
    -तः) the palmyra tree.
    -उन्नतिः f. great rise or elevation (fig. also), high rank.
    -उपकारः a great obligation.
    -उपाध्यायः a great preceptor, a learned teacher.
    -उरगः a great serpent; वपुर्महोरगस्येव करालफणमण्डलम् R.12.98.
    -उरस्क a. broad-chested. (
    -स्कः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -उर्मिन् m. the ocean; ततः सागरमासाद्य कुक्षौ तस्य महोर्मिणः Mb.3.2.17.
    -उल्का 1 a great meteor.
    -2 a great fire-brand.
    -ऋत्विज् m. 'great priest', N. of the four chief sacri- ficial priests.
    -ऋद्धि a. very prosperous, opulent. (-f.) great prosperity or affluence.
    -ऋषभः a great bull.
    -ऋषिः 1 a great sage or saint; यस्मादृषिः परत्वेन महांस्त- स्मान्महर्षयः; (the term is applied in Ms.1.34 to the ten Prajāpatis or patriarchs of mankind, but it is also used in the general sense of 'a great sage').
    -2 N. of Sacute;iva.
    -3 of Buddha.
    -ओघ a. having a strong current.
    -घः a very large number; शतं खर्व- सहस्राणां समुद्रमभिधीयते । शतं समुद्रसाहस्रं महौघमिति विश्रुतम् ॥ Rām.6.28.37.
    -ओष्ठ (महोष्ठ) a. having large lips. (
    -ष्ठः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -ओजस् a. very mighty or powerful, possessed of great splendour or glory; महौजसा मानधना धनार्चिताः Ki.1.19. (-m.) a great hero or warrior, a champion. (-n.) great vigour.
    -ओजसम् the discus of Viṣṇu (सुदर्शन). (
    -सी) N. of plant (Mar. कांगणी).
    -ओदनी Asparagus Racemosus (Mar. शतावरी).
    -ओषधिः f.
    1 a very efficacious medicinal plant, a sovereign drug.
    -2 the Dūrvā grass.
    -3 N. of various plants ब्राह्मी, श्वेतकण्टकारी, कटुका, अतिविष &c. ˚गणः a collection of great or medicinal herbs:-- पृश्निपर्णी श्यामलता भृङ्गराजः शतावरी । गुड्चा सहदेवी च महौषधिगणः स्मृतः ॥ cf. also सहदेवी तथा व्याघ्री बला चातिबला त्वचा । शङ्खपुष्पी तथा सिंही अष्टमी च सुवर्चला ॥ महौषध्यष्टकं प्रोक्तं....
    -औषधम् 1 a sovereign remedy, panacea.
    -2 ginger.
    -3 garlic.
    -4 a kind of poison (वत्सनाभ).
    -कच्छः 1 the sea.
    -2 N. of Varuṇa.
    -3 a mountain.
    -कन्दः garlic.
    -कपर्दः a kind of shell.
    -कपित्थः 1 the Bilva tree.
    -2 red garlic.
    -कम्बु a. stark naked. (
    -म्बुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर a.
    1 large-handed.
    -2 having a large revenue.
    -कर्णः an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर्मन् a. doing great works. (-m.) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कला the night of the new moon.
    -कल्पः a great cycle of time (1 years of Brahman); Bhāg.7.15.69.
    -कविः 1 a great poet, a classical poet, such as कालिदास, भवभूति, बाण, भारवि &c.
    -2 an epithet of Śukra.
    -कषायः N. of a plant (Mar. कायफळ).
    -कान्तः an epithet of Śiva. (
    -ता) the earth.
    -काय a. big-bodied, big, gigantic, bulky.
    (-यः) 1 an elephant.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 of a being attending on Śiva (= नन्दि).
    -कारुणिक a. exceedingly compassionate.
    -कार्तिकी the night of full-moon in the month of Kārtika.
    -कालः 1 a form of Śiva in his character as the destroyer of the world; महाकालं यजेद्देव्या दक्षिणे धूम्रवर्णकम् Kālītantram.
    -2 N. of a cele- brated shrine or temple of Śiva (Mahākāla) (one of the 12 celebrated Jyotirliṅgas) established at Ujjayinī (immortalized by Kālidāsa in his Meghadūta, which gives a very beautiful description of the god, his temple, worship &c., together with a graphic picture of the city; cf. Me.3-38; also R.6.34); महाकालनिवासिनं कालीविलासिनमनश्वरं महेश्वरं समाराध्य Dk.1.1.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -4 N. of a kind of gourd.
    -5 N. of Śiva's servant (नन्दि). ˚पुरम् the city of Ujjayinī. ˚फलम् a red fruit with black seeds; पक्वं महाकालफलं किलासीत् N.22.29.
    -काली an epithet of Durgā in her terrific form.
    -काव्यम् a great or classical poem; (for a full description of its nature, contents &c., according to Rhetoricians see S. D.559). (The number of Mahākāvyas is usually said to be five:-- रघुवंश, कुमारसंभव, किरातार्जुनीय, शिशुपालवध and नैषधचरित or six, if मेघदूत-- a very small poem or खण़्डकाव्य-- be added to the list. But this enumeration is apparently only traditional, as there are several other poems, such as the भट्टिकाव्य, विक्रमाङ्कदेवचरित, हरविजय &c. which have an equal claim to be considered as Mahākāvyas).
    -कीर्तनम् a house.
    -कुमारः the eldest son of a reigning prince, heir-apparent.
    -कुल, -कुलीन a. of noble birth or descent, sprung from a noble family, nobly born. (
    -लम्) a noble birth or family, high descent.
    -कुहः a species of parasitical worm.
    -कृच्छ्रम् a great penance.
    -केतुः N. of Śiva.
    -केशः, -कोशः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 a large sheath.
    -क्रतुः a great sacrifice; e. g. a horse-sacrifice; तदङ्गमग्ऱ्यं मघवन् महाक्रतोरमुं तुरङ्गं प्रतिमोक्तुमर्हसि R.3.46.
    -क्रमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -क्रोधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -क्षत्रपः a great satrap.
    -क्षीरः sugar-cane.
    -क्षीरा f. a She-buffalo; Nighaṇṭaratnākara.
    -खर्वः, -र्वम् a high number (ten billions ?).
    -गजः a great elephant; see दिक्करिन्.
    -गणपतिः a form of the god Gaṇeśa.
    -गदः fever.
    -गन्ध a. exceedingly fragrant. (
    -न्धः) a kind of cane. (
    -न्धम्) a kind of sandal- wood. (
    -न्धा) N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -गर्तः, -गर्भः -गीतः N. of Śiva.
    -गर्दभगन्धिका N. of a plant, भारङ्गी.
    -गल a. longnecked.
    -गवः Bos gavaeus.
    -गुण a. very efficacious, sovereign (as a medicine); त्वया ममैष संबन्धः कपिमुख्य महागुणः Rām.5.1.12. (
    -णः) a chief quality, cardinal virtue.
    -गुरुः a highly respectable or venerable person; (these are three, the father, mother and preceptor; पिता माता तथाचार्यो महागुरुरिति स्मृतः).
    -गुल्मा the Soma plant.
    -गृष्टिः f. a cow with a large hump.
    -ग्रहः 1 an epithet of Rāhu.
    -2 the sun; महाग्रहग्राहविनष्टपङ्कः Rām.5.5.6.
    -ग्रामः N. of the ancient capital of Ceylon, the modern Māgama.
    -ग्रीवः 1 a camel.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -ग्रीविन् m. a camel.
    -घूर्णा spirituous liquor.
    -घृतम् ghee kept for a long time (for medicinal purposes).
    -घोष a. noisy, loud-sounding. (
    -षम्) a market, fair. (
    -षः) a loud noise, clamour.
    -चक्रम् the mystic circle in the शाक्त ceremonial.
    -चक्रवर्तिन् m. a universal monarch.
    -चण्डा N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -चपला a kind of metre.
    -चमूः f. a large army.
    -छायः the fig-tree.
    -जङ्घः a camel.
    -जटः an epithet of Śiva.
    -जटा 1 a great braid of hair.
    -2 the matted hair of Śiva.
    -जत्रु a. having a great collar-bone. (
    -त्रुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -जनः 1 a multitude of men, a great many beings, the general populace or public; महाजनो येन गतः स पन्थाः Mb.3.313. 117; आगम्य तु ततो राजा विसृज्य च महाजनम् 6.98.25.
    -2 the populace, mob; विलोक्य वृद्धोक्षमधिष्ठितं त्वया महाजनः स्मेरमुखो भविष्यति Ku.5.7.
    -3 a great man, a distinguished or eminent man; महाजनस्य संसर्गः कस्य नोन्नतिकारकः । पद्मपत्रस्थितं तोयं धत्ते मुक्ताफलश्रियम् Pt.3.6.
    -4 the chief of a caste or trade.
    -5 a merchant, tradesman.
    -जवः an antelope.
    -जातीय a.
    1 rather large.
    -2 of an excellent kind.
    -जालिः, -ली N. of a plant (Mar. सोनामुखी)
    -जिह्वः an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्ञानिन् m.
    1 a very learned man.
    -2 a great sage.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -ज्यैष्ठी the day of fullmoon in the month of Jyeṣṭha; ताभिर्दृश्यत एष यान् पथि महाज्यैष्ठीमहे मन्महे N.15.89; पूर्णिमा रविवारेण महाज्यैष्ठी प्रकीर्तिता Agni P.121.63.
    -ज्योतिस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्वरः great affliction.
    -ज्वाल a. very brilliant or shining.
    (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 a sacrificial fire.
    -डीनम् a kind of flight; 'यानं महाडीनमाहुः पवित्रामूर्जितां गतिम्' Mb.8.41.27 (com.).
    -तपस् m.
    1 a great ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -तलम् N. of one of the seven lower regions; see पाताल.
    -तारा N. of a Buddhist goddess.
    -तिक्तः the Nimba tree.
    -तिथिः the 6th day of a lunation.
    -तीक्ष्ण a. exceedingly sharp or pungent. (
    -क्ष्णा) the marking- nut plant.
    -तेजस् a.
    1 possessed of great lustre or splendour.
    -2 very vigorous or powerful, heroic. (-m.)
    1 a hero, warrior.
    -2 fire.
    -3 an epithet of Kārtikeya. (-n.) quick-silver.
    -त्याग, -त्यागिन् a. very generous. (-m.) N. of Śiva.
    -दंष्ट्रः a species of big tiger.
    -दन्तः 1 an elephant with large tusks.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -दण्डः 1 a long arm.
    -2 a severe punishment.
    -दम्भः an epithet of Śiva.
    -दशा the influence exercised (over a man's destiny) by a predominant planet.
    -दानम् the gift of gold equal to one's own weight; अथातः संप्रवक्ष्यामि महादानस्य लक्षणम्.
    -दारु n. the devadāru tree.
    -दुर्गम् a great calamity; Pt.
    -दूषकः a kind of grain.
    -देवः N. of Śiva.
    (-वी) 1 N. of Pārvatī.
    -2 the chief queen.
    -द्रुमः the sacred fig-tree.
    -द्वारम् a large gate, the chief or outer gate of a temple.
    -धन a.
    1 rich.
    -2 expensive, costly; हेमदण्डैर्महाधनैः Rām.7. 77.13.
    (-नम्) 1 gold.
    -2 incense.
    -3 a costly or rich dress.
    -4 agriculture, husbandry.
    -5 anything costly or precious.
    -6 great booty.
    -7 a great battle (Ved.).
    -धनुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -धातुः 1 gold.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 lymph.
    -4 N. of Meru.
    -धी a. having a great understanding.
    -धुर्यः a full-grown draught ox.
    -ध्वजः a camel.
    -ध्वनिक a. dead.
    -नग्नः an athlete; Buddh.
    -नटः an epithet of Śiva; महानटः किं नु...... तनोति...... साम्प्रतमङ्गहारम् N.22.7; महानटबाहुनेव बद्धभुजाङ्केन Vās.
    -नदः a great river.
    -नदी 1 a great river, such as Gaṅgā, Kṛiṣṇā; मन्दरः पर्वतश्चाक्षो जङ्घा तस्य महानदी Mb.8.34.2; संभूयाम्भोधिमभ्येति महानद्या नगापगा Śi.2.1.
    -2 N. of a river falling into the bay of Bengal.
    -नन्दा 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 N. of a river.
    -3 ninth day of the bright half of the month of Māgha; माघमासस्य या शुक्ला नवमी लोकपूजिचा । महानन्देति सा प्रोक्ता....
    -नरकः N. of one of the 21 hells.
    -नलः a kind of reed.
    -नवमी the ninth day in the bright half of Āśvina, sacred to the worship of Durgā ततो$नु नवमी यस्मात् सा महानवमी स्मृता.
    -नाटकम् 'the great drama', N. of a drama, also called Hanumannāṭaka, (being popularly ascribed to Hanumat); thus defined by S. D.:-- एतदेव यदा सर्वैः पताकास्थानकैर्युतम् । अङ्कैश्च दशभिर्धीरा महानाटकमूचिरे ॥
    -नाडी sinew, tendon.
    -नादः 1 a loud sound, uproar.
    -2 a great drum.
    -3 a thunder-cloud.
    -4 a shell.
    -5 an elephant.
    -6 a lion.
    -7 the ear.
    -8 a camel.
    -9 an epithet of Śiva. (
    -दम्) a musical instrument.
    -नाम्नी 1 N. of a परिशिष्ट of Sāmaveda.
    -2 (pl.) N. of 9 verses of Sāmaveda beginning with विदा मघवन् विदा.
    -नायकः 1 a great gem in the centre of a string of pearls.
    -2 a great head or chief.
    -नासः an epithet of Śiva.
    -निद्र a. fast asleep. (
    -द्रा) 'the great sleep', death.
    -निम्नम् intestines, abdomen.
    -नियमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -निर्वाणम् total extinction of individuality (according to the Buddhists).
    -निशा 1 the dead of night, the second and third watches of the night; महानिशा तु विज्ञेया मध्यमं प्रहरद्वयम्
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -नीचः a washerman.
    -नील a. dark-blue. (
    -लः) a kind of sapphire or emerald; इन्द्रनीलमहानीलमणिप्रवरवेदिकम् Rām.5.9.16; महा- महानीलशिलारुचः Śi.1.16;4.44; R.18.42; Kau. A.2.11. 29. ˚उपलः a sapphire.
    -नृत्यः, -नेत्रः an epithet of Śiva.
    -नेमिः a crow.
    -न्यायः the chief rule.
    -पक्ष a.
    1 having many adherents.
    -2 having a large family or retinue; महापक्षे धनिन्यार्थे निक्षेपं निक्षिपेद् बुधः Ms.8.179.
    (-क्षः) 1 an epithet of Garuḍa.
    -2 a kind of duck. (
    -क्षी) an owl.
    -पङ्क्तिः, -पदपङ्क्तिः a kind of metre.
    -पञ्चमूलम् the five great roots:-- बिल्वो$ग्निमन्थः श्योनाकः काश्मरी पाटला तथा । सर्वैस्तु मिलितैरेतैः स्यान्महापञ्चमूलकम् ॥
    -पञ्चविषम् the five great or deadly poisons:-- शृङ्गी च कालकूटश्च मुस्तको वत्सनाभकः । शङ्खकर्णीति योगो$यं महापञ्चविषाभिधः ॥
    -पटः the skin.
    -पथः 1 chief road, principal street, high or main road; संतानकाकीर्णमहापथं तत् Ku.7.3.
    -2 the passage into the next world, i. e. death.
    -3 N. of certain mountain-tops from which devout persons used to throw themselves down to secure entrance into heaven.
    -4 an epithet of Śiva.
    -5 the long pilgrimage to mount Ke- dāra.
    -6 the way to heaven.
    -7 the knowledge of the essence of Śiva acquired in the pilgrimage to Kedāra.
    -पथिक a.
    1 undertaking great journeys.
    -2 one receiving Śulka (toll) on the high way; cf. Mb.12.76.6 (com. महापथिकः समुद्रे नौयानेन गच्छन् यद्वा महापथि शुल्कग्राहकः)
    -पद्मः 1 a particular high number.
    -2 N. of Nārada.
    -3 N. of one of the nine treasures of Kubera.
    -4 N. of the southernmost elephant supporting the world.
    -5 an epithet of Nanda.
    -6 a Kinnara attendant on Kubera.
    (-द्मम्) 1 a white lotus.
    -2 N. of a city. ˚पतिः N. of Nanda.
    -पराकः a. a particular penance; Hch.
    -पराङ्णः a late hour in the afternoon.
    -पवित्रः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पशुः large cattle; महापशूनां हरणे... दण्डं प्रकल्पयेत् Ms.8.324.
    -पातः a long flight; Pt.2.58.
    -पातकम् 1 a great sin, a heinous crime; ब्रह्महत्या सुरापानं स्तेयं गुर्वङ्गनागमः । महान्ति पातकान्याहुस्तत्संसर्गश्च पञ्चमम् ॥ Ms.1154.
    -2 any great sin or transgression.
    -पात्रः a prime minister.
    -पादः an epithet of Śiva.
    -पाप्मन् a. very sinful or wicked.
    -पुराणम् N. of a Purāṇa; महापुराणं विज्ञेयमेकादशकलक्षणम् Brav. P.
    -पुंसः a great man.
    -पुरुषः 1 a great man, an eminent or distinguished personage; शब्दं महापुरुषसंविहितं निशम्य U. 6.7.
    -2 the Supreme Spirit.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पौरुषिकः a worshipper of Viṣṇu; तदहं ते$भिधास्यामि महापौरुषिको भवान् Bhāg.2.1.1.
    -पुष्पः a kind of worm.
    -पूजा great worship; any solemn worship performed on extraordinary occasions.
    -पृष्ठः a camel.
    -पोटगलः a kind of large reed.
    -प्रजापतिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -प्रतीहारः a chief door-keeper.
    -प्रपञ्चः the great universe.
    -प्रभ a. of great lustre. (
    -भः) the light of a lamp.
    -प्रभुः 1 a great lord.
    -2 a king, sovereign.
    -3 a chief.
    -4 an epithet of Indra.
    -5 of Śiva
    -6 of Viṣṇu.
    -7 a great saint or holy man.
    -प्रलयः 'the great dissolution', the total annihilation of the universe at the end of the life of Brahman, when all the lokas with their inha- bitants, the gods, saints &c. including Brahman himself are annihilated; महाप्रलयमारुत...... Ve.3.4.
    -प्रश्नः a knotty question.
    -प्रसादः 1 a great favour.
    -2 a great present (of food offered to an idol); पादोदकं च निर्माल्यं नैवेद्यं च विशेषतः । महाप्रसाद इत्युक्त्वा ग्राह्यं विष्णोः प्रयत्नतः
    -प्रस्थानम् 1 departing this life, death.
    -2 setting out on a great journey for ending life; इहैव निधनं याम महाप्रस्थानमेव वा Rām.2.47.7 (com. महाप्रस्थानं मरणदीक्षा- पूर्वकमुत्तराभिमुखगमनम्); Mb.1.2.365.
    -प्राणः 1 the hard breathing or aspirate sound made in the pronunciation of the aspirates.
    -2 the aspirated letters themselves (pl.); they are:-- ख्, घ्, छ्, झ्, ठ्, ढ्, थ्, ध्, फ्, भ्, श्, ष्, स्, ह्.
    -3 a raven.
    -प्राणता possession of great strength or essence; अन्यांश्च जीवत एव महाप्राणतया स्फुरतो जग्राह K.
    -प्रेतः a noble departed spirit.
    -प्लवः a great flood, deluge;... क्षिप्तसागरमहाप्लवामयम् Śi.14.71.
    -फल a.
    1 bearing much fruit.
    -2 bringing much reward.
    (-ला) 1 a bitter gourd.
    -2 a kind of spear.
    (-लम्) 1 a great fruit or reward.
    -2 a testicle.
    -फेना the cuttle-fish bone.
    -बन्धः a peculiar position of hands or feet.
    -बभ्रुः a kind of animal living in holes.
    -बल a. very strong; नियुज्यमानो राज्याय नैच्छद्राज्यं महाबलः Rām
    (-लः) 1 wind, storm.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -3 a solid bamboo.
    -4 a palm.
    -5 a crocodile.
    -बला N. of a plant; महाबला च पीतपुष्पा सहदेवी च सा स्मृता Bhāva. P. (
    -लम्) lead. ˚ईश्वरः N. of a Liṅga of Śiva near the modern Mahābaleśwara.
    -बाध a. causing great pain or damage.
    -बाहु a. long-armed, powerful. (
    -हुः) an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -बि(वि)लम् 1 the atmosphere.
    -2 the heart.
    -3 a water-jar, pitcher.
    -4 a hole, cave.
    -बिसी a variety of skin (चर्म), a product of द्वादशग्राम in the Himālayas.
    -बी(वी)जः an epithet of Śiva.
    -बी (वी)ज्यम् the perinæum.
    -बुध्न a. having a great bottom or base (as a mountain).
    -बुशः barley.
    -बृहती a kind of metre.
    -बोधिः 1 the great intelligence of a Buddha.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -ब्रह्मम्, -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit.
    -ब्राह्मणः 1 a great or learned Brāhmaṇa.
    -2 a low or contemptible Brāhmaṇa.
    -भटः a great warrior; तदोजसा दैत्यमहाभटार्पितम् Bhāg.
    -भद्रा N. of the river Gaṅgā.
    -भाग a.
    1 very fortunate or blessed, very lucky or prosperous.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, glo- rious; उभौ धर्मौ महाभागौ Mb.12.268.3; महाभागः कामं नरपतिरभिन्नस्थितिरसौ Ś.5.1; Ms.3.192.
    -3 very pure or holy, highly virtuous; पतिव्रता महाभागा कथं नु विचरिष्यति Mb.4.3.16.
    -भागता, -त्वम्, -भाग्यम् 1 extreme good fortune, great good luck, prosperity.
    -2 great excel- lence or merit.
    -भागवतम् the great Bhāgavata, one of the 18 Purāṇas. (
    -तः) a great worshipper of Viṣṇu.
    -भागिन् a. very fortunate or prosperous.
    -भाण्डम् a chief treasury.
    -भारतम् N. of the celebrated epic which describes the rivalries and contests of the sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu. (It consists of 18 Parvans or books, and is said to be the composition of Vyāsa; cf. the word भारत also); महत्त्वाद्भारतत्वाच्च महाभारतमुच्यते
    -भाष्यम् 1 a great commentary.
    -2 particularly, the great commentary of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini.
    -भासुरः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -भिक्षुः N. of Śākyamuni.
    -भीता a kind of sensitive plant (लाजाळू).
    -भीमः an epithet of king Śantanu.
    -भीरुः a sort of beetle or fly.
    -भुज a. long-armed, powerful.
    -भूतम् a great or primary element; see भूत; तस्यैतस्य महाभूतस्य निःश्वसितमेतद्यदृग्वेदः Up.; तं वेधा विदधे नूनं महाभूतसमाधिना R.1. 29; Ms.1.6.
    (-तः) 1 the Supreme Being.
    -2 a great creature.
    -भोगः 1 a great enjoyment.
    -2 a great coil or hood; great winding.
    -3 a serpent. (
    -गा) an epi- thet of Durgā.
    -मणिः 1 a costly or precious jewel; संस्कारोल्लिखितो महामणिरिव क्षीणो$पि नालक्ष्यते Ś.6.5.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -मति a.
    1 high-minded.
    -2 clever. (
    -तिः) N. of Bṛihaspati or Jupiter.
    -मत्स्यः a large fish, sea-monster.
    -मद a. greatly intoxicated. (
    -दः) an elephant in rut.
    -मनस्, -मनस्क a.
    1 high-minded, noble- minded, magnanimous; ततो युधिष्ठिरो राजा धर्मपुत्रो महामनाः Mb.4.1.7.
    -2 liberal.
    -3 proud, haughty. (-m) a fabulous animal called शरभ q. v.
    -मन्त्रः 1 any sacred text of the Vedas.
    -2 a great or efficacious charm, a powerful spell.
    -मन्त्रिन् m. the prime-minister, premier.
    -मयूरी N. of Buddhist goddess.
    -मलहारी a kind of Rāgiṇi.
    -महः a great festive procession; Sinhās.
    -महस् n. a great light (seen in the sky).
    -महोपाध्यायः 1 a very great preceptor.
    -2 a title given to learned men and reputed scholars; e. g. महामहो- पाध्यायमल्लिनाथसूरि &c.
    -मांसम् 'costly flesh', especially human flesh; न खलु महामांसविक्रयादन्यमुपायं पश्यामि Māl.4; अशस्त्रपूतं निर्व्याजं पुरुषाङ्गोपकल्पितम् । विक्रीयते महामांसं गृह्यतां गृह्यतामिदम् 5.12 (see Jagaddhara ad loc.).
    -माघी the full-moon day in the month of Māgha.
    -मात्र a.
    1 great in measure, very great or large.
    -2 most excellent, best; वृष्ण्यन्धकमहामात्रैः सह Mb.1.221.27; 5.22.37.
    (-त्रः) 1 a great officer of state, high state- official, a chief minister; (मन्त्रे कर्मणि भूषायां वित्ते माने परिच्छदे । मात्रा च महती येषां महामात्रास्तु ते स्मृताः); Ms. 9.259; गूढपुरुषप्रणिधिः कृतमहामात्रापसर्पः (v. l. महामात्यापसर्पः) पौरजानपदानपसर्पयेत् Kau. A.1.13.9; Rām.2.37.1.
    -2 an elephant-driver or keeper; मदोन्मत्तस्य भूपस्य कुञ्जरस्य च गच्छतः । उन्मार्गं वाच्यतां यान्ति महामात्राः समीपगाः ॥ Pt.1.161.
    -3 a superintendent of elephants.
    (-त्री) 1 the wife of a chief minister.
    -2 the wife of a spiritual teacher.
    -मानसी N. of a Jain goddess.
    -मान्य a. being in great honour with; मकरन्दतुन्दिलानामरविन्दानामयं महामान्यः Bv.1.6.
    -मायः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -माया 1 worldly illusion, which makes the material world appear really existent.
    -2 N. of Durgā; महामाया हरेश्चैषा यया संमोह्यते जगत् Devīmāhātmya.
    -मायूरम् a particular drug. (
    -री) N. of an amulet and a goddess; Buddh.
    -मारी 1 cholera, an epidemic.
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -मार्गः high road, main street. ˚पतिः a superintendent of roads.
    -मालः N. of Śiva.
    -माहेश्वरः a great worshipper of Maheśvara or Śiva.
    -मुखः a crocodile.
    -मुद्रा a parti- cular position of hands or feet (in practice of yoga).
    -मुनिः 1 a great sage.
    -2 N. of Vyāsa.
    -3 an epithet of Buddha.
    -4 of Agastya.
    -5 the coriander plant. (
    -नि n.)
    1 coriander seed.
    -2 any medicinal herb or drug.
    -मूर्तिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -मूर्धन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -मूलम् a large radish. (
    -लः) a kind of onion.
    -मूल्य a. very costly. (
    -ल्यः) a ruby.
    -मृगः 1 any large animal.
    -2 an elephant,
    -3 the fabulous animal called शरभ.
    -मृत्युः, -मेधः N. of Śiva.
    -मृत्युंजयः a kind of drug.
    -मृधम् a great battle.
    -मेदः the coral tree; महामेदाभिधो ज्ञेयः Bhāva. P.
    -मेधा an epithet of Durgā.
    -मोहः great infatuation or confusion of mind. (ससर्ज) महामोहं च मोहं च तमश्चाज्ञानवृत्तयः Bhāg.3.12.2. (
    -हा) an epithet of Durgā.
    -यज्ञः 'a great sacrifice', a term applied to the five daily sacrifices or acts of piety to be performed by a house-holder; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः पितृयज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् । होमो दैवो (or देवयज्ञः) बलिर्भौतो (or भूतयज्ञः) नृयज्ञो$तिथिपूजनम् ॥ Ms.3.7,71, (for explanation, see the words s. v.).
    -2 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -यमकम् 'a great Yamaka', i. e. a stanza all the four lines of which have exactly the same words, though different in sense; e. g. see Ki.15.52, where विकाशमीयुर्जगतीशमार्गणाः has four different senses; cf. also बभौ मरुत्वान् विकृतः समुद्रः Bk.1.19.
    -यशस् a. very famous, renowned, celebrated.
    -यात्रा 'the great pilgrimage', the pilgrimage to Benares.
    -यानम् N. of the later system of Buddhist teaching, firstly promul- gated by Nāgārjuna (opp. हीनयान).
    -याम्यः an epi- thet of Viṣṇu.
    -युगम् 'a great Yuga', consisting of the four Yugas of mortals, or comprising 4,32, years of men.
    -योगिन् m.
    1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -3 a cock.
    -योनिः f. excessive dilation of the female organ.
    -रक्तम् coral.
    -रङ्गः a large stage.
    -रजतम् 1 gold; उच्चैर्महारजतराजिविराजितासौ Śi.4.28.
    -2 the thorn-apple.
    -रजनम् 1 safflower.
    -2 gold.
    -3 turmeric; तस्य हैतस्य पुरुषस्य रूपं यथा महारजनं वासः Bṛi. Up.2.3.6.
    -रत्नम् 1 a precious jewel; वज्रं मुक्ता प्रवालं च गोमेदश्चेन्द्रनीलकः ॥ वैडूर्यः पुष्करागश्च पाचिर्माणिक्यमेव च । महारत्नानि चैतानि नव प्रोक्तानि सूरिभिः ॥ Śukra.4.155-56.
    -रथः 1 a great chariot.
    -2 a great warrior or hero; द्रुपदश्च महारथः Bg.1.4; कुतः प्रभावो धनंजयस्य महारथजयद्रथस्य विपत्तिमुत्पादयितुम् Ve.2; दशरथः प्रशशास महारथः R.9.1; Śi.3.22; (a महारथ is thus defined:-- एको दशसहस्राणि योधयेद्यस्तु धन्विनाम् ॥ शस्त्रशास्त्र- प्रवीणश्च विज्ञेयः स महारथः ॥).
    -3 desire, longing; cf. मनोरथ.
    -रवः a frog.
    -रस a. very savoury.
    (-सः) 1 a sugar- cane.
    -2 quicksilver.
    -3 a precious mineral.
    -4 the fruit of the date tree.
    -5 any one of the eight substan- ces given below:-- दरदः पारदं शस्ये वैक्रान्तं कान्तमभ्रकम् । माक्षिकं विमलश्चेति स्युरेते$ष्टौ महारसाः ॥ (
    -सम्) sour ricewater.
    -राजः 1 a great king, sovereign or supreme ruler; पञ्चाशल्लक्षपर्यन्तो महाराजः प्रकीर्तितः Śukra.1.184.
    -2 a respect- ful mode of addressing kings or other great personages (my lord, your majesty, your highness); इति सत्यं महाराज बद्धो$स्म्यर्थेन कौरवैः Mb.
    -3 a deified Jaina teacher.
    -4 a fingernail. ˚अधिराजः a universal emperor, para- mount sovereign. ˚चूतः a kind of mango tree.
    -राजिकः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -राजिकाः (m. pl.) an epithet of a class of gods (said to be 22 or 236 in number.).
    -राज्यम् the rank or title of a reigning sovereign.
    -राज्ञी 1 the reigning or chief queen, principal wife of a king.
    -2 N. of Durgā.
    -रात्रम् midnight, dead of night.
    -रात्रिः, -त्री f.
    1 see महाप्रलय; ब्रह्मणश्च निपाते च महाकल्पो भवेन्नृप । प्रकीर्तिता महारात्रिः.
    -2 midnight.
    -3 the eighth night in the bright half of Āśvina.
    -राष्ट्रः 'the great kingdom', N. of a country in the west of India, the country of the Marāṭhās.
    -2 the people of Mahārāṣṭra; the Marāṭhās (pl.). (
    -ष्ट्री) N. of the principal Prākṛita; dialect, the language of the people of the Mahārāṣṭra; cf. Daṇḍin:-- महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुः Kāv.1.34.
    -रिष्टः a kind of Nimba tree growing on mountains.
    -रुज्, -ज a. very painful.
    -रुद्रः a form of Śiva.
    -रुरुः a species of antelope.
    -रूप a. mighty in form.
    (-पः) 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 resin.
    -रूपकम् a kind of drama.
    -रेतस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -रोगः a dangerous illness, grievous malady; (these are eight:-- उन्मादो राजयक्ष्मा च श्वासस्त्वग्दोष एव च । मधुमेहश्चाश्मरी च तथो- दरभगन्दरौ ॥).
    -रौद्र a. very dreadful. (
    -द्री) an epithet of Durgā.
    -रौरवः N. of one of the 21 hells; Ms.4.88-9.
    -लक्ष्मी 1 the great Lakṣmī, or Śakti of Nārāyaṇa; सेवे सैरिभमर्दिनीमिह महालक्ष्मीं सरोजस्थिताम्.
    -2 a young girl who represents the goddess Durgā at the Durgā festival.
    -लयः 1 a great world destruction.
    -2 the Supreme Being (महदादीनां लयो यस्मिन्).
    -लिङ्गम् the great Liṅga or Phallus. (
    -ङ्गः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -लोलः a crow.
    -लोहम् a magnet.
    -वंशः N. of a wellknown work in Pali (of the 5th century).
    -वक्षस् m. epithet of Śiva.
    -वनम् a large forest in Vṛindāvana.
    -वरा Dūrvā grass.
    -वराहः 'the great boar', an epithet of Viṣṇu in his third or boar incarnation.
    -वर्तनम् high wages;
    -वल्ली 1 the Mādhavī creeper.
    -2 a large creeping plant.
    -वसः the porpoise.
    -वसुः silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -वाक्यम् 1 a long sentence.
    -2 any continuous composition or literary work.
    -3 a great proposition, principal sentence; such as तत्त्वमसि, ब्रह्मैवेदं सर्वम् &c.
    -4 a complete sentence (opp. अवान्तरवाक्य q. v.); न च महावाक्ये सति अवान्तरवाक्यं प्रमाणं भवति ŚB. on MS.6.4.25.
    -वातः a stormy wind, violent wind; महावाता<?>तैर्महिषकुलनीलैर्जलधरैः Mk.5.22.
    -वादिन् m. a great or powerful disputant.
    -वायुः 1 air (as an element).
    -2 stormy wind, hur- ricane, tempest.
    -वार्तिकम् N. of the Vārtikas of Kātyāyana on Pāṇini's Sūtras.
    -विडम् a kind of factitious salt.
    -विदेहा N. of a certain वृत्ति or condition of the mind in the Yoga system of philosophy.
    -विद्या the great lores; काली तारा महाविद्या षोडशी भुवनेश्वरी । भैरवी छिन्नमस्ता च विद्या धूमवती तथा । बगला सिद्धविद्या च मातङ्गी कमला- त्मिका । एता दश महाविद्याः... ॥
    -विपुला a kind of metre.
    -विभाषा a rule giving a general option or alternative; इति महाविभाषया साधुः.
    -विभूतिः an epithet of Śiva.
    -विषः a serpent having two mouths.
    -विषुवम् the vernal equinox. ˚संक्रान्तिः f. the vernal equinox (the sun's entering the sign Aries).
    -विस्तर a. very extensive or copious.
    -वीचिः N. of a hell.
    -वीरः 1 a great hero or warrior.
    -2 a lion.
    -3 the thunderbolt of Indra.
    -4 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -5 of Garuḍa.
    -6 of Hanumat.
    -7 a cuckoo.
    -8 a white horse.
    -9 a sacrificial fire.
    -1 a sacrificial vessel.
    -11 a kind of hawk. ˚चरितम् N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti.
    -वीर्य a. of great valour, very powerful.
    (-र्यः) 1 N. of Brah- man.
    -2 the Supreme Being. (
    -र्या) the wild cotton shrub.
    -2 an epithet of संज्ञा, the wife of the sun.
    -वृषः a great bull.
    -वेग a.
    1 very swift or fleet.
    (-गः) 1 great speed, excessive velocity.
    -2 an ape.
    -3 the bird Garuḍa.
    -वेघः a particular position of hands or feet (in the practice of Yoga).
    -वेल a. billowy.
    -व्याधिः f.
    1 a great disease.
    -2 a very bad kind of leprosy (black leprosy).
    -व्याहृतिः f. a great mystical word, i. e. भूर्, भुवस् and स्वर्.
    -व्रत a. very devotional, rigidly observing vows.
    (-तम्) 1 a great vow, a great reli- gious observance; a vow for not taking even water for a month; महाव्रतं चरेद्यस्तु Mb.12.35.22 (com. महाव्रतं मासमात्रं जलस्यापि त्यागः).
    -2 any great or funda- mental duty; प्राणैरपि हिता वृत्तिरद्रोहो व्याजवर्जनम् । आत्मनीव प्रियाधानमेतन्मैत्रीमहाव्रतम् Mv.5.59; क्रतौ महाव्रते पश्यन् ब्रह्मचारी- त्वरीरतम् N.17.23.
    -व्रतिन् m.
    1 a devotee, an ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -शक्तिः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Kārtikeya.
    -शङ्कुः the sine of the sun's eleva- tion.
    -शङ्खः 1 a great conch-shell; पौण्ड्रं दध्मौ महाशङ्खं Bg.1.15; महाशङ्खमयी माला ताराविद्याजपे प्रिया Tantra.
    -2 the temporal bone, forehead.
    -3 a human bone.
    -4 a particular high number.
    -5 one of Kubera's treasures.
    -शठः a kind of thorn-apple.
    -शब्द a. making a loud sound, very noisy, boisterous.
    -शल्कः a kind of sea- crab or prawn; Ms.3.272.
    -शालः a great householder.
    -शालिः a kind of large and sweetsmelling rice.
    -शाल्वणम् ('great fomentation') N. of a remedy; Suśr.
    -शासन a.
    1 exercising great power.
    -2 whose commands are great; त्रैलोक्यघिपतित्वमेव विरसं यस्मिन् महा- शासने Bh.3.8.
    (-नम्) 1 the knowledge of Brahma as expounded in the Upaniṣadas.
    -2 great order of government.
    -शिरस् m. a kind of serpent.
    -शिवरात्रिः N. of a festival on the 14th day of the dark half of Māgha,
    -शुक्तिः f. a pearl-shell.
    -शुक्ला an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -शुभ्रम् silver.
    -शूद्रः (-द्री f.)
    1 a Sūdra in a high position.
    -2 a cowherd.
    -3 an upper servant. (
    -द्री) a female cow-keeper. (
    -द्रा) a Śudra woman in a high position.
    -शून्यम् a particular mental condi- tion of a Yogin.
    -शृङ्गः 1 a species of stag.
    -2 the शरभ animal.
    -श्मशानम् an epithet of Benares.
    -श्यामा the Sissoo tree. (Mar. शिसवी).
    -श्रमणः 1 an epithet of Buddha.
    -2 a Jain monk.
    -श्लक्ष्णा sand.
    -श्वासः a kind of asthma.
    -श्वेता 1 an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -2 of Durgā.
    -3 white sugar.
    -संहिता great combi- nation.
    -संक्रान्तिः f. the winter solstice.
    -सती a very chaste woman.
    -सत्ता absolute existence.
    -सत्यः an epithet of Yama.
    -सत्त्व a.
    1 noble.
    -2 very strong or powerful.
    -3 just, righteous.
    (-त्त्वः) 1 a large animal.
    -2 N. of Sākyamuni.
    -3 an epithet of Kubera.
    -संधिविग्रहः the office of the minister of peace and war.
    -सन्नः an epithet of Kubera.
    -सन्निः m. (in music) a kind of measure.
    -समुद्रः the great ocean.
    -सर्गः a great or completely new creation (after a complete destruction of the world).
    -सर्जः the bread- fruit or jack-tree.
    -साधनभागः a great executive officer.
    -सांतपनः a kind of very rigid penance; see Ms.11. 218.
    -सांधिविग्रहिकः a minister of peace and war.
    -सामन्तः a great vassal.
    -सामान्यम् the widest genera- lity.
    -सारः a kind of Khadira tree.
    -सारथिः an epithet of Aruṇa.
    -साहसम् great violence or outrage, great audacity.
    -साहसिकः a dacoit, highwayman, a daring robber.
    -सिंहः the fabulous animal called Śarabha.
    -सिद्धिः f. a kind of magical power.
    -सुखम् 1 great pleasure.
    -2 copulation. (
    -खः) a Buddha.
    -सुगन्धम् a fragrant unguent.
    -सुगन्धिः a kind of antidote.
    -सुधा silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -सुभिक्षम् good times.
    -सूक्तः the composer of the great Sūktas or hymns of the 1th Maṇḍala of the Ṛigveda.
    -सूक्ष्मा sand.
    -सूतः a mili- tary drum.
    -सेनः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya; महासेन- प्रसूतिं तद्ययौ शरवणं महत् Rām.7.16.1.
    -2 the commander of a large army. (
    -ना) a great army.
    -स्कन्धः a camel.
    -स्थली the earth.
    -स्थानम् a great position.
    -स्नेहः a combination of the 4 kinds of fat.
    -स्मृतिः the Ṣaḍaṅgas and Smṛitis; महास्मृतिं पठेद्यस्तु तथैवानुस्मृतिं शुभाम् Mb.12.2.3.
    -स्रोतस् n. the bowels.
    -स्रग्विन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -स्वनः a kind of drum.
    -हंसः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -हविस् n. clarified butter.
    -हस्तः an epithet of Śiva.
    -हासः a loud or boisterous laughter, cachinnation.
    -हिमवत् m. N. of a mountain.
    -ह्रस्वा N. of a plant (Mar. कुहिली).

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > महा _mahā

  • 14 TUNGL

    n. the moon (t. óð í skýjum).
    * * *
    n. [Goth. tuggl in a gloss, to Gal. iv. 9; A. S. tungol; Hel. tungal; O. H. G. zungal; Swed. tungel; cp. also tingl]:—prop. a luminary (= Lat. sidus), which sense remains in the compd himin-tungl; in Icel. prose, ancient as well as modern, this word has altogether superseded the word ‘máni,’ which is only poetical.
    II. the moon (= Swed. tungel), Nj. 118, Grett. 114, Rb. 108, Sks. 627, Al. 172; nýtt tungl, fullt tungl, Icel. Almanack (cp. the words ný and nið), passim: phrases, tunglið veðr í skýjum, the moon wades in clouds: for poët. usage, enni-tungl, tungl brá, = the eyes, etc., see Lex. Poët. ☞ No word in the language rhymes with tungl, hence the tale of the man capping verses with the devil, Maurer Volksagen. The ancients called the full moon the ‘new moon,’ ný (q. v.), but used nið (q. v.) = no moon for the new moon; the modern phrase ‘new moon’ (nýtt tungl), = the young moon, is derived from the Latin.
    B. COMPDS: tunglaldr, tunglaukan, tunglár, tunglfyllr, tunglganga, tunglhlaup, tunglhoppan, tunglkváma, tunglsljós, tunglmein, tunglsjúkr, tunglskin, tunglsýki, tungltal, tungltalsöld, tungltíð, tungltími, tunglæði, tunglærr, tunglöld.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > TUNGL

  • 15 touch

    tʌtʃ
    1. сущ.
    1) а) прикосновение delicate touch ≈ нежное, осторожное прикосновение gentle, light, soft touch ≈ мягкое, легкое прикосновение heavy touch ≈ грубое прикосновение б) салки (детская игра) в) осязание sense of touchчувство осязания г) штрих;
    перен. характерная черта, отметина, печать;
    манера, приемы ( художника и т. п.) personal touch ≈ характерные черты( человека)
    2) а) чуточка, примесь, налет, оттенок, отсвет The expression looked different. One would have said that there was a touch of cruelty in the mouth. ≈ Выражение лица изменилось. Казалось, что в улыбке была едва-едва заметная безжалостность (О.Уайльд, "Портрет Дориана Грея", гл.
    7). There was a touch of bitterness in what he said. ≈ В его словах чувствовалась горечь. б) легкий приступ( болезни) ;
    небольшой ушиб и т. п. a touch of the sun ≈ перегрев
    3) а) общение, соприкосновение Keep in close touch with me. ≈ Не теряйте со мной контакта. I am out of touch with the present situation. ≈ Я не имею представления о настоящей ситуации. to lose touch with ≈ потерять связь, контакт ( с кем-л.) close touch ≈ близкое соприкосновение out of touch with ≈ не иметь представления о чем-л. б) подходлюдям) ;
    такт He has a marvellous touch in dealing with children. ≈ он прекрасно ладит с детьми. в) сл. вымогательство;
    получение денег обманным путем
    4) испытание, проба to put/bring to the touch ≈ подвергнуть испытанию
    5) муз. туше
    6) спорт площадь за боковыми линиями футбольного и т. п. поля ∙ in touch within touch
    2. гл.
    1) а) (при) касаться, трогать, притрагиваться б) соприкасаться;
    геом. касаться, быть касательной в) притрагиваться к еде, есть He has not touched food for two days. ≈ Он два дня ничего не ел. I couldn't touch anything. ≈ Я не был голоден.
    2) а) касаться, слегка затрагивать (тему, вопрос) б) трогать, волновать, задевать за живое в) касаться, иметь отношение( к чему-л.) How does this touch me? ≈ Какое это имеет отношение ко мне?
    3) а) обыкн. страд. быть слегка испорченным Leaves are touched with frost. ≈ Листья тронуты морозом. He is slightly touched. ≈ У него не все дома. б) слегка окрашивать;
    придавать какой-л. легкий оттенок в) оказывать воздействие Nothing will touch these stains. ≈ Этих пятен ничем не выведешь.
    4) а) разг. получать, добывать (деньги, особ. в долг или мошенничеством) (for) He touched me for a large sum of money. ≈ Он занял, выклянчил у меня большую сумму (денег). б) получать (жалованье) He touches L2 6s a week. ≈ Он получает 2 фунта 6 шиллингов в неделю.
    5) сравниться;
    достичь такого же высокого уровня There is nothing to touch sea air for bracing you up. ≈ Нет ничего полезнее морского воздуха для укрепления здоровья. ∙ touch at touch bottom touch down touch for touch in touch off touch on touch up touch upon touch wood to touch smb. on a sore/tender placeзадеть кого-л. за живое прикосновение;
    касание - at a * при (первом) прикосновении - a * of /with/ a stick прикосновение палочкой - a * to the cap приветствие прикосновением к шапке - to give a * прикоснуться - to give one's horse a * of the spurs слегка пришпорить коня - he felt a cold * on his arm он почувствовал на руке холодное прикосновение - momentary * (of the shoulders to the mat) кратковременное соприкосновение лопаток с ковром (спортивная борьба) осязание - * is the fifth of our senses осязание - наше пятое чувство - soft to the * мягкий на ощупь - to know smth. by (the) * узнать что-л. на ощупь - he has a delicate sense of * у него очень чувствительная кожа, у него очень развито осязание /чувство осязания/ чувствительность;
    чуткость, такт - she has a wonderful * with chldren она удивительно тактична с детьми тактильное ощущение - the velvety * of fabric бархатистость ткани - the cold * of marble холод мрамора соприкосновение, общение;
    связь, контакт - in * with smb. в контакте с кем-л. - I'll be in * я далеко не уеду, я дам о себе знать - to get in /into/ * with smb. связаться с кем-л. - to keep in * with smb. поддерживать связь /контакт/ с кем-л. - I can't get in * with him никак не могу поймать его - to put smb. in * with smb. познакомить /связать/ кого-л. с кем-л. - to be out of * /to lose */ with smb. потерять связь /не общаться/ с кем-л. - to lose * with the older generation терять контакты со старшим поколением - have you lost * with your friends back home? вы потеряли связь с друзьями на родине? знание, понимание, контроль - to be in * with the situation быть в курсе дел;
    знать, как идут дела - to keep smb. in * with smth. держать кого-л. в курсе дел - to be out of * with smth. быть не в курсе дел;
    перестать следить за чем-л. - to be out of * with modern methods не знать современных методов, не владеть /не уметь пользоваться/ современными методами - to lose * with reality утратить представление о действительности, жить в мире грез штрих;
    черточка;
    деталь - vivid *es in the story живые детали в рассказе - a few deft *es несколько искусных штрихов - to put /to give/ the finishing /the final/ *es to smth., to add the final * to smth. добавлять последние штрихи к чему-л., отделывать что-л.;
    заканчивать /завершать/ что-л. характерная черта - the personal * характерная черта (человека) - * of nature черта характера - a characteristic * in speech характерная нотка в речи - a dress with individual * about it платье с выдумкой - a man with a * of good breeding хорошо воспитанный человек, человек с прекрасными манерами (художественная) манера, стиль;
    прием;
    сноровка - a sculptor with a bold * скульптор со смелым резцом - he writes with a light * он пишет просто /доходчиво/ - I know the *es of his tools я знаю его работу - one can easily recognize the * of the master легко можно узнать руку большого художника - a tennis player who has lost his * теннисист, утративший свой стиль - his room needs a woman's * этой комнате не хватает женской руки;
    в этой комнате не чувствуется присутствия женщины( разговорное) особый фасон или манера - the latest * последний крик моды( музыкальное) туше - firm * уверенное туше эффект туше или удара - a piano with a stiff * фортепьяно с тугими клавишами - the typewriter has a light * у этой (пишущей) машинки легкая клавиатура чуточка;
    примесь;
    оттенок, налет - a * of garlic привкус чеснока - a * of perfume слабый запах /аромат/ духов - a * of irony оттенок иронии - an acid * in smb.'s voice кислая нотка в голосе - the first *es of autumn первые признаки осени - to have a * of colour быть слегка окрашенным - there's a * of colour in her cheeks ее щеки слегка порозовели - there was a * of frost in the air чувствовался легкий морозец, слегка морозило - there was a * of the Dane about him в нем было что-то от датчанина - his hope is a * too wild его надежды немножко беспочвенны - ask me no more, for at a * I yield не просите меня больше, еще слово - и я уступлю легкий приступ (болезни) ;
    небольшой ушиб и т. п. - a * of the sun легкий солнечный удар - a * of rheumatism слабый /небольшой/ приступ ревматизма - * of fever небольшой жар, температурка - he has a * of flu он немного простужен (разговорное) сумма - the dinner was a guinea * обед обошелся в гинею (сленг) деньги, полученные взаймы или выпрошенные;
    деньги, полученные мошенническим путем - to come for a * прийти с целью поживиться - to make a *, to put the * (on smb.) подзанять денег (у кого-л.) ;
    выклянчить/ выцыганить/ деньги (у кого-л.) (сленг) мошенничество, обман, надувательство - it's a * меня надули, меня объегорили качественная проба (золота, серебра и др. металлов) метка, клеймо, проба ( на золоте, серебре и др. металлах) проба на степень густоты сиропа (в сахароварении) (устаревшее) пробный камень (медицина) ощупывание;
    пальпация намагничивание( прикосновение предмета к магниту) (спортивное) площадь, лежащая за боковыми линиями футбольного поля - to kick the ball into * выбить мяч за боковую линию (спортивное) боковая линия - out of * за боковой линией > easy /soft/ * человек, легко дающий деньги в долг;
    слабое место, слабое звено > he's an easy /soft/ * у него легко занять деньги;
    его легко надуть > he thinks you're a soft * in the family он думает, что ты в нашей семье - слабое место > common *, * of elbows чувство локтя > a near * опасное /рискованное/ положение;
    опасность, которую едва удалось избежать > rum * странный /эксцентричный/ человек;
    странное дело > in /within/ * близко, под рукой;
    доступно, достижимо > to put to the * подвергнуть испытанию немного, чуточку - to aim a * too low прицелиться чуть-чуть ниже, чем нужно касаться, трогать, прикасаться, притрагиваться - to * slightly слегка прикоснуться - to * the ball (спортивное) задеть мяч, коснуться мяча - to * a thing with the hand трогать вещь рукой - to * land приземлиться - to * the horse with the spur, to * one's spurs to the horse слегка пришпорить коня - to * a person on the arm привлечь чье-л. внимание, коснувшись руки - he *ed his lute /the strings of his lute/ delicately он нежно коснулся струн лютни касаться, соприкасаться - the two ships *ed два судна соприкоснулись - our palms *ed наши ладони коснулись друг друга быть каким-л. на ощупь - the rock *es rough скала кажется шершавой на ощупь (обычно отриц. или вопр.) трогать (пальцами, руками) - visitors are requested not to * the exhibits посетителей просят не трогать руками экспонаты - nothing must be *ed until the police have come нельзя ничего трогать до прихода полиции (обычно отриц. или вопр.) притрагиваться (к еде, вину и т. п.) ;
    есть, пить - he has not *ed food for two days два дня он ничего не ел - I couldn't * anything я не мог ничего есть - he never *es a drop он не пьет ни капли( обычно отриц. или вопр.) тронуть, ударить - don't * her! только посмей тронуть ее! - he swears he never *ed the child он клянется, что никогда не трогал ребенка (обычно отриц. или вопр.) заниматься( чем-л.), делать( что-л.) ;
    брать в руки;
    прикасаться - we have not been able to * our work all day за весь день мы не смогли прикоснуться к работе - I haven't *ed the piano for a long time я давно не играл на пианино - he had never *ed a card before then до этого он вообще не брал в руки карт( обычно отриц. или вопр.) касаться, иметь половые отношения - I doubt it he had ever *ed a woman before his marriage сомневаюсь, что он имел дело с женщинами до женитьбы соприкасаться, примыкать, граничить - his garden *es mine его сад граничит с моим - the country *es mountains on the north с севера страну замыкают /к стране примыкают/ горы достигать;
    доставать - can you * the ceiling? вы можете достать до потолка? - to * bottom коснуться дна достигать, доходить до, равняться - the thermometer *ed 30 degrees yesterday вчера термометр поднялся до 30 градусов - he *es 6 feet он шести футов ростом равняться, идти в сравнение с - there is nothing to * sea air for bracing you up нет ничего полезнее морского воздуха для укрепления здоровья - is there one of you that could * him? разве кто-нибудь из вас может сравниться с ним? - my cooking can't * yours мое кулинарное искусство не идет в сравнение с вашим иметь отношение (к чему-л.) - the question *es you nearly вопрос близко касается вас - the new law doesn't * the case at all новый закон никак не распространяется на этот случай;
    этот случай совершенно не подходит под новый закон - how does this * me? какое это имеет ко мне отношение? - I won't * that business я не хочу иметь ничего общего с этим делом влиять, оказывать влияние - his war experiences seem not to have *ed him at all военные переживания не оставили никакого следа в его душе - alert to everything that *ed his personal honour чувствительный ко всему, что затрагивало его честь оказывать физическое воздействие - nothing will * these stains эти пятна ничем не выведешь - this acid will not * silver эта кислота не действует на серебро - this metal is so hard that a file cannot * it металл настолько твердый, что напильник его не берет обыкн. р.р. наносить вред, ущерб;
    слегка портить - the leaves are *es with frost листья тронуты морозом - the paintings were not *ed by the fire огонь не тронул картин - this horse is slightly *ed in the wind у этой лошади дыхание немного не в порядке /не все в порядке с дыханием/ обыкн. р.р. действовать на психику - he is slightly *ed он немного не в себе, у него не все дома - the fright has *ed his wits он помешался от испуга обыкн. р.р. легко ранить, задеть - no soldiers were *ed in the skirmish ни один солдат в стычке не пострадал трогать, волновать - the sad story *ed her heart эта печальная история взволновала ее - he was *ed by her kindness он был тронут ее добротой - no memory of the past *ed him картины прошлого не волновали его - he was *ed to tears он был растроган до слез - his repentance *ed me to the heart его раскаяние тронуло меня до глубины души задевать за живое;
    сердить, раздражать - his vanity was *ed no less than his sense of duty его тщеславие было задето не меньше, чем его чувство долга - to * smb. to the quick, to * smb. home, to * smb. on a raw /on a sore, on a tender/ place, to * smb. on the raw задеть кого-л. за живое, задеть чье-л. больное место;
    уязвить кого-л. до глубины души обыкн. р.р. слегка окрашивать;
    придавать оттенок - clouds *ed with pink розоватые облака обыкн. р.р. подмешивать, примешивать - admiration *ed with envy восхищение, к которому примешивается зависть, восхищение с оттенком зависти ставить пробу, клеймо, метку (на металле) (редкое) упоминать, намекать( медицина) ощупывать, пальпировать (математика) касаться, быть касательной (спортивное) наносить удар (фехтование) - to * one's opponent коснуться противника (рапирой) (устаревшее) намагничивать( прикосновением к магниту) затрагивать (тему, вопрос) - we *ed many topics in our talk в разговоре мы коснулись многих тем - he merely *ed the subject он лишь затронул вопрос наносить (линии, штрихи) изменять, подправлять, перекрашивать( штрихами, мазками) давать сигнал( звонком, горном) - to * the bell нажать на кнопку звонка получать (жалованье, стипендию) - he *es $2 a week он получает два доллара в неделю быть следующим за чем-л. (о мастях карт и т. п.) - diamonds * hearts бубны следуют за червями /идут сразу после червей/ (морское) плыть круто к ветру (о парусниках) - to touch at a port заходить в порт( о судах) - what ports did your boat * at on your trip? в какие порты заходил ваш пароход во время путешествия? - to touch smb. for smth. (разговорное) выпрашивать, клянчить, занимать, выманивать что-л. у кого-л.;
    (амер) воровать, красть, вынимать из кармана что-л. у кого-л. - he *ed John for a dollar он заставил Джона раскошелиться на доллар - he *ed me for a large sum of money он занял /выклянчил/ у меня большую сумму денег - to * smb. for his watch вынуть у кого-л. (из кармана) часы, срезать часы у кого-л. - to touch (up) on smth. затрагивать, касаться, упоминать что-л.;
    влиять, оказывать влияние на что-л.;
    иметь отношение к чему-л.;
    подходить близко, граничить с чем-л.;
    доходить до, достигать (о температуре и т. п.) - I have already *ed on these questions я уже говорил об этом - the revolution *ed on almost all aspects of human activity революция затронула почти все аспекты человеческой деятельности - his actions * on treason его действия граничат с предательством, его действия - почти предательство - to touch one's hat to smb. коснуться шляпы, приподнять шляпу в знак приветствия - to touch smth. to smth. подносить что-л. к чему-л. - he *ed a lighted match to the candle он поднес зажженную спичку к свече > to * and go коснуться дна;
    выиграть один шанс из тысячи;
    едва удаться > to * shore подплыть к берегу > to * bottom дойти до предельно низкого уровняценах) ;
    опуститься;
    добраться до сути дела;
    (авиация) (жаргон) разбиться > our hopes *ed bottom надежда в нас едва теплилась > to * pitch иметь дело с сомнительным предприятием или субъектом > to * the spot попасть в цель, соответствовать своему назначению;
    понять суть дела;
    найти корень зла > a glass of iced beer *es the spot on a hot day стакан холодного пива - незаменимая вещь в жаркий день > to * wood пытаться умилостивить судьбу, стучать по дереву, чтобы не накликать беду > * wood! не сглазьте!;
    постучите по дереву! > I would not * him with a barge-pole /with a pair of tongs, (американизм) with a ten foot pole/ он мне противен /омерзителен/ > to * the wind (морское) заполаскивать (о парусах) ~ слегка окрашивать;
    придавать оттенок;
    clouds touched with rose розоватые облака ~ typist машинистка, работающая по слепому методу;
    common touch чувство локтя ~ соприкосновение, общение;
    in touch (with smb.) в контакте (с кем-л.) ;
    to get in touch (with smb.) связаться( с кем-л.) ~ подход (к людям) ;
    такт;
    he has a marvellous touch in dealing with children он прекрасно ладит с детьми ~ притрагиваться к еде, есть;
    he has not touched food for two days он два дня ничего не ел;
    I couldn't touch anything я не был голоден ~ (обыкн. pass.) слегка портить;
    leaves are touched with frost листья тронуты морозом;
    he is slightly touched = у него не все дома ~ разг. получать, добывать (деньги, особ. в долг или мошенничеством;
    for) ;
    he touched me for a large sum of money он занял, выклянчил у меня большую сумму (денег) to ~ (smb.) on a sore (или tender) place задеть (кого-л.) за живое;
    he touches six feet он шести футов ростом ~ касаться, иметь отношение (к чему-л.) ;
    how does this touch me? какое это имеет отношение ко мне? ~ притрагиваться к еде, есть;
    he has not touched food for two days он два дня ничего не ел;
    I couldn't touch anything я не был голоден ~ спорт. площадь за боковыми линиями (футбольного и т. п.) поля;
    in touch за боковой линией ~ соприкосновение, общение;
    in touch (with smb.) в контакте (с кем-л.) ;
    to get in touch (with smb.) связаться (с кем-л.) in (или within) ~ близко, под рукой in (или within) ~ доступно, достижимо;
    near touch опасность, которую едва удалось избежать;
    no touch (to smth.) ничто по сравнению( с чем-л.), не выдерживает никакой критики ~ (обыкн. pass.) слегка портить;
    leaves are touched with frost листья тронуты морозом;
    he is slightly touched = у него не все дома to lose ~ (with smb.) потерять связь, контакт (с кем-л.) in (или within) ~ доступно, достижимо;
    near touch опасность, которую едва удалось избежать;
    no touch (to smth.) ничто по сравнению( с чем-л.), не выдерживает никакой критики in (или within) ~ доступно, достижимо;
    near touch опасность, которую едва удалось избежать;
    no touch (to smth.) ничто по сравнению (с чем-л.), не выдерживает никакой критики ~ оказывать воздействие;
    nothing will touch these stains этих пятен ничем не выведешь ~ характерная черта;
    the touch of a poet поэтическая струнка;
    personal touch характерные черты (человека) ~ штрих;
    to put the finishing touches (to) делать последние штрихи, отделывать;
    заканчивать ~ проба, испытание;
    to put (или to bring) to the touch подвергнуть испытанию ~ осязание;
    soft to the touch мягкий на ощупь ~ сравниться;
    достичь такого же высокого уровня;
    there is nothing to touch sea air for bracing you up нет ничего полезнее морского воздуха для укрепления здоровья ~ чуточка;
    примесь;
    оттенок, налет;
    a touch of salt чуточка соли;
    there was a touch of bitterness in what he said в его словах чувствовалась горечь touch sl вымогательство;
    получение денег обманным путем ~ геом. касаться, быть касательной;
    touch at мор. заходить( в порт) ;
    touch down приземлиться, коснуться земли ~ геом. касаться, быть касательной;
    touch at мор. заходить (в порт) ;
    touch down приземлиться, коснуться земли ~ характерная черта;
    the touch of a poet поэтическая струнка;
    personal touch характерные черты (человека) ~ чуточка;
    примесь;
    оттенок, налет;
    a touch of salt чуточка соли;
    there was a touch of bitterness in what he said в его словах чувствовалась горечь ~ легкий приступ (болезни) ;
    небольшой ушиб;
    a touch of the sun перегрев ~ up взволновать;
    touch upon = touch on;
    to touch shore подплыть к берегу ~ (при) касаться, трогать, притрагиваться;
    соприкасаться;
    to touch one's hat (to smb.) приветствовать( кого-л.), приподнимая шляпу ~ up взволновать;
    touch upon = touch on;
    to touch shore подплыть к берегу ~ доходить до ~ геом. касаться, быть касательной;
    touch at мор. заходить (в порт) ;
    touch down приземлиться, коснуться земли ~ касаться, иметь отношение (к чему-л.) ;
    how does this touch me? какое это имеет отношение ко мне? ~ касаться, слегка затрагивать (тему, вопрос) ~ (при) касаться, трогать, притрагиваться;
    соприкасаться;
    to touch one's hat (to smb.) приветствовать (кого-л.), приподнимая шляпу ~ касаться ~ контакт ~ легкий приступ (болезни) ;
    небольшой ушиб;
    a touch of the sun перегрев ~ манера, приемы (художника и т. п.) ~ оказывать воздействие;
    nothing will touch these stains этих пятен ничем не выведешь ~ осязание;
    soft to the touch мягкий на ощупь ~ подход (к людям) ;
    такт;
    he has a marvellous touch in dealing with children он прекрасно ладит с детьми ~ получать (жалованье) ~ разг. получать, добывать (деньги, особ. в долг или мошенничеством;
    for) ;
    he touched me for a large sum of money он занял, выклянчил у меня большую сумму (денег) ~ спорт. площадь за боковыми линиями (футбольного и т. п.) поля;
    in touch за боковой линией ~ прикосновение ~ притрагиваться к еде, есть;
    he has not touched food for two days он два дня ничего не ел;
    I couldn't touch anything я не был голоден ~ проба, испытание;
    to put (или to bring) to the touch подвергнуть испытанию ~ разница между лучшей ценой продавца и лучшей ценой покупателя по конкретному виду ценных бумаг ~ салки (детская игра;
    тж. touch and run) ~ связь ~ слегка окрашивать;
    придавать оттенок;
    clouds touched with rose розоватые облака ~ (обыкн. pass.) слегка портить;
    leaves are touched with frost листья тронуты морозом;
    he is slightly touched = у него не все дома ~ соприкосновение, общение;
    in touch (with smb.) в контакте (с кем-л.) ;
    to get in touch (with smb.) связаться (с кем-л.) ~ соприкосновение ~ сравниться;
    достичь такого же высокого уровня;
    there is nothing to touch sea air for bracing you up нет ничего полезнее морского воздуха для укрепления здоровья ~ трогать, волновать, задевать за живое ~ муз. туше ~ характерная черта;
    the touch of a poet поэтическая струнка;
    personal touch характерные черты (человека) ~ чуточка;
    примесь;
    оттенок, налет;
    a touch of salt чуточка соли;
    there was a touch of bitterness in what he said в его словах чувствовалась горечь ~ штрих;
    to put the finishing touches (to) делать последние штрихи, отделывать;
    заканчивать ~ at a port заходить в порт ~ off быстро набросать;
    передать сходство ~ off вызвать( спор и т. п.) ~ off вызывать спор ~ off выпалить( из пушки) ~ off давать отбой (по телефону) ~ off дать отбой( по телефону) ~ on граничить (с чем-л.) (напр., с дерзостью) ~ on затрагивать, касаться вкратце (вопроса и т. п.) to ~ (smb.) on a sore (или tender) place задеть (кого-л.) за живое;
    he touches six feet он шести футов ростом to ~ pitch иметь дело с сомнительным предприятием или субъектом;
    to touch the spot попасть в цель;
    соответствовать своему назначению ~ typist машинистка, работающая по слепому методу;
    common touch чувство локтя ~ up взволновать;
    touch upon = touch on;
    to touch shore подплыть к берегу ~ up заканчивать ~ up исправлять, заканчивать, отделывать, класть последние штрихи, мазки ~ up исправлять ~ up напомнить, натолкнуть ~ up отделывать ~ up подстегнуть (лошадь) to ~ wood пытаться умилостивить судьбу, предотвратить дурное предзнаменование;
    touch wood! не сглазьте! to ~ pitch иметь дело с сомнительным предприятием или субъектом;
    to touch the spot попасть в цель;
    соответствовать своему назначению ~ up взволновать;
    touch upon = touch on;
    to touch shore подплыть к берегу to ~ wood пытаться умилостивить судьбу, предотвратить дурное предзнаменование;
    touch wood! не сглазьте!

    Большой англо-русский и русско-английский словарь > touch

  • 16 nennen

    to name; to cite; to call
    * * *
    nẹn|nen ['nɛnən] pret na\#nnte ['nantə] ptp gena\#nnt [gə'nant]
    1. vt
    1) (= bezeichnen) to call; (= einen bestimmten Namen geben) to name, to call

    jdn nach jdm nennento name sb after (Brit) or for (US) sb

    Friedrich II., genannt "der Große" — Frederick II, known as Frederick the Great

    See:
    eigen, Name, so
    2) (= angeben, aufzählen) to name; Beispiel, Grund, Details to give
    3) (= erwähnen) to mention

    das ( weiter oben) Genannte — the above

    das genannte Schloss — the above-mentioned castle, the castle referred to

    2. vr
    to call oneself; (= heißen) to be called, to call oneself

    er nennt sich nur sothat's just what he calls himself

    und so was nennt sich Liebe/modern (inf) — and they call that love/modern

    und so was ( wie er) nennt sich modern/Dichter (inf) — and he calls himself modern/a poet

    * * *
    1) (to nickname: He was dubbed Shorty because of his size.) dub
    2) (to give a name to: They named the child Thomas.) name
    * * *
    nen·nen
    < nannte, genannt>
    [ˈnɛnən]
    I. vt
    jdn/etw \nennen to name [or call] sb/sth
    genannt known as
    2. (anreden) to call
    Freunde dürfen mich Johnny \nennen friends may call me Johnny
    etw \nennen to call sth
    wie nennt man das? what do you call that? [or is that called?
    [jdm] jdn/etw \nennen to name sb/sth [to sb]
    ich nenne Ihnen einige Namen I'll give you a few names
    können Sie mir einen guten Anwalt \nennen? can you give me the name of a good lawyer?
    genannt referred to
    das genannte Restaurant... the restaurant mentioned...
    5.
    das nenne ich... I call that...
    das nenne ich aber mal ein leckeres Mittagessen! [now] that's what I call a delicious lunch!
    II. vr (heißen)
    sich akk \nennen to call oneself
    und so was nennt sich...! (fam) and they call that a...!
    du bist gemein! und so was nennt sich Freundin! you're mean! and you call yourself a friend!
    * * *
    1.
    unregelmäßiges transitives Verb
    1) call

    jemanden nach jemandem nennencall or name somebody after somebody

    jemanden beim Vornamen nennen — call somebody by his/her first or Christian name

    das nenne ich Mut/eine Überraschung — that's what I call courage/well, that 'is a surprise

    2) (mitteilen) give <name, date of birth, address, reason, price, etc.>
    3) (anführen) give, cite < example>; (erwähnen) mention < person, name>
    2.
    unregelmäßiges reflexives Verb <person, thing> be called

    er nennt sich Malerusw. (behauptet Maler usw. zu sein) he calls himself a painter etc.

    und so was nennt sich nun ein Freund(ugs.) and he/she has the nerve to call himself/herself a friend

    * * *
    nennen; nennt, nannte, hat genannt
    A. v/t name; (benennen) auch call, designate form; spottend: dub;
    jemanden nach jemandem nennen name ( oder call) sb after sb;
    mit seinem Namen nennen call sb by his ( oder her) name;
    Maria I., genannt „die Katholische“ Mary I, (otherwise) known as Mary the Catholic;
    das nenne ich eine Überraschung! well, that really is a surprise!;
    das nenne ich ein gelungenes Buch that’s what I call a well-written book;
    das nennst du einen guten Wein? is that what you call a good wine?
    2. (erwähnen) mention; (anführen) quote; (preisgeben) reveal, give away;
    kannst du mir den höchsten Berg der Welt nennen? can you name ( oder what’s) the highest mountain in the world?;
    können Sie mir ein gutes Hotel/eine gute Werkstatt nennen? can you give me the name of a good hotel/garage?
    3. (benennen) name;
    morgen will das Parteipräsidium den Spitzenkandidaten nennen the party executive committee wants to name the top candidate tomorrow;
    pro Verein können zwei Teilnehmer genannt werden each club can name two participants
    B. v/r be called;
    wie nennt sich …? what’s … called?;
    und das oder umg
    so was nennt sich Lehrer! and he calls himself a teacher;
    und das nennt sich Kultur! and that’s supposed to be culture, and that goes by the name of culture, and they call it culture; Eigen, genannt, Name 1
    * * *
    1.
    unregelmäßiges transitives Verb
    1) call

    jemanden nach jemandem nennencall or name somebody after somebody

    jemanden beim Vornamen nennen — call somebody by his/her first or Christian name

    das nenne ich Mut/eine Überraschung — that's what I call courage/well, that 'is a surprise

    2) (mitteilen) give <name, date of birth, address, reason, price, etc.>
    3) (anführen) give, cite < example>; (erwähnen) mention <person, name>
    2.
    unregelmäßiges reflexives Verb <person, thing> be called

    er nennt sich Malerusw. (behauptet Maler usw. zu sein) he calls himself a painter etc.

    und so was nennt sich nun ein Freund(ugs.) and he/she has the nerve to call himself/herself a friend

    * * *
    v.
    (§ p.,pp.: nannte, genannt)
    = to name v.

    Deutsch-Englisch Wörterbuch > nennen

  • 17 BURR

    (-ar, -ir), m. poet. son.
    * * *
    m., gen. ar, pl. ir, a son, akin to bera and barn, but poët., being used in prose only in allit. phrases such as, eigi buri við bónda sínum, Stj. 428; sem burr eðr bróðir, Fms. xi. 75; áttu börn og buru (acc. pl.) grófu rætr og muru is a standing peroration of Icel. nursery tales, Ísl. Þjóðs. ii. 319, vide Lex. Poët.: else in prose only used in the weak form in the compd words tví-buri, twins; þrí-buri, three at a birth, (in modern statistics even fleir-buri.)

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > BURR

  • 18 Peneus

    Pēnēus, i, m., = Pêneios, a principal river in Thessaly, which rises in Mount Pindus, flows through the Vale of Tempe, and falls into the Gulf of Therma, the modern Selembria; in mythology, a rivergod, the father of Cyrene and Daphne, Ov. M. 1, 569 sq.; Plin. 4, 8, 15, § 31; Liv. 32, 15; Verg. G. 4, 355; Hyg. Fab. 161; 203.— Voc. Penee, Ov. Am. 3, 6, 31.—Hence,
    A.
    Pēnēis, ĭdis, f., = Pênêis, of or belonging to the Peneus, Penean ( poet.):

    Nympha,

    i.e. Daphne, Ov. M. 1, 504; 1, 472.—
    B.
    Pē-nēĭus, a, um, adj., = Pênêïos, of or belonging to the Peneus, Penean ( poet.):

    Peneia Tempe,

    Verg. G. 4, 317:

    arva,

    Ov. M. 12, 209:

    Daphne,

    id. ib. 1, 452:

    amnis,

    i. e. the Peneus, Luc. 8, 33.—
    C.
    Pēnēus, a, um, adj., Penean ( poet.):

    undae,

    Ov. M. 7, 230.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > Peneus

  • 19 Historical Portugal

       Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.
       A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.
       Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140
       The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."
       In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.
       The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.
       Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385
       Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in
       Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.
       The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.
       Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580
       The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.
       The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.
       What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.
       By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.
       Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.
       The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.
       By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.
       In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.
       Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640
       Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.
       Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.
       On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.
       Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822
       Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.
       Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.
       In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the
       Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.
       Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.
       Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.
       Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910
       During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.
       Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.
       Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.
       Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.
       Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.
       As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.
       First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26
       Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.
       The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.
       Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.
       The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74
       During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."
       Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.
       For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),
       and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.
       The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.
       With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.
       During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.
       The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.
       At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.
       The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.
       Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76
       Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.
       Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.
       In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.
       In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.
       In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.
       The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until
       UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.
       Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000
       After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.
       From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.
       Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.
       Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.
       In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.
       In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.
       Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.
       Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.
       The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.
       Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.
       Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).
       All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.
       The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.
       After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.
       Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.
       Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.
       From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.
       Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.
       In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.
       An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal

  • 20 zugleich

    Adv. at the same time; (miteinander) together; sie ist schön und intelligent zugleich she’s both beautiful and intelligent; she’s not only beautiful, she’s intelligent as well
    * * *
    at the same time; together
    * * *
    zu|gleich [tsu'glaiç]
    adv
    (= zur gleichen Zeit) at the same time; (= ebenso auch) both

    er ist zugléích Gitarrist und Komponist — he is both a guitarist and a composer

    die älteste und zugléích modernste Stadt des Landes — the country's oldest and at the same time most modern town

    * * *
    (together.) at the same time
    * * *
    zu·gleich
    [tsuˈglaiç]
    1. (ebenso) both
    2. (gleichzeitig) at the same time
    * * *
    Adverb at the same time
    * * *
    zugleich adv at the same time; (miteinander) together;
    sie ist schön und intelligent zugleich she’s both beautiful and intelligent; she’s not only beautiful, she’s intelligent as well
    * * *
    Adverb at the same time
    * * *
    adj.
    together adj. adv.
    at the same time adv.

    Deutsch-Englisch Wörterbuch > zugleich

См. также в других словарях:

  • Modern Kannada literature — refers to the body of literature written in the Kannada language, a language spoken mainly in the Indian state of Karnataka. The Kannada script is the writing system used in Kannada literature. In the last forty years, eight modern Kannada… …   Wikipedia

  • Modern Times (Bob Dylan album) — Modern Times Studio album by Bob Dylan Released August 29, 2006 …   Wikipedia

  • poet — poet, versifier, rhymer, rhymester, poetaster, bard, minstrel, troubadour denote a composer who uses metrical or rhythmical language as his medium. Poet is used in a generic sense and in several highly specific senses. In its generic sense it… …   New Dictionary of Synonyms

  • Modern Swedish — nysvenska Spoken in Sweden, Finland, Saint Barthélemy and Estonia Extinct developed into contemporary Swedish by the late 19th century …   Wikipedia

  • Modern Hebrew poetry — is poetry written in the Hebrew language. It was pioneered by Rabbi Moshe Chaim Luzzatto,[1] and it was developed by the Haskalah movements, that saw poetry as the most quality genre for Hebrew writing. The first Haskalah poet, who heavily… …   Wikipedia

  • Modern Greek literature — Greek literature Ancient Greek literature (until 4th century AD) Byzantine literature (4th – 15th century) Modern Greek literature (post 11th century) Modern Greek literature refers to literature written in the Greek language from the 11th… …   Wikipedia

  • Modern literature in Irish — Although Irish has been used as a literary language for more than 1500 years (see Irish literature), and in a form intelligible to contemporary speakers since at least the sixteenth century, modern literature in Irish owes much to the Gaelic… …   Wikipedia

  • Poet — A poet is a person who writes poetry. EtymologyFrom the ancient greek : , poieō : I make or compose ; , poïêtes : artisan, creator, maker (also makar), author, poet > Latin : : poet, author > Old French : (1200 1400) or > Used ( poet ) in 14th.… …   Wikipedia

  • Modern art — For other uses, see Modern art (disambiguation). Pablo Picasso, Dejeuner sur l Herbe …   Wikipedia

  • Modern converts to Christianity from Judaism — Part of a series of articles on Jews and Judaism …   Wikipedia

  • Modern architecture — This article is about architectural aspects of modernization and modernism. For most recent developments in architecture, see Contemporary architecture. Contrasts in modern architecture, as shown by adjacent high rises in Chicago, Illinois. IBM… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»